DECS-450

Digital Excitation Control System

Instruction Manual

12570 Route 143 • Highland, Illinois 62249-1074 USA Publication

Tel +1 618.654.2341 • Fax +1 618.654.2351 9597100990 Rev -
www.basler.com • [email protected]
August 2020
 WARNING: California's Proposition 65 requires special warnings for
products that may contain chemicals known to the state of California to
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Please note that
by posting this Proposition 65 warning, we are notifying you that one or
more of the Proposition 65 listed chemicals may be present in products
we sell to you. For more information about the specific chemicals found
in this product, please visit https://www.basler.com/Prop65.
9597100990 i

Preface
This instruction manual provides information about the installation and operation of the DECS-450 Digital
Excitation Control System. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:
• General Information
• Human-machine interface
• Functional description
• Installation
• BESTCOMSPlus® software
• Setup
• Communication protocols
• Maintenance
• Specifications
• Expansion modules

Conventions Used in this Manual

Important safety and procedural information is emphasized and presented in this manual through
warning, caution, and note boxes. Each type is illustrated and defined as follows.

Warning!

Warning boxes call attention to conditions or actions that may cause

personal injury or death.

Caution
Caution boxes call attention to operating conditions that may lead to
equipment or property damage.

Note
Note boxes emphasize important information pertaining to installation
or operation.

Note
Be sure that the device is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller
than 12 AWG (3.3 mm2) copper wire attached to the case ground
terminal. When the device is configured in a system with other
devices, a separate lead should be connected from the ground bus to
each device.
Current transformer (CT) grounding should be applied in accordance
with local codes and conventions.

DECS-450 Preface
ii 9597100990

12570 State Route 143

Highland IL 62249-1074 USA
www.basler.com
[email protected]
Tel: +1 618.654.2341
Fax: +1 618.654.2351

© 2020 by Basler Electric

All rights reserved
First printing: August 2020

Warning!

READ THIS MANUAL. Read this manual before installing, operating, or maintaining the DECS-450.
Note all warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual as well as on the product. Keep this manual with
the product for reference. Only qualified personnel should install, operate, or service this system.
Failure to follow warning and cautionary labels may result in personal injury or property damage.
Exercise caution at all times.

Basler Electric does not assume any responsibility to compliance or noncompliance with national code, local code,
or any other applicable code. This manual serves as reference material that must be well understood prior to
installation, operation, or maintenance.

For terms of service relating to this product and software, see the Commercial Terms of Products and Services
document available at www.basler.com/terms.
This publication contains confidential information of Basler Electric Company, an Illinois corporation. It is loaned for
confidential use, subject to return on request, and with the mutual understanding that it will not be used in any
manner detrimental to the interests of Basler Electric Company and used strictly for the purpose intended.
It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual provide
data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design of all features
and options are subject to modification without notice. Over time, improvements and revisions may be made to this
publication. Before performing any of the following procedures, contact Basler Electric for the latest revision of this
manual.
The English-language version of this manual serves as the only approved manual version.

Preface DECS-450
9597100990 iii

This product contains, in part, open source software (software licensed in a way that ensures freedom to run,
copy, distribute, study, change, and improve the software) and you are granted a license to that software under the
terms of either the GNU General Public License or GNU Lesser General Public License. The licenses, at the time
of sale of the product, allow you to freely copy, modify, and redistribute that software and no other statement or
documentation from us, including our End User License Agreement, places any additional restrictions on what you
may do with that software.
For at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of this product, a machine-readable copy of the complete
corresponding source code for the version of the programs distributed to you will be sent upon request (contact
information is provided above). A fee of no more than our cost of physically performing the source code distribution
is charged.
The source code is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY REPRESENTATION or
WARRANTY or even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Refer to the source code distribution for additional restrictions regarding warranty and copyrights.
For a complete copy of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 or GNU LESSER GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 refer to www.gnu.org or contact Basler Electric. You, as a Basler
Electric Company customer, agree to abide by the terms and conditions of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991 or GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999, and as such
hold Basler Electric Company harmless related to any open source software incorporated in this product. Basler
Electric Company disclaims any and all liability associated with the open source software and the user agrees to
defend and indemnify Basler Electric Company, its directors, officers, and employees from and against any and all
losses, claims, attorneys' fees, and expenses arising from the use, sharing, or redistribution of the software.
Review the software website for the latest version of the software documentation.
Portions of this software are copyright © 2014 The Free Type Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

DECS-450 Preface
iv 9597100990

Preface DECS-450
9597100990 v

Revision History
A historical summary of the changes made to this instruction manual is provided below. Revisions are
listed in reverse chronological order.
Visit www.basler.com to download the latest hardware, firmware, and BESTCOMSPlus® revision
histories.
Instruction Manual Revision History
Manual
Change
Revision and Date
–, Aug-20 • Initial release

DECS-450 Revision History

vi 9597100990

Revision History DECS-450

9597100990 vii

Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Controls and Indicators .............................................................................................................................. 2-1
Power Inputs .............................................................................................................................................. 3-1
Voltage and Current Sensing ..................................................................................................................... 4-1
Synchronizer .............................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Regulation .................................................................................................................................................. 6-1
Auxiliary Control ......................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Programmable Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 8-1
Protection ................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
Limiters ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Metering ................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
Event Recorder ........................................................................................................................................ 12-1
Power System Stabilizer .......................................................................................................................... 13-1
Stability Tuning ......................................................................................................................................... 14-1
Mounting................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
Terminals and Connectors ....................................................................................................................... 16-1
Typical Connections ................................................................................................................................. 17-1
BESTCOMSPlus ® Software ..................................................................................................................... 18-1
BESTlogic™Plus ...................................................................................................................................... 19-1
Communication ........................................................................................................................................ 20-1
Configuration ............................................................................................................................................ 21-1
Security .................................................................................................................................................... 22-1
Timekeeping ............................................................................................................................................. 23-1
Testing...................................................................................................................................................... 24-1
CAN Communication................................................................................................................................ 25-1
Modbus® Communication......................................................................................................................... 26-1
PROFIBUS Communication ..................................................................................................................... 27-1
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................. 28-1
Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 29-1
Analog Expansion Module ....................................................................................................................... 30-1
Contact Expansion Module ...................................................................................................................... 31-1
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.................................................................................................... 32-1

DECS-450 Contents
viii 9597100990

Contents DECS-450
9597100990 1-1

1 • Introduction
The DECS-450 Digital Excitation Control System is a microprocessor-based controller that offers
excitation control, logic control, and optional power system stabilization in an integrated package. The
DECS-450 controls field excitation by providing an analog signal used to control the output of an external
power bridge. The DECS-450 monitors generator or motor parameters and acts to control, limit, and
protect the machine from operating outside its capability.
The optional, onboard power system stabilizer (PSS) is an IEEE-defined PSS2A/2B/2C, dual-input,
“integral of accelerating power” stabilizer that provides supplementary damping for low-frequency, local
mode and power system oscillations.
BESTCOMSPlus® PC software provides a point-and-click means to set and monitor the DECS-450 and
makes the configuration of one or several DECS-450 controllers fast and efficient. BESTlogic™Plus
Programmable Logic, within BESTCOMSPlus, is used to program DECS-450 logic for protection
elements, inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. The user can easily drag and drop elements, components, inputs,
and outputs onto the program grid and make connections between them to create the desired logic
scheme with up to 256 logic gates per diagram.
The DECS-450 is designed for use with Basler Electric’s Interface Firing Module (IFM) and three- or six-
SCR power bridges. However, it will work equally well with any power bridge with a controller that is
compatible with the output signal from the DECS-450.

Features and Functions

DECS-450 features and functions include:
• Precise excitation control for synchronous generator or synchronous motor applications
o Power factor and var metering values will be opposite in motor mode
• Five excitation control modes:
o Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)
o Field Current Regulation (FCR)
o Field Voltage Regulation (FVR)
o Power Factor Regulation (PF)
o Var Regulation (var)
• Three pre-position setpoints for each excitation control mode
• Internal tracking between operating mode setpoints and external tracking of a second DECS
excitation setpoint
• Two PID stability groups
• Auto Tune feature: The revolutionary auto-tuning function automatically establishes optimum PID
and gain settings, taking the guesswork out of system setup, reducing commissioning time and
cost while maximizing overall system performance.
• Programmable analog control output selectable for 4 to 20 mAdc, –10 to +10 Vdc, or 0 to
+10 Vdc
• Remote setpoint control input accepts analog voltage or current control signal
• Real-time metering
• Automatic synchronizer
• Optional integrated PSS (IEEE Std 421.5 type PSS2A/2B/2C)
o Generator or motor control modes, accommodates phase rotation changes between
modes
o Speed and power sensing or speed-only sensing
o Three-wattmeter method of power measurement
• Soft start and voltage buildup control
• Five limiting functions:
o Overexcitation: summing point and takeover
o Underexcitation
o Stator current
o Reactive power (var)
DECS-450 Introduction
1-2 9597100990

o Underfrequency or volts per hertz

• Twenty-five protection functions:
o Volts per hertz (24)
o Generator undervoltage (27)
o Generator overvoltage (59)
o Loss of sensing (LOS)
o Overfrequency (81O)
o Two Underfrequency (81U)
o Reverse power (32R)
o Loss of excitation (40Q)
o Field overvoltage
o Field overcurrent
o Field overtemperature
o Loss of Field Isolation Transducer
o Exciter diode failure
o Sync-check (25)
o Generator below 10 hertz
o Watchdog timer
o Eight configurable protection elements
• External crowbar activation alarm support
• BESTCOMSPlus® software
• BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic
o Drag-and-drop interface
o 256 logic gates per diagram
• Network Load Sharing over Ethernet provides easy implementation in complex paralleled
systems.
• IRIG or network time synchronization
• Sixteen contact sensing inputs
o Two fixed-function inputs: Start and Stop
o Fourteen programmable inputs
• Twelve contact outputs
o One, fixed-function output: Watchdog (SPDT configuration)
o Eleven programmable outputs
• Flexible communication
o Front-panel USB port
o Modbus communication through RS-485 port or Modbus TCP
o Ethernet communication through an optional copper or fiber optic port
o CAN communication with an external control system, optional AEM-2020 Analog
Expansion Module, or optional CEM-2020 Contact Expansion Module
o Optional Profibus communication protocol
• Data logging, sequence of events recording, and trending
• Optional CEM-2020 Contact Expansion Module provides:
o Ten contact inputs
o Twenty-four contact outputs (CEM-2020)
o Customizable input and output functions assigned through BESTlogic™Plus
programmable logic
o Communication via CAN protocol
• Optional AEM-2020 Analog Expansion Module provides:
o Eight analog inputs
o Eight resistive thermocouple device (RTD) inputs
o Two thermocouple inputs
o Four analog outputs
o Customizable input and output functions assigned through BESTlogicPlus programmable
logic
o Communication via CAN protocol

Introduction DECS-450
9597100990 1-3

Applications
The DECS-450 is intended for synchronous generator or synchronous motor applications. The DECS-450
controls field excitation by providing an analog signal used to control the output of an external power
bridge. The level of excitation power is based on the monitored voltage and current, and a regulation
setpoint established by the user.

Package
A front panel HMI provides local annunciation and control through a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD),
light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and pushbuttons. The DECS-450 provides multiple communication
interfaces: CAN Bus, Ethernet, Modbus®, optional Profibus, and optional Interactive Display Panels: IDP-
801 and IDP-1201.

Optional Features and Capabilities

DECS-450 optional features and capabilities are defined by a combination of letters and numbers that
make up the style number. The model and style number describe options and characteristics in a specific
device and appear on a label affixed to the device.

Style Number
The style number identification chart in Figure 1-1 defines the electrical characteristics and operational
features available in the DECS-450.

Figure 1-1. DECS-450 Style Chart

DECS-450 Introduction
1-4 9597100990

Introduction DECS-450
9597100990 2-1

2 • Controls and Indicators

All controls and indicators are located on the front panel and consist of pushbuttons, LED indicators, and
a liquid-crystal display (LCD).

Front Panel Illustration and Description

DECS-450 controls and indicators are illustrated in Figure 2-1 and described in Table 2-1. The locators
and descriptions of Table 2-1 correspond to the locators shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators

DECS-450 Controls and Indicators

2-2 9597100990

Table 2-1. Front Panel Control and Indicators Descriptions

Locator Description
A Display. The liquid crystal display (LCD) serves as a local source of information
provided by the DECS-450. The LCD displays operating setpoints, loop gains,
metering, protection functions, system parameters, and general settings. The 128 by
64 dot pixel, backlit LCD displays white characters on a blue background.
B Null Balance Indicator. This green light emitting diode (LED) lights when the setpoint of
the inactive operating modes (AVR, FCR, FVR, Var, and PF) match the setpoint of the
active mode.
PSS Active Indicator. This red LED lights when the integrated power system stabilizer
is enabled and can generate a stabilizing signal in response to a power system
disturbance.
Internal Tracking Indicator. This red LED lights when any inactive mode (AVR, FCR,
FVR, Var, or Power Factor) is tracking the setpoint of the active mode to achieve a
“bumpless” transfer when changing active modes.
Pre-Position Indicator. This red LED lights when the active mode setpoint is at any of
the three pre-position (predefined) settings.
Limit Indicators. Two red LEDs indicate when the active mode setpoint reaches the
minimum or maximum value.
C Reset Pushbutton. This button cancels editing sessions, resets alarm annunciations
and latched alarm relays, and can be used for quick access to the metering screen.
D Scrolling Pushbuttons. These four buttons are used to scroll up, down, left, and right
through the menus displayed on the LCD (locator A). During an editing session, the
left and right scrolling pushbuttons select the variable to be changed and the up and
down scrolling pushbuttons change the value of the variable.
E Edit Pushbutton. Pressing this button starts an editing session and enables changes to
DECS-450 settings. At the conclusion of the editing session, the Edit pushbutton is
pressed to save the settings changes.
F Communication Port. This type B USB jack connects the DECS-450 with a PC
operating BESTCOMSPlus® for local communication. BESTCOMSPlus is supplied
with the DECS-450.

Menu Navigation
The DECS-450 provides local access to DECS-450 settings and metering values through a menu
structure displayed on the front panel LCD. An overview of the menu structure is illustrated in Table 2-2.
Movement through the menu structure is achieved by pressing the four scrolling pushbuttons.

Controls and Indicators DECS-450

9597100990 2-3

Table 2-2. DECS-450 Menu Structure Overview

Metering Settings Metering Summary Screen
(Metering Explorer) (Settings Explorer)

Generator General Settings Generator Voltage

Power Communication Field Current
Bus System Parameters Vars
Field Report Configuration Alarms Status
PSS (optional) Operating Settings Limiter Status
Synchronization PSS (optional) Setpoint Status
Aux Input Sync/Voltage Matching DECS Unit Status
Tracking Protection
Network Load Share Prog. Inputs
Control Panel Prog. Outputs
Status Logic
Reports

Adjusting Settings
Make setting adjustments at the front panel by performing the following steps.
1. Navigate to the screen listing the setting to be changed.
2. Press the Edit button and enter the appropriate username and password to gain the needed level
of security access. (Information about implementing and using username and password
protection is provided in the Security section of this manual.)
3. Highlight the desired setting and press the Edit button to view the setting editing screen. This
screen lists the setting range or the permissible setting selection.
4. Use the scrolling pushbuttons to select the setting digits/selections and adjust/change the setting.
5. Press the Edit button to save the change.

Display Setup
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Front Panel HMI
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, General Settings, Front Panel HMI
Front panel display appearance and behavior can be customized to meet user preferences and site
conditions. These BESTCOMSPlus settings are illustrated in Figure 2-3.

LCD
LCD setup includes a contrast adjustment to suit the viewing angle used or compensate for
environmental conditions. The ability to reverse the display colors is provided to accommodate lighting
conditions and user preferences.

Sleep Mode
Sleep mode reduces the demand on control power by turning off the LCD backlight when no pushbutton
activity is seen for the duration of the LCD Backlight Timeout setting.

Language
Language modules are available for the DECS-450. Once a language module is implemented, it can be
enabled via the Language Selection setting.

DECS-450 Controls and Indicators

2-4 9597100990

Screen Scrolling
The display can be set to automatically scroll through a user-selected list of metered values. This feature
is enabled and disabled with the Enable Scroll setting. The rate at which scrolling occurs is configured
with the Scroll Time Delay setting.

Figure 2-2. Front Panel HMI Settings

Controls and Indicators DECS-450

9597100990 3-1

3 • Power Input
The control power input supplies power to an internal power supply that provides power for logic,
protection, and control functions. Control power input voltage is determined by the DECS-450 style
number.
Style XLXXXXX has one, dc-only input that accepts 16 to 60 Vdc (24 or 48 Vdc nominal).
Style XCXXXXX has two inputs, one for ac and one for dc. The ac input accepts 82 to 132 Vac at
50/60 Hz (120 Vac nominal). The dc input accepts 90 to 150 Vdc (125 Vdc nominal). One input, either ac
or dc, is sufficient for operation, but two inputs provide redundancy (for style XCXXXXX only). AC control
power is applied at terminals L and N. DC control power is applied at terminals BATT+ and BATT–.

Caution
When both control power inputs are used (style XCXXXXX only), an isolation
transformer is required for the ac input.

Refer to the Terminals and Connectors and Typical Connections sections for more information.

DECS-450 Power Inputs

3-2 9597100990

Power Inputs DECS-450

9597100990 4-1

4 • Voltage and Current Sensing

The DECS-450 senses generator voltage, generator current, and bus voltage through dedicated, isolated
inputs. Field sensing values are supplied to DECS-450 from the Field Isolation Transducer (supplied with
the DECS-450).

Generator Voltage
Three-phase generator sensing voltage is applied to DECS-450 terminals E1, E2, and E3. This sensing
voltage is typically applied through a user-supplied voltage transformer, but may be applied directly.
These terminals accept three-phase, three-wire connections at terminals E1 (A), E2 (B), and E3 (C) or
single-phase connections at E1 (A) and E3 (C).
The generator voltage sensing input accepts a maximum voltage of 240 Vac (nominal) and has a burden
of less than 1 VA per phase.
The transformer primary and secondary winding voltages are entered in settings that the DECS-450 uses
to interpret the applied sensing voltage and calculate system parameters. The phase rotation of the
generator sensing voltage may be configured as ABC or ACB. Information about configuring the DECS-
450 for the generator sensing voltage is provided in the Configuration section of this manual.
Typical generator voltage sensing connections are illustrated in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1. Typical Generator Voltage Sensing Connections

Generator Current
Generator current sensing inputs consist of A-phase, B-phase, C-phase, and cross-current
compensation.

Notes
• Current transformer (CT) grounding should be applied in
accordance with local codes and conventions.
• In this manual, CT terminals are shown with polarity designations
(+/–) and terminal numbers, however, physical DECS-450 CT
terminals are labeled with terminal numbers only.

DECS-450 Voltage and Current Sensing

4-2 9597100990

Phase Sensing
For single- or three-phase configurations, apply A-phase sensing current to DECS-450 terminals
75 (CTA+) and 76 (CTA–), B-phase to terminals 77 (CTB+) and 78 (CTB–) and, C-phase to terminals
79 (CTC+) and 80 (CTC–) through user-supplied current transformers.
The DECS-450 is compatible with CTs having 5 Aac or 1 Aac nominal secondary ratings. The DECS-450
uses this secondary rating, along with the CT nominal primary ratings to interpret the sensed current and
calculate system parameters.
For information on sensing transformer settings, refer to the Configuration section of this manual. Typical
generator phase-current sensing connections are shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2. Typical Generator Current Sensing Connections

Note
Three-phase sensing is required for PSS applications.

Cross-Current Compensation
Cross-current compensation (reactive differential) mode allows two or more paralleled generators to
share a common load. As shown in Figure 4-3, each generator is controlled by a DECS-450 using the
DECS-450 cross-current compensation terminals 81 (CCCT+) and 82 (CCCT–) and a dedicated, external
CT to sense generator current (B phase only). The resistors shown in Figure 4-3 are used to set the
burden and may be adjusted to suit the application. Ensure that the power rating of the resistors is
adequate for the application.

Note
If a machine is taken offline, then the secondary winding of that
machine’s cross-current compensation CT must be shorted.
Otherwise, the cross-current compensation scheme will not function.

Voltage and Current Sensing DECS-450

9597100990 4-3

Figure 4-3. Connections for Cross-Current Compensation

Bus Voltage
Bus voltage monitoring provides bus failure detection, generator and bus voltage matching, and
synchronization of the generator with the utility/bus. These features are discussed in the Synchronizer
section of this manual. Three-phase bus sensing voltage is applied to DECS-450 terminals B1, B2, and
B3. This sensing voltage is typically applied through a user-supplied voltage transformer, but may be
applied directly. These terminals accept three-phase, three-wire connections at terminals B1 (A), B2 (B),
and B3 (C) or single-phase connections at B3 (C) and B1 (A).
The bus voltage sensing input accepts a maximum voltage of 240 Vac (nominal) and has a burden of less
than 1 VA per phase.
The transformer primary and secondary winding voltages are entered in settings that the DECS-450 uses
to interpret the applied sensing voltage. Information about configuring the DECS-450 for the bus sensing
voltage is provided in the Configuration section of this manual.
Typical bus voltage sensing connections are illustrated in Figure 4-4.

DECS-450 Voltage and Current Sensing

4-4 9597100990

Figure 4-4. Typical Bus Voltage Sensing Connections

Field Voltage and Current

The DECS-450 receives field voltage and current signals from the Field Isolation Transducer (supplied).
The Field Isolation Transducer transmits field voltage and current signals through a dedicated cable
terminated at the DECS-450 rear panel Field Isolation Transducer connector.
For field voltage sensing, the Field Isolation Transducer accepts the following range of nominal voltages:
63 Vdc, 125 Vdc, 250 Vdc, 375 Vdc, or 625 Vdc. The applied field voltage may be ±300% of the nominal
value. The Field Isolation Transducer supplies the DECS-450 with a field voltage signal over the range of
0.9 to 9.1 Vdc, where 5.0 Vdc equals zero field voltage.
For field current sensing, the Field Isolation Transducer accepts nominal current shunt output voltages of
0 to 50 mVdc or 0 to 100 mVdc. The applied shunt voltage may be up to 300% of either range. The Field
Isolation Transducer supplies the DECS-450 with a field current signal over the range of 2.0 to 9.5 Vdc,
where 2.0 Vdc equals zero field current.

Voltage and Current Sensing DECS-450

9597100990 5-1

5 • Synchronizer
DECS-450 controllers are equipped with an automatic synchronizer that aligns the voltage, phase angle,
and frequency of the generator with the bus. The synchronizer function includes compensation settings
for the generator breaker and bias control settings for the generator governor. Related synchronizer
features include voltage matching and bus condition detection.
Caution
Because the DECS-450 sync-check and automatic synchronizer
functions share internal circuitry, the sync-check function is disabled if
the automatic synchronizer function is enabled.

A Basler Electric sync-check (25) relay is recommended for independent supervision.

Generator Synchronization
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Synchronizer/Voltage Matching, Synchronizer
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Sync/Voltage Matching, Synchronizer
Two modes of automatic generator synchronization are available: phase lock loop (PLL) and anticipatory.
In PLL mode, the DECS-450 matches the voltage, phase angle, and frequency of the generator with the
bus and then connects the generator to the bus by closing the generator breaker. In anticipatory mode,
the DECS-450 drives the generator frequency close to the bus frequency and closes the breaker at a
phase angle of zero by compensating for the breaker closing time. Breaker closing time is the delay
between the issuance of a breaker close command and closure of the breaker contacts. The DECS-450
compensates for the breaker closing time by monitoring the slip frequency between the generator and
bus and calculating the advance phase angle required to close the breaker at a zero-degree phase angle.

Frequency Correction
The Slip Frequency setting establishes the maximum slip allowed for breaker closure. When the
measured slip frequency is less than the value of the Min Slip Control Limit setting, the error output is set
to zero. When the measured slip frequency is between the values of the Max Slip Control Limit and Min
Slip Control Limit settings, the error output is proportional to the difference between the measured slip
frequency and the value of the Min Slip Control Limit setting with the opposite polarity. When the
measured slip frequency is greater than the value of the Max Slip Control Limit setting, the error output is
set to maximum with the opposite polarity.
To minimize the impact on the bus during synchronization, the generator frequency can be forced to
exceed the bus frequency at the moment of breaker closure. If this is the case, the DECS-450 will drive
the generator frequency higher than the bus frequency before closing the breaker. The breaker closing
angle setting defines the maximum allowable phase angle difference between the generator and bus. To
close the breaker, the slip angle must remain less than the value of this setting for the duration of the
sync activation delay.
The Min Slip Control Limit, Max Slip Control Limit, and Breaker Closing Angle settings are used only in
the PLL mode.

Voltage Correction
Voltage correction is initiated when the generator voltage is outside the defined voltage window. The
voltage window setting is expressed as a percentage of the bus voltage and determines the band of
generator voltage surrounding the bus voltage where breaker closure will be considered. Enabling the
Vgen>Vbus setting causes the DECS-450 to drive the generator voltage higher than the bus voltage prior
to synchronizing. A generator to bus PT matching level setting is provided to compensate for step-up or
step-down transformers in the system. The DECS-450 adjusts the sensed generator voltage by this
percentage. This setting also appears on the Voltage Matching screen, below. When the value is
changed, it is reflected in both places.

DECS-450 Synchronizer
5-2 9597100990

Angle Compensation
An angle compensation setting is provided to offset phase shift caused by transformers in the system.
The angle compensation value is added only to the bus angle. For example, it is given that the generator
and bus are synchronized but the DECS-450 metered slip angle reads –30°. Equation 5-1, below,
illustrates the DECS-450 slip angle calculation. This means that the generator angle is lagging behind the
bus angle by 30° due to transformer phase shift. To compensate for this phase shift, the angle
compensation setting should contain a value of 330°. This value is added to the metered bus angle
resulting in an adjusted slip angle of zero degrees. Only the metered bus angle is affected by the angle
compensation setting, the metered generator angle is not biased by the DECS-450.

𝐺𝐺 − 𝐵𝐵 + 𝐴𝐴 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
Equation 5-1. DECS-450 Metered Slip Angle

Where:
G = metered generator angle
B = metered bus angle
A = angle compensation value

Gen to Bus PT Match Level

A generator to bus PT matching level setting is provided to compensate for step-up or step-down
transformers in the system. The DECS-450 adjusts the sensed generator voltage by this percentage. This
setting also appears on the Voltage Matching screen, below. When the value is changed, it is reflected in
both places. To calculate the appropriate Gen to Bus PT Match Level value, refer to Equation 5-2.
𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
� � × 100 = 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀ℎ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 (%) 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
Equation 5-2. Gen to Bus PT Match Level Calculation

Failure of Synchronization
Generator synchronization is aborted if it fails to occur within a timeframe established by the user.
When generator voltage rotation does not match bus voltage rotation a Phase Rotation Mismatch alarm is
annunciated and generator synchronization is aborted.
BESTCOMSPlus® generator synchronization settings are illustrated in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1. Generator Synchronizer Settings

Synchronizer DECS-450
9597100990 5-3

Voltage Matching
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Synchronizer/Voltage Matching, Voltage Matching
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Sync/Voltage Matching, Voltage Matching
When enabled, voltage matching is active in AVR control mode and automatically adjusts the AVR mode
setpoint to match the sensed bus voltage. Voltage matching is based on two parameters: band and
matching level.
The voltage matching band defines the window in which the generator voltage must be for voltage
matching to occur.
A generator to bus PT matching level setting is provided to compensate for step-up or step-down
transformers in the system. The DECS-450 adjusts the sensed generator voltage by this percentage. This
setting also appears on the Synchronizer screen, above. When the value is changed, it is reflected in both
places. To calculate the appropriate Gen to Bus PT Match Level value, refer to Equation 5-2.
Voltage matching settings are illustrated in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2. Voltage Matching Settings

Breaker Hardware Configuration

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Synchronizer/Voltage Matching, Breaker
Hardware
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Sync/Voltage Matching, Breaker Hardware
The DECS-450 can control and monitor a generator breaker. Breaker hardware settings are illustrated in
Figure 5-3.

Breaker Failure
When a close command is issued to the breaker, the DECS-450 monitors the breaker status and
annunciates a breaker failure if the breaker does not close within the time defined by the breaker close
wait delay. Typically, the wait delay is set to be longer than the actual breaker closing time.

Generator Breaker
The DECS-450 must be configured with the generator breaker characteristics before the breaker can be
controlled by the DECS-450. Breakers controlled by pulse or continuous control inputs are supported.
During anticipatory-mode synchronization, if the generator breaker is serving to tie the generator to the
bus, the DECS-450 uses the breaker closing time to calculate the optimum time to close the breaker. For
a pulse-controlled generator breaker, the breaker open and close pulse times are used by the DECS-450
when issuing open and close commands to the breaker. When setting the pulse times, the open and
close times should be set at or longer than the breaker closing time setting.
If desired, breaker closure is possible during a dead bus condition and/or dead generator condition.

DECS-450 Synchronizer
5-4 9597100990

Caution
Use caution when connecting a dead generator to a dead bus.
Undesired system damage can occur if the bus becomes energized
while connected to a dead generator.

Figure 5-3. Breaker Hardware Configuration Settings

Generator and Bus Condition Detection

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Synchronizer/Voltage Matching, Bus Condition
Detection
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Sync/Voltage Matching, Bus Condition
The DECS-450 monitors the voltage and frequency of the generator and bus for determining when a
breaker closure is appropriate. Generator and bus condition detection settings are illustrated in Figure
5-4.

Generator Condition
A dead generator is recognized by the DECS-450 when the generator voltage decreases below the dead
generator threshold for the duration of the dead generator activation delay.
A failed generator is recognized when the generator voltage or frequency does not meet the established
generator stability criteria for the duration of the failed generator activation delay. Generator stability
parameters are described in Generator Stability.

Generator Stability
Before initiating a breaker closure (tying the generator to a stable or dead bus), the generator voltage
must be stable. Several settings are used to determine generator stability. These settings include pickup
and dropout levels for overvoltage, undervoltage, overfrequency, and under-frequency. Recognition of
generator stability is further controlled by a generator stability activation delay. Breaker closure is not
considered if the voltage conditions are not within the stability pickup and dropout settings for the duration
of the stability activation delay.

Bus Condition
A dead bus is recognized by the DECS-450 when the bus voltage decreases below the dead bus
threshold for the duration of the dead bus activation delay.

Synchronizer DECS-450
9597100990 5-5

A failed bus is recognized when the bus voltage or frequency does not meet the established stability
criteria for the duration of the failed bus activation delay. Bus stability parameters are described in Bus
Stability.

Bus Stability
Before initiating a breaker closure (tying the generator to a live bus), the bus voltage must be stable.
Several settings are used to determine bus stability. These settings include pickup and dropout levels for
overvoltage, undervoltage, overfrequency, and underfrequency. Recognition of bus stability is further
controlled by a bus stability activation delay. Breaker closure is not considered if the voltage conditions
are not within the stability pickup and dropout settings for the duration of the stability activation delay.

Figure 5-4. Generator and Bus Condition Detection Settings

DECS-450 Synchronizer
5-6 9597100990

Generator Governor Control

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Synchronizer/Voltage Matching, Governor Bias
Control Settings
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Sync/Voltage Matching, Governor Bias Control
During synchronization, the DECS-450 adjusts the generator voltage and frequency by issuing speed
correction signals to the speed governor. Correction signals are issued in the form of DECS-450 output
contact closures. These correction signals may be either continuous, fixed, or proportional. When fixed
correction is selected, the correction pulses and intervals are determined by the Correction Pulse Width
and Correction Pulse Interval settings respectively. When proportional correction is selected, the
correction pulse width varies in proportion to the error and the intervals are determined by the Correction
Pulse Interval setting. Initially, long pulses are issued when the frequency difference between the
generator and bus is large. As the correction pulses take effect and the frequency difference becomes
smaller, the correction pulse widths are proportionally decreased.
Governor bias control settings are illustrated in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5. Generator Governor Control Settings

Synchronizer DECS-450
9597100990 6-1

6 • Regulation
The DECS-450 provides a control signal to a power amplifier (typically a firing circuit and rectifier bridge)
and adjusts the control signal as needed to achieve precise regulation of the controlled parameter such
as terminal voltage, field current, field voltage, reactive power or power factor. Stable regulation is
enhanced by the automatic tracking of the active-mode setpoint by the inactive regulation modes. Pre-
position setpoints within each regulation mode enable the DECS-450 to be configured for multiple system
and application needs.

Per Unit Settings

Some BESTCOMSPlus® settings provide fields for primary and per unit values. When one of these fields
is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the other field based on the new value and the
associated rated data (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
If the Rated Data parameters are changed after all per unit values are assigned, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all actual unit settings.

Regulation Modes
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, AVR/FCR/FVR and VAR/PF
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, AVR/FCR/FVR Setpoints and VAR/PF Setpoints
The DECS-450 provides five regulation modes: Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR), Field Current
Regulation (FCR), Field Voltage Regulation (FVR), var, and Power Factor (PF).

AVR
When operating in AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation) mode, the DECS-450 regulates the excitation
level in order to maintain the generator terminal voltage setpoint in response to changes in load and
operating conditions. AVR setpoint (or operating point) adjustment is made through:
• Application of contacts at DECS-450 contact inputs configured for raising and lowering the active
setpoint
• Application of an analog control signal at the DECS-450 Auxiliary Control input.
• The BESTCOMSPlus® Control Panel screen (available in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering
Explorer)
• A raise or lower command transmitted through a DECS-450 CAN bus or Modbus port
The range of adjustment is defined by Minimum and Maximum settings that are expressed as a
percentage of the rated generator voltage. The length of time required to adjust the AVR setpoint from
one limit to the other is controlled by a Traverse Rate setting.
The AVR setpoint has an actual unit of Primary Volts and the rated data associated with it is Machine
Rated Data, Voltage (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
These settings are illustrated in Figure 6-1.

FCR
When operating in FCR (Field Current Regulation) mode, the DECS-450 regulates the level of current
supplied to the field based on the FCR setpoint. The setting range of the FCR setpoint depends on the
field rated data and other associated settings. FCR setpoint adjustment is made through:
• Application of contacts at DECS-450 contact inputs configured for raising and lowering the active
setpoint
• Application of an analog control signal at the DECS-450 Auxiliary Control input
• The BESTCOMSPlus® Control Panel screen (available in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering
Explorer)
• A raise or lower command transmitted through a DECS-450 CAN bus or Modbus port
DECS-450 Regulation
6-2 9597100990

The range of adjustment is defined by Minimum and Maximum settings that are expressed as a
percentage of the rated field current. The length of time required to adjust the FCR setpoint from one limit
to the other is controlled by a Traverse Rate setting.
The FCR setpoint has a native unit of Primary Amps and the rated data associated with it is Field Rated
Data, Current – Full Load (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
These settings are illustrated in Figure 6-1.

FVR
FVR (Field Voltage Regulation) mode enables generator modeling and validation testing in accordance
with WECC testing requirements. FVR mode can also be used in synchronous motor applications.
When operating in FVR mode, the DECS-450 regulates the level of field voltage supplied to the field
based on the FVR setpoint. The setting range of the FVR setpoint depends on the field rated data and
other associated settings. FVR setpoint adjustment is made through:
• Application of contacts at DECS-450 contact inputs configured for raising and lowering the active
setpoint
• Application of an analog control signal at the DECS-450 auxiliary Control input
• The BESTCOMSPlus Control Panel screen (available in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer)
• A raise or lower command transmitted through a DECS-450 CAN bus or Modbus port
The range of adjustment is defined by Minimum and Maximum settings that are expressed as a
percentage of the rated field voltage. The length of time required to adjust the FVR setpoint from one limit
to the other is controlled by a Traverse Rate setting.
The FVR setpoint has a native unit of Primary Volts and the rated data associated with it is Field Rated
Data, Voltage – Full Load (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
These settings are illustrated in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1. AVR, FCR, and FVR Regulation Settings

Var
When operating in var mode, the DECS-450 regulates the reactive power (var) output of the generator
based on the var setpoint. The setting range of the var setpoint depends on the generator ratings and
other associated settings. Var setpoint adjustment is made through:
• Application of contacts at DECS-450 contact inputs configured for raising and lowering the active
setpoint
• Application of an analog control signal at the DECS-450 Auxiliary Control input
• The BESTCOMSPlus Control Panel screen (available in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer)
• A raise or lower command transmitted through a DECS-450 CAN bus or Modbus port

Regulation DECS-450
9597100990 6-3

The range of adjustment is defined by Minimum and Maximum settings that are expressed as a
percentage of the generator rated kVA output. The length of time required to adjust the Var setpoint from
one limit to the other is controlled by a Traverse Rate setting. A Fine Voltage Adjustment Band setting
defines the upper and lower boundaries of voltage correction when operating in var or power factor
regulation modes.
The Reactive Power Control setpoint has a native unit of Primary kvar and the rated data associated with
it is Machine Rated Data, Rating (kVA) (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
Var mode settings are illustrated in Figure 6-2.

Power Factor
When operating in Power Factor (PF) mode, the DECS-450 controls the var output of the generator to
maintain the Power Factor setpoint as the kW load on the generator varies. The setting range of the PF
setpoint is determined by the PF – Leading and PF – Lagging settings. The length of time required to
adjust the PF setpoint from one limit to the other is controlled by a Traverse Rate setting. A Fine Voltage
Adjustment Band setting defines the upper and lower boundaries of voltage correction when the DECS-
450 is operating in Var or Power Factor regulation modes. PF Active Power Level establishes the level of
generator output power (kW) where the DECS-450 switches to/from Droop Compensation/Power Factor
mode. If the level of power decreases below the setting, the DECS-450 switches from Power Factor mode
to Droop Compensation mode. Conversely, as the level of power increases above the setting, the DECS-
450 switches from Droop Compensation mode to Power Factor mode.
Power Factor mode settings are illustrated in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2. Var and Power Factor Regulation Settings

Pre-Position Setpoints
Each regulation mode has three pre-position setpoints that allow the DECS-450 to be configured for
multiple system and application needs. Each pre-position setpoint is associated with a programmable
logic element in BESTlogicPlus. When a pre-position logic element receives a true input, the setpoint is
driven to the corresponding pre-position value.
Each pre-position function has three settings: Setpoint, Traverse Rate, and Mode. The setting range of
each pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the corresponding control mode setpoint. The Traverse
Rate setting establishes the time it takes to adjust from one end of the full setpoint range to the other (Min
to Max). To determine the actual traverse rate, divide 100% by the traverse rate value. For example, a
Traverse Rate setting of 8 seconds, results in a 12.5% per second traverse rate (100% / 8s = 12.5%/s).
This rate is used when adjusting from the current setpoint to the pre-position setpoint. A Traverse Rate
setting of zero implements an instantaneous step.

DECS-450 Regulation
6-4 9597100990

Mode
The Mode setting determines whether or not the DECS-450 will respond to further setpoint change
commands while the pre-position command is being asserted. If the pre-position mode is Release,
setpoint change commands are accepted to raise and lower the setpoint while the pre-position command
is being asserted. Additionally, if the inactive pre-position mode is Release and internal tracking is
enabled, the pre-position value will respond to the tracking function. If the pre-position mode is Maintain,
further setpoint change commands are ignored while the pre-position is asserted. Additionally, if the
inactive pre-position mode is Maintain and internal tracking is enabled, the inactive mode will maintain the
inactive setpoint at the pre-position value and override the tracking function. A portion of the pre-position
setpoints for AVR, FCR, and FVR modes are illustrated in Figure 6-3. (Pre-Position Setpoints for var and
PF modes are similar and not shown here.)

Figure 6-3. Pre-Position Setpoints

Inner Loop Field Regulator

This setting (Figure 6-4) enables the inner control loop of the field regulator for compensation of the
exciter gains and time constants. When the inner control loop is enabled, the regulator response depends
upon the AVR gains and inner loop gains. Inner loop gains are selected on the Operating Settings, Gain,
Inner Loop Field Regulator screen. See the Stability Tuning section in this manual for more information on
inner loop gain settings.

Figure 6-4. Inner Loop Field Regulator

Transient Boost
The transient excitation boosting function improves response to successive faults by providing increased
excitation support. When a simultaneous line current increase and line voltage decrease occurs, the
DECS-450 compensates by elevating the voltage setpoint above the nominal setpoint. When the line
voltage recovers, the voltage setpoint is restored to the nominal value.
Fault detection is controlled by a voltage threshold setting, a current threshold setting, and a minimum
duration setting. Fault voltage threshold is expressed as a percentage of the AVR setpoint and fault
current threshold is expressed as a percentage of the rated generator current. The duration setting
determines how long a fault condition is tolerated before the setpoint is adjusted.
Setpoint adjustment is controlled by a voltage setpoint boosting level, a clearing voltage threshold, and a
clearing voltage delay. The setpoint boosting level is expressed as a percentage above the AVR setpoint.
Transient boost is disabled once the line voltage recovers above the clearing voltage threshold. The

Regulation DECS-450
9597100990 6-5

clearing voltage threshold is expressed as a percentage above the AVR setpoint. The clearing voltage
delay determines how long the line voltage must exceed the clearing voltage threshold before
setpoint adjustment is terminated.

Figure 6-5. Transient Boost Settings

Operation with Paralleled Generators

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Parallel Compensation
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Parallel Compensation
The DECS-450 provides several functions for load sharing among paralleled generators: reactive droop
compensation, line drop compensation, cross-current compensation, and network load sharing. The
DECS-450 can employ either droop compensation or cross-current compensation (reactive differential)
schemes for reactive load sharing. A separate load sharing function enables each machine to share the
load proportionally without incurring a voltage and frequency droop.
Paralleled generator settings are illustrated in Figure 6-6 and described in the following paragraphs.

Reactive Droop Compensation

Droop compensation serves as a method of controlling reactive current when the generator is connected
in parallel with another energy source. When droop compensation is enabled, the generator voltage is
adjusted in proportion to the measured generator reactive power. The reactive droop compensation
setting is expressed as a percentage of the generator rated terminal voltage.

Note
For droop compensation to operate, the PARALLEL_ENABLE_LM
logic block must be set true in BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic.

Cross-Current Compensation
Cross-current compensation (reactive differential) mode serves as a method of connecting multiple
generators in parallel to share reactive load. When reactive load is shared properly, no current is fed into
the DECS-450 cross-current compensation input (which is connected to the B-phase transformer).
Unbalanced sharing of reactive load causes a differential current to be fed into the cross-current
compensation input. When cross-current compensation is enabled, this input causes the DECS-450 to
respond with the proper level of regulation. The response of the DECS-450 is controlled by the cross-
current compensation gain setting which is expressed as a percentage of the system nominal CT setting.
Application information about cross-current compensation is available in the Voltage and Current Sensing
section of this manual.

DECS-450 Regulation
6-6 9597100990

Network Load Sharing

In a multiple-generator application, the Network Load Sharing function ensures equal generator reactive-
power sharing. It operates in a similar manner to cross-current compensation but without the external
hardware requirements and distance limitations. Instead of sharing load based on the CT ratio, load is
shared on a per-unit basis calculated from the generator rated data. Sharing of load information between
DECS-450 controllers is accomplished through the Ethernet port of each DECS-450 communicating over
a peer-to-peer network dedicated for the load sharing function. Each DECS-450 measures the reactive
current of its associated generator and broadcasts its measurement to all other DECS-450 controllers on
the network. Each DECS-450 compares its level of reactive current to the sum of all measured currents
and adjusts its excitation level accordingly.
A Load Share ID setting identifies the DECS-450 as a load sharing unit in the network. Checking a Load
Sharing Unit number box allows any DECS-450 load sharing units on the network with that Load Share ID
number to share load with the currently connected DECS-450. It is not necessary for the Load Share ID
to be unique for each unit. This allows for load sharing units to be grouped.
When the unit’s configuration does not match the configuration of the other units with load sharing
enabled, the Network Load Share Config Mismatch logic element becomes true. The Configuration
Mismatch Delay setting adds a delay before the element becomes true.
Load sharing settings consist of an Enable checkbox and Droop, Kg, Ki, Max Vc, Configuration Mismatch
Delay, and Load Share ID settings.

Line Drop Compensation

When enabled, line drop compensation can be used to maintain voltage at a load located at a distance
from the generator. The DECS-450 achieves this by measuring the line current and calculating the
voltage for a specific point on the line. Line drop compensation is applied to both the real and reactive
portion of the generator line current. It is expressed as a percentage of the generator terminal voltage.
Equation 6-1 is used to calculate the Line Drop Value.
2 2
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 = ��𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − �𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝐼𝐼𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 × cos �𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��� + �𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝐼𝐼𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 × sin �𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��

Equation 6-1. Line Drop Value

LDValue = Line drop value (per unit)
Vavg = Average voltage, metered value (per unit)
LD = Line Drop % / 100
Iavg = Average Current, metered value (per unit)
Ibang = Angle of phase B current (no compensation)

The LDValue is the per-unit value seen down the line from the synchronous machine. Equation 6-2 is used
to determine the voltage needed to adjust for line drop.
𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎,𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟,𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
Equation 6-2. Voltage Needed to Adjust for Line Drop

Equation 6-3 is used to obtain primary units.

𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎,𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 × 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
Equation 6-3. Obtain Primary Units

The new line drop adjusted setpoint is calculated using Equation 6-4.
𝑉𝑉𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑉𝑉𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
Equation 6-4. Line Drop Adjusted Setpoint

Refer to Figure 6-6 for an illustration of the Line drop compensation settings.

Regulation DECS-450
9597100990 6-7

Figure 6-6. Paralleled Generators and Line Drop Compensation Settings

Autotracking
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Autotracking
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Autotracking
Internal and external regulation mode setpoint tracking are standard features on the DECS-450.
Autotracking settings are illustrated in Figure 6-7.

DECS-450 Regulation
6-8 9597100990

Internal Setpoint Tracking

In applications using a single DECS-450, internal tracking can be enabled so that the inactive regulation
modes continuously track the active regulation mode.
The following examples demonstrate the advantages of internal tracking:
• If the excitation system is operating online with internal tracking enabled, a loss of sensing condition
could trigger a transfer to FCR mode.
• While performing routine testing of the DECS-450 in backup mode, the internal tracking feature
allows a transfer to an inactive mode that will result in no disturbance to the system.
Two parameters control the behavior of internal tracking: Delay and Traverse Rate. When a large system
disturbance is detected, the non-active mode setpoints do not track to the new setpoint until after the time
delay has expired. A traverse rate setting establishes the length of time it takes for the inactive mode
setpoints to traverse the full setting range of the active mode setpoint.

External Setpoint Tracking

For critical applications, a second DECS-450 can provide backup excitation control. The DECS-450
provides excitation redundancy with its external tracking and transfer provisions between DECS-450
controllers. The secondary DECS-450 can be configured to track the primary DECS-450 setpoint. Proper
redundant excitation system design allows for removal of the failed system.

Note
Periodic testing of the backup system must be performed to ensure
that it is operational and can be placed in service without warning.

Like internal tracking, external setpoint tracking uses enable/disable, delay, and traverse rate settings.

Figure 6-7. Autotracking Settings

Setpoint Configure
When Auto Save is enabled, the DECS-450 automatically saves the active setpoint in 10-minute intervals.
Otherwise, the last setpoint sent to the DECS-450 is retained. Figure 6-8 illustrates the Setpoint
Configure screen.

Figure 6-8. Setpoint Configure Setting

Regulation DECS-450
9597100990 7-1

7 • Auxiliary Control
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Auxiliary Input
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Auxiliary Input
The DECS-450 accepts an external analog signal for auxiliary control of the regulation setpoint (in all
modes), limiter scaling, or power system stabilizer. A No Control mode provides auxiliary input metering
only. Auxiliary control settings are illustrated in Figure 7-1.

Auxiliary Control Input Type

Either a voltage or current control signal may be used for auxiliary control. Terminals I+ and I– accept a 4
to 20 mAdc signal. Terminals V+ and V– accept a –10 to +10 Vdc signal. An adjacent terminal labeled
GND provides the connection for a recommended cable shield.

Auxiliary Control Input Function

The analog control input can be used for auxiliary control of the regulation setpoint, power system
stabilizer test input, limiter scaling, or for metering only.

PSS Test Input

The auxiliary control input may be used for control of the optional power system stabilizer function during
testing and validation. More information is provided in the Power System Stabilizer section of this manual.

Limiter Scaling
When the auxiliary control input is configured for limiter scaling, the stator current limiter (SCL) and
overexcitation limiter (OEL) low-level values can be automatically adjusted. Automatic adjustment of the
SCL and OEL is based on six parameters: signal and scale for three points. The signal value for each
point represents the accessory input voltage. The scale value defines the limiter low level as a
percentage of rated field current for the OEL and rated stator current for the SCL. For accessory input
voltages between two of the three defined points, the low-level limiter setting is linearly adjusted between
the two scale values. Limiter settings and limiter scaling are discussed in detail in the Limiters section of
this manual.

Setpoint Limits
Minimum and maximum setpoint limits are observed when With Limit is enabled.

No Control
A No Control mode provides auxiliary input metering only. In this mode, the input signal controls no
functions, but it retains all monitoring, scaling, and labeling features of the other modes.

Auxiliary Control Gains

When a current input type is selected, the input current is converted internally by the DECS-450 into a
voltage signal in the range of –10 to +10 Vdc. The DECS-450 uses Equation 7-1 when converting the
applied current into a voltage.

DECS-450 Auxiliary Control

7-2 9597100990

20.0
𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = (𝐼𝐼𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − 0.004) × � � − 10.0
0.016
Equation 7-1. Input Current to Voltage Signal Conversion
Where: Vaux is the calculated voltage signal and Iaux is the applied current in amperes.
For setpoint control, Vaux is multiplied by the appropriate regulation mode auxiliary gain setting.
If the auxiliary input is unused, all auxiliary control gains should be set to zero.

AVR Mode
In AVR mode, the auxiliary control signal is multiplied by the AVR gain setting. The result defines the
setpoint change as a percentage of the rated generator voltage.
𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 × 0.01 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 × 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
For example, applying +10 Vdc with an AVR gain of 1.0 raises the AVR setpoint 10% of rated generator
voltage. This example also applies to the following modes.

FCR Mode
In FCR mode, the auxiliary control signal is multiplied by the FCR gain setting. The resulting value relates
to a percentage of the rated field current.
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 × 0.01 × 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 × 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶

FVR Mode
In FVR mode, the auxiliary control signal is multiplied by the FVR gain setting. The resulting value relates
to a percentage of the rated field voltage.
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 × 0.01 × 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 × 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉

Var Mode
In var mode, the auxiliary control signal is multiplied by the Var gain setting. The resulting value relates to
a percentage of the rated apparent power (kVA).
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 × 0.01 × 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 × 1.7321 × 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 × 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑒𝑒𝑑𝑑)

Power Factor Mode

In Power Factor mode, the auxiliary control signal is multiplied by the PF gain setting to define the PF
setpoint change.
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑉𝑉𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 × 0.01 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 (𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠)

Summing Type
The auxiliary control signal can be configured to control the inner or outer regulation control loop.
Selecting the inner loop limits auxiliary control to AVR, FCR, and FVR modes. Selecting the outer loop
limits auxiliary control to PF and Var modes.

No Control Settings
Label Text
A customizable label is provided to identify the auxiliary input in metering.

Auxiliary Control DECS-450

9597100990 7-3

Ranges
Ranges must be set for the No Control input function. Param Min correlates to Min Input Current or Min
Input Voltage and Param Max correlates to Max Input Current or Max Input Voltage.

Figure 7-1. Auxiliary Input Settings

DECS-450 Auxiliary Control

7-4 9597100990

Auxiliary Control DECS-450

9597100990 8-1

8 • Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Sixteen isolated contact sensing inputs (14 programmable, 2 fixed) are available for initiating DECS-450
actions. Twelve sets of output contacts provide annunciation and control. A dedicated Control Output
provides analog control signals to a power amplifier. Four analog outputs provide meter driver signals and
may be configured to represent DECS-450 metered values.
An analog input is provided for auxiliary control of the regulation setpoint, power system stabilizer test
input, limiter scaling, or for metering only. Refer to the Auxiliary Control section in this manual for more
information.

Contact Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Contact Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Not available through HMI.
Sixteen contact inputs are provided for initiating DECS-450 actions. Two of the contact inputs are fixed-
function inputs: Start and Stop. The remaining 14 contact inputs are programmable. An additional 10
contact inputs are available with the optional Contact Expansion Module (CEM-2020). Contact Basler
Electric for ordering information.
All DECS-450 contact inputs are compatible with dry relay/switch contacts or open-collector outputs from
a PLC. Each contact input has an isolated interrogation voltage of 12 Vdc at 4 mAdc. Appropriate
switches/contacts should be selected for operation with this signal level.

Note
The length of wiring connected to each contact input terminal must not
exceed 150 feet (45.7 meters). Longer wiring lengths may allow
induced electrical noise to interfere with the recognition of contact
inputs.

Start and Stop Inputs

The Start and Stop inputs accept a momentary contact closure that enables (Start) and disables (Stop)
the DECS-450. If the DECS-450 receives Start and Stop contact inputs simultaneously, the Stop input
takes priority. Start contact input connections are made at terminals START (pin 1) and COM (pin 2). Stop
contact input connections are made at terminals STOP (pin 3) and COM (pin 4).

Programmable Inputs
The 14 programmable inputs may be used to monitor the status of excitation system contacts and
switches. Using BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic, the inputs may be configured to control and
annunciate a variety of system conditions and contingencies. Information about using the programmable
inputs in a logic scheme is provided in the BESTlogic™Plus section.
To make the programmable contact inputs easier to identify, customized labels may be assigned that
relate to the inputs/functions of your system. Figure 8-1 shows a portion of the BESTCOMSPlus® Contact
Inputs screen where each of the 14 inputs may be assigned a custom name.

DECS-450 Programmable Inputs and Outputs

8-2 9597100990

Figure 8-1. Contact Input Label Text

See the Terminals and Connectors section for an illustration of the programmable input terminals.

Contact Outputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Contact Outputs
HMI Navigation Path: Not available through HMI.
DECS-450 contact outputs consist of a dedicated watchdog output and 11 programmable outputs. The
optional CEM-2020 provides an additional 24 contact outputs. Contact Basler Electric for ordering
information.

Watchdog Output
This SPDT (Form C) output changes state during the following conditions:
• Control power is lost
• Normal firmware execution ceases
• Transfer Watchdog Trip is asserted in BESTlogicPlus.
Watchdog output connections are made at terminals WTCHD1 (normally open when de-energized),
WTCHD (common), and WTCHD2 (normally closed when de-energized).

Programmable Outputs
The 11 programmable, normally-open contact outputs may be configured to annunciate DECS-450
status, active alarms, active protection functions, and active limiter functions. Using BESTlogicPlus
programmable logic, these outputs may be configured to control and annunciate a variety of system
conditions and contingencies. Information about using the programmable outputs in a logic scheme is
provided in the BESTlogicPlus section.
To make the programmable contact outputs easier to identify, customized labels may be assigned that
relate to the functions of your system. Figure 8-2 shows the BESTCOMSPlus Contact Outputs screen
where each of the 11 outputs may be assigned a custom name.

Programmable Inputs and Outputs DECS-450

9597100990 8-3

Figure 8-2. Contact Output Label Text

Control Output
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Analog Outputs, Control
Output
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Outputs, Control Output
A dedicated analog output provides a control signal over the range of 0 to 10 Vdc, –10 to +10 Vdc, or 4 to
20 mAdc. Settings consist of Output Type, Invert Output, and Power Amplifier Type. These settings are
described below and shown in Figure 8-3.

Output Type
The control output may be configured to transmit a voltage or current signal. Selections for the signal
ranges are 0 to 10 Vdc, –10 to +10 Vdc, or 4 to 20 mAdc.

Invert Output
When using the DECS-450 with an exciter that requires an inverted output, enable to invert the DECS-
450 control output.

Power Amplifier Type

The Power Amplifier Type setting establishes whether the controlled power amplifier is capable of positive
voltage only or capable of negative forcing.

Regulator Output Range

These read-only fields display the selected control output configuration.

DECS-450 Programmable Inputs and Outputs

8-4 9597100990

Figure 8-3. Control Output Screen

Logic Connections
Logic connections for the "Control Output Out of Range" status input are made on the BESTlogicPlus
screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The Control Output Out of Range status input logic block is illustrated in
Figure 8-4. The output is true during a trip condition.

Figure 8-4. Control Output Out of Range Status Input

Meter Driver Circuits

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Analog Outputs, Analog
Output X
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Outputs, Analog Output X
Four analog outputs provide meter driver signals over a range of either 4 to 20 mA or -10 to +10 Vdc.
Settings consist of parameter selection, output type, out of range activation delay, and ranges. These
settings are described below and shown in Figure 8-5.

Parameter Selection
The following parameters can be selected:
• Analog Inputs 1 through 8 (optional AEM-2020 required)
• Auxiliary Input Current (mA)
• Auxiliary Input Voltage
• Bus Frequency
• Bus Voltage: VAB, VBC, or VCA
• Control Output pu (per unit)
• EDM Ripple
• Exciter Field Current
• Exciter Field Temperature
• Exciter Field Voltage
• Gen Current: IA, IB, IC, or Average
• Gen Frequency
• Gen Power Factor and Scaled Power Factor
• Gen Voltage: VAB, VBC, VCA, or Average
• Kilovarhours
• Kilowatthours

Programmable Inputs and Outputs DECS-450

9597100990 8-5

• Negative Sequence Current

• Negative Sequence Voltage
• NLS Error Percent
• Positive Sequence Current
• Positive Sequence Voltage
• PSS Output
• RTD Inputs 1 through 8 (optional AEM-2020 required)
• Setpoint Position
• Thermocouples 1 and 2 (optional AEM-2020 required)
• Total kVA
• Total kvar
• Total kW
• Tracking Error

Output Type
Each analog output may be configured to transmit a voltage or current signal.
The minimum and maximum output current may be set to any value between 4 and 20 mAdc and the
minimum and maximum output voltage may be set to any value between -10 and +10 Vdc.
This accommodates for the typical ranges, 4 to 20 mAdc, 0 to 10 Vdc, and -10 to +10 Vdc, as well as
custom ranges.

Out of Range Activation Delay

When the value of the selected parameter is out of range for the duration of the Out of Range Activation
Delay, the condition is annunciated in logic. See Logic Connections, below.

Ranges
Ranges must be set for the selected output type. Param Min is represented by Min Output Current or Min
Output Voltage and Param Max is represented by Max Output Current or Max Output Voltage.

Figure 8-5. Analog Output M1 Screen

Logic Connections
Logic connections for the four "Analog Output Out of Range" status inputs are made on the
BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The Analog Output 1 Out of Range status input logic block is
illustrated in Figure 8-6. The output is true during a trip condition.

Figure 8-6. Analog Output 1 Out of Range Status Input

DECS-450 Programmable Inputs and Outputs

8-6 9597100990

Programmable Inputs and Outputs DECS-450

9597100990 9-1

9 • Protection
The DECS-450 offers protection relating to machine voltage, frequency, power, field parameters, rotating
exciter diodes, and generator-to-bus synchronism. Configurable protection elements supplement this
protection with additional, user-defined system parameters that have multiple pickup thresholds per
parameter. Most protection functions have two groups of settings labeled Primary and Secondary. Two
setting groups enable independent protection coordination which is selectable in BESTlogic™Plus.

Per Unit Settings

Some BESTCOMSPlus® settings provide fields for actual and per unit values. When one of these fields is
edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the other field based on the new value and the
associated rated data (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
If the Rated Data parameters are changed after all per unit values are assigned, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all actual unit settings.

Voltage Protection
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Voltage
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Protection, Voltage Protection
Voltage protection includes overexcitation, generator undervoltage, generator overvoltage, and loss of
sensing voltage.

Overexcitation (Volts per Hertz)

Volts per hertz protection is annunciated if the ratio of the per-unit voltage to the per-unit frequency
(volts/hertz) exceeds one of the Volts per Hertz Pickup Level settings for a definite amount of time. If the
Volts per Hertz Pickup level is exceeded, timing will continue until the volts per hertz ratio drops below the
dropout ratio (95%). Volts per hertz protection also guards against other potentially damaging system
conditions such as a change in system voltage and reduced frequency conditions that can exceed the
system’s excitation capability.
Several volts per hertz settings enable the DECS-450 to provide flexible generator and generator step-up
transformer overexcitation protection. An inverse square timing characteristic is provided through the
Inverse Time Pickup Setpoint and Time Dial settings. These settings enable the DECS-450 to
approximate the heating characteristic of the generator and generator step-up transformer during
overexcitation. A linear reset characteristic is provided through the Reset Dial setting. Volts per hertz
protection may be enabled and disabled without altering the pickup and time delay settings.
Two sets of fixed-time, overexcitation pickup settings are available through the Definite Time Pickup #1,
#2 and Definite Time Delay #1, #2 settings.
The following equations represent the trip time and reset time for a constant V/Hz level. Volts per hertz
characteristic curves are illustrated in Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2.
DT ET
TT = n
TR = DR × × 100
 V / Hz MEASURED  FST
 − 1
 V / Hz NOMINAL 
Equation 9-1. Trip Time Equation 9-2. Reset Time

Where:
TT = time to trip
TR = time to reset
DT = time dial trip
DR = time dial, reset
DECS-450 Protection
9-2 9597100990

ET = elapsed time
n = curve exponent (0.5, 1, 2)
FST = full scale trip time (TT)
ET/FST = fraction of total travel toward trip that integration had progressed to. (After a trip, this value
will be equal to 1.)

Figure 9-1. V/Hz Characteristic – Time Shown on Vertical Axis

Figure 9-2. V/Hz Characteristic – Time Shown on Horizontal Axis

Protection DECS-450
9597100990 9-3

Figure 9-3. Overexcitation Protection Settings

Generator Undervoltage
An undervoltage pickup condition occurs when the sensed generator terminal voltage decreases below
the pickup setting. An undervoltage trip condition occurs if the generator voltage remains below the
pickup threshold for the duration of the time delay setting. Generator undervoltage protection may be
enabled and disabled without altering the pickup and time delay settings. Undervoltage pickup and trip
elements in BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to initiate corrective action in response to the
condition.
The Undervoltage pickup has a native unit of Primary Volts and the rated data associated with it is
Machine Rated Data, Voltage (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
BESTCOMSPlus® generator undervoltage settings are illustrated in Figure 9-4.

Figure 9-4. Generator Undervoltage Protection Settings

Generator Overvoltage
An overvoltage pickup condition occurs when the sensed generator terminal voltage increases above the
pickup setting. An overvoltage trip condition occurs if the generator voltage remains above the pickup
threshold for the duration of the time delay setting. Generator overvoltage protection may be enabled and

DECS-450 Protection
9-4 9597100990

disabled without altering the pickup and time delay settings. Overvoltage pickup and trip elements in
BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to initiate corrective action in response to the condition.
The Overvoltage pickup has a native unit of Primary Volts and the rated data associated with it is
Machine Rated Data, Voltage (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
BESTCOMSPlus® generator overvoltage settings are illustrated in Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5. Generator Overvoltage Protection Settings

Loss of Sensing
The generator voltage is monitored for a loss of sensing (LOS) condition. LOS protection settings are
illustrated in Figure 9-6.
In the DECS-450, an LOS event is calculated using sequence components. LOS trip criteria is listed in
Table 9-1.
Table 9-1. Loss of Sensing Trip Criteria
Loss of either 1 or 2 phases Loss of all 3 phases Loss of single-phase
(3-phase sensing) (3-phase sensing) sensing
3-phase, 3-wire sensing selected 3-phase, 3-wire sensing selected Single-phase sensing selected
V1 > BV% of AVR setpoint BV% of AVR Setpoint > V1 BV% of AVR Setpoint > VGEN
V2 > UV% of V1 200% of Irated > I1 200% of Irated > I1
17.7% of I1 > I2 17.7% of I1 > I2
OR OR
1% of Irated > I1 1% of Irated > I1
V1 = Positive sequence voltage
V2 = Negative sequence voltage
I1 = Positive sequence current
I2 = Negative sequence current
Irated = Rated current
BV% = Balanced voltage percent
UV% V1 = Unbalanced voltage percent
VGEN = Average generator voltage
When all criteria in a column are true for the duration of the time delay setting, an LOS trip condition
occurs.
An LOS condition may be used to initiate a transfer to manual (FCR) control mode. It may be configured
in BESTlogicPlus to initiate other actions as well. Protection may be enabled and disabled without altering
the individual loss of sensing settings.
LOS protection is automatically disabled when a short circuit exists. A short circuit is detected when the
measured current is greater than twice the rated current for a single-phase CT connection and when the
positive sequence current is greater than twice the rated current for a three-phase CT connection.

Protection DECS-450
9597100990 9-5

Figure 9-6. Loss of Sensing Protection Settings

Frequency Protection
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Frequency
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Protection, Frequency Protection 81
The frequency of the generator terminal voltage is monitored for overfrequency and under-frequency
conditions.

Overfrequency
An overfrequency condition occurs when the frequency of the generator voltage exceeds the 81O pickup
threshold for the duration of the 81O time delay setting. Overfrequency protection may be enabled and
disabled without altering the pickup and time delay settings. Overfrequency pickup and trip elements in
BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to initiate corrective action in response to the condition.
BESTCOMSPlus overfrequency settings are illustrated in Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7. Overfrequency Protection Settings

Underfrequency
The DECS-450 provides two underfrequency elements designated 81U-1 and 81U-2. An underfrequency
condition occurs when the frequency of the generator voltage decreases below the 81U pickup threshold
for the duration of the 81U time delay setting. A voltage inhibit setting, expressed as a percentage of the
rated generator voltage, may be implemented to prevent an underfrequency trip from occurring during
startup when the generator voltage is rising toward the nominal level. Underfrequency protection may be
enabled and disabled without altering the pickup, delay, and inhibit settings. Underfrequency pickup and
trip elements in BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to initiate corrective action in response to
the condition. BESTCOMSPlus underfrequency settings are illustrated in Figure 9-8.

DECS-450 Protection
9-6 9597100990

Figure 9-8. Underfrequency Protection Settings

Power Protection
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Power
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Protection, Power
Generator power levels are monitored to protect against reverse power flow and loss of excitation.

Reverse Power
Reverse power protection guards against reverse power flow that may result from a loss of prime mover
torque (and lead to generator motoring). A reverse power condition occurs when the flow of reverse
power exceeds the 32R pickup threshold for the duration of the 32R time delay. Reverse power protection
may be enabled and disabled without altering the pickup and time delay settings. The DECS-450 does
not initiate a shutdown, however, reverse power pickup and trip elements in BESTlogicPlus may be used
to initiate corrective action in response to the condition.
The Reverse Power pickup setting may be set in Primary Kilowatts or Per Unit and the rated data
associated with it is Machine Rated Data, Rating (kVA) (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
BESTCOMSPlus reverse power protection settings are illustrated in Figure 9-9.

Figure 9-9. Reverse Power Protection Settings

Loss of Excitation
The loss of excitation element operates on excessive var flow into the machine, indicating abnormally low
field excitation. This element protects controlled generators as well as motors. A diagram of the 40Q
pickup response is illustrated in Figure 9-10. BESTCOMSPlus settings are described below and shown in
Figure 9-11.

Protection DECS-450
9597100990 9-7

Generator Protection
During loss of excitation, the generator absorbs reactive power from the power system which can
overheat the stator windings. The loss of excitation element acts on the principal that if a generator
begins to absorb vars outside its steady-state capability curve, it has likely lost its normal excitation
supply. The element is always calibrated to the equivalent three-phase power even if the connection is
single-phase.
The loss of excitation element compares the reactive power to a map of the allowed reactive power as
defined by the Pickup setting. The loss of excitation element remains in a pickup condition until power
flow falls below the dropout ratio of 95% of the actual pickup. A time delay is recommended for tripping.
For settings well outside the generator capability curve, adding a 0.5 second time delay helps prevent
transient fault conditions. However, recovery from power system swings after a major fault may take
several seconds. Therefore, if the unit is to pick up near the steady-state capability curve of the generator,
longer time delays are recommended. See Figure 9-10 for details.

Motor Protection
The DECS-450 compares the real power (kW) flowing into the motor with the reactive power (kvar) being
supplied. Operation of synchronous motors drawing reactive power from the system can result in
overheating in parts of the rotor that do not normally carry current. The 40Q pickup response is shown in
Figure 9-10.

Figure 9-10. Generator Capability Curve vs. 40Q Response

Pickup and Trip

A loss of excitation condition exists when the level of absorbed vars exceeds the loss of excitation (40Q)
threshold for the duration of the 40Q time delay. A time delay setting of zero makes the loss of excitation
element instantaneous with no intentional time delay. If the pickup condition subsides before the time
delay expires, the timer and pickup are reset, no corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed
for any further occurrences of loss of excitation. Loss of excitation protection may be enabled and
disabled without altering the pickup and time delay settings.
The Loss of Excitation pickup setting may be set in Primary Kilovars or Per Unit and the rated data
associated with it is Machine Rated Data, Rating (kVA) (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
BESTCOMSPlus loss of excitation settings are illustrated in Figure 9-11.

DECS-450 Protection
9-8 9597100990

Figure 9-11. Loss of Excitation Protection Settings

Field Protection
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Field
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Protection, Field
Field protection provided by the DECS-450 includes field overvoltage, field overcurrent, field
overtemperature, loss of field isolation transducer, and an exciter diode monitor.

Field Overvoltage
A field overvoltage condition occurs when the field voltage exceeds the field overvoltage threshold for the
duration of the field overvoltage time delay. Field overvoltage protection may be enabled and disabled
without altering the pickup and time delay settings. Field overvoltage pickup and trip elements in
BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to initiate corrective action in response to the condition.
The Overvoltage pickup has a native unit of Primary Volts and the rated data associated with it is Field
Rated Data, Voltage – Full Load (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
BESTCOMSPlus field overvoltage settings are illustrated in Figure 9-12.

Figure 9-12. Field Overvoltage Protection Settings

Field Overcurrent
A field overcurrent condition is annunciated when the field current exceeds the field overcurrent pickup
level for the duration of the field overcurrent time delay. Depending on the selected timing mode, the time
delay may be fixed or related to an inverse function. Definite timing mode uses a fixed time delay. In
inverse timing mode, the time delay is shortened in relation to the level of field current above the pickup
level. The time dial setting acts as a linear multiplier for the time to an annunciation. This enables the
DECS-450 to approximate the heating characteristic of the generator and generator step-up transformer
during overexcitation. The field current must fall below the dropout ratio (95%) for the function to begin
timing to reset. The following equations are used to calculate the field overcurrent pickup (Equation 9-3)
and reset time (Equation 9-4) delays.

Protection DECS-450
9597100990 9-9

𝐴𝐴 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑡𝑡𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 =
𝐵𝐵 + √𝐶𝐶 + 𝐷𝐷 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
Equation 9-3. Inverse Field Overcurrent Pickup
Where:
tpickup = time to pick up in seconds
A = -95.908
B = -17.165
C = 490.864
D = -191.816
TD = time dial setting <0.1, 20>
MOP = multiple of pickup <1.03, 2.5>

0.36 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 =
1 − (𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 )2
Equation 9-4. Inverse Field Overcurrent Reset
Where:
Timereset = maximum time to reset in seconds
TD = time dial setting <0.1, 20>
MOPreset = multiple of pickup <0.0, 0.95>
Primary and secondary setting groups provide additional control for two distinct machine operating
conditions.
Field overcurrent protection may be enabled and disabled without altering the pickup and time delay
settings. Field overcurrent pickup and trip elements in BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to
initiate corrective action in response to the condition.
The Overcurrent pickup has a native unit of Primary Amps and the rated data associated with it is Field
Rated Data, Current – Full Load (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
BESTCOMSPlus field overcurrent settings are illustrated in Figure 9-13. In BESTCOMSPlus, a plot of the
field overcurrent setting curve is displayed. The plot can display the primary or secondary setting curves.

Figure 9-13. Field Overcurrent Protection Settings

DECS-450 Protection
9-10 9597100990

Field Overtemperature
The DECS-450 calculates field temperature based on the generator main field resistance, the field
ambient temperature, and the voltage drop across the generator main field brushes. Field
overtemperature protection is intended for static exciter applications supplying a generator’s main field or
for rotary exciter applications where the field voltage and current is measured at the slip rings and main
field current shunt on the brush-type rotary exciter.
A field overtemperature condition occurs when the field temperature exceeds the field overtemperature
threshold for the duration of the field overtemperature time delay. Field overtemperature protection may
be enabled and disabled without altering the pickup and time delay settings. Field overtemperature pickup
and trip elements in BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to initiate corrective action in
response to the condition.
BESTCOMSPlus field overvoltage settings are illustrated in Figure 9-14.

Figure 9-14. Field Overtemperature Protection Settings

Loss of Field Isolation Transducer

A loss of field isolation transducer condition occurs when the field current signal from the field isolation
transducer decreases below a predetermined level for the duration of the time delay. Loss of field
isolation transducer protection may be enabled and disabled without altering the pickup and time delay
settings. Loss of field isolation transducer pickup and trip elements in BESTlogicPlus may be used in a
logic scheme to initiate corrective action in response to the condition.

Figure 9-15. Loss of Field Isolation Transducer Settings

Exciter Diode Monitor

The exciter diode monitor (EDM) monitors the condition of a brushless exciter’s power semiconductors by
monitoring the exciter field current. The EDM detects both open and shorted rotating diodes in the exciter
bridge. EDM settings are illustrated in Figure 9-16. When implementing the EDM, it is imperative that the
user specify the number of poles for the exciter armature and the generator rotor. A pole ratio calculator,
available in BESTCOMSPlus, may be used to calculate the pole ratio from the number of exciter armature
and generator rotor poles.

Protection DECS-450
9597100990 9-11

Notes
If the number of poles for the exciter armature and the generator rotor is unknown, the EDM function
will still operate. However, only a shorted diode may be detected. If the number of poles is unknown,
disable all exciter open diode protection and set the generator and exciter pole parameters to 1.0 to
prevent false tripping. All of the EDM setup guidelines presented here assume that the exciter diodes
are not open or shorted at the time of setup and testing.

The EDM estimates the fundamental harmonic of the exciter field current using discrete Fourier
transforms (DFTs). The harmonic, expressed as a percentage of the field current, is then compared to the
pickup level for open diode detection and shorted diode detection. If the percentage of field current
exceeds the open diode or shorted diode pickup level, then the appropriate time delay will begin. After the
time delay for the open diode or shorted diode condition expires and if the percentage of field current
continues to exceed the open or shorted diode pickup setting, the condition is annunciated. EDM pickup
and trip elements in BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to initiate corrective action in
response to an open or shorted diode condition.
An EDM disable level setting prevents nuisance annunciations due to low excitation current or the
generator frequency being out of range. A disable level setting may be used to disable both open- and
shorted-diode protection when the field current drops below the user-defined percentage of rated. EDM
protection may be disabled and enabled by the user without altering the individual protection settings.

Applying EDM Protection

It is especially difficult to detect open diode conditions when the number of generator and exciter poles is
unknown. For this reason, the ratio of the number of brushless exciter armature poles to the number of
generator rotor poles should be entered to ensure detection of both open and shorted diodes.
Finding the Maximum Field Ripple Current
To set the open diode pickup level and shorted diode pickup level, the maximum ripple current on the
field must be known. This may be accomplished by running the generator unloaded and at rated speed.
Vary the generator voltage from minimum to maximum while monitoring the EDM ripple level on the HMI
display. Record the highest value.
Setting the Pickup Level—Number of Generator Poles Known
Multiply the highest EDM ripple value, obtained in the preceding paragraph, by 2. The result is the open
diode pickup level setting. The multiplier may be varied between 1.5 and 5 to increase or decrease the
trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance open diode indications.
Multiply the highest EDM ripple value, obtained in the preceding paragraph by 50. The result is the
shorted diode pickup level setting. The multiplier may be varied between 40 and 70 to increase or
decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance shorted diode
indications.
The DECS-450 has fixed EDM inhibit levels to prevent nuisance failed-diode indications while the
generator frequency is less than 40 hertz or greater than 70 hertz. EDM operation is also inhibited when
the level of field current is below the disable level setting.
Setting the Pickup Level—Number of Generator Poles Unknown
The DECS-450 can detect shorted diode conditions when the number of generator poles is not known. To
provide this protection, disable open diode protection, set the pole ratio to 1.0, and enable shorted diode
protection. Multiply the maximum EDM ripple level, obtained under Finding the Maximum Field Ripple
Current, by 30. The multiplier may be varied between 20 and 40 to increase or decrease the pickup
margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance shorted diode indications.
Testing the EDM Settings
Start the generator from rest and increase the speed and voltage to the rated value. Load the machine to
its rating and confirm that no failed diode annunciations occur. All of the EDM setup guidelines presented
here assume that the exciter diodes were not opened or shorted at the time of setup and testing.

DECS-450 Protection
9-12 9597100990

Figure 9-16. Exciter Diode Monitor Protection Settings

Sync-Check Protection
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Sync Check (25)
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Protection, Sync Check (25)

Caution
Because the DECS-450 sync-check and automatic synchronizer
functions share internal circuitry, the sync-check function is disabled if
the automatic synchronizer function is enabled. If using the DECS-450
automatic synchronizer, consider separate sync-check supervision.

When enabled, the sync-check (25) function supervises the automatic or manual synchronism of the
controlled generator with a bus/utility. During synchronizing, the 25 function compares the voltage, slip
angle, and slip frequency differences between the generator and bus. When the generator/bus
differences fall within the setting for each parameter, the 25 status virtual output asserts. This virtual
output may be configured (in BESTlogicPlus) to assert a DECS-450 contact output. This contact output
can, in turn, enable the closure of a breaker tying the generator to the bus.
An angle compensation setting is provided to offset phase shift caused by transformers in the system. For
more details on the angle compensation setting, see the Synchronizer section.
When the Gen Freq > Bus Freq setting box is checked, the 25 status virtual output will not assert unless
the generator frequency is greater than the bus frequency. Sync-check protection settings are illustrated
in Figure 9-17.

Figure 9-17. Sync-Check Protection Settings

Protection DECS-450
9597100990 9-13

Generator Frequency Less Than 10 Hertz

A Generator Below 10 Hz condition is annunciated when the generator frequency decreases below 10 Hz
or when residual voltage is low at 50/60 Hz. A Generator Below 10 Hz annunciation is automatically reset
when the generator frequency increases above 10 Hz or the residual voltage increases above the
threshold.

Configurable Protection
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Configurable Protection
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Protection, Configurable Protection
The DECS-450 has eight configurable protection elements that may be used to supplement the standard
DECS-450 protection. BESTCOMSPlus configurable protection settings are illustrated in Figure 9-18. To
make the protection elements easier to identify, each element may be renamed through
BESTCOMSPlus. A protection element is configured by selecting the parameter to be monitored and then
establishing the operating characteristics for the element. Any one of the following parameters may be
selected.
• Analog Inputs 1 through 8 (optional AEM-2020 required)
• Auxiliary Input Current (mA)
• Auxiliary Input Voltage
• Bus Frequency
• Bus Voltage: VAB, VBC, or VCA
• Control Output
• EDM Ripple
• Exciter Field Current
• Exciter Field Temperature
• Exciter Field Voltage
• Gen Current: IA, IB, IC, or Average
• Gen Frequency
• Gen Power Factor and Scaled Power Factor
• Gen Voltage: VAB, VBC, VCA, or Average
• Kilovarhours
• Kilowatthours
• Negative Sequence Current
• Negative Sequence Voltage
• NLS Error Percent
• Positive Sequence Current
• Positive Sequence Voltage
• PSS Output
• RTD Inputs 1 through 8 (optional AEM-2020 required)
• Setpoint Position
• Thermocouples 1 and 2 (optional AEM-2020 required)
• Total kVA
• Total kvar
• Total kW
• Tracking Error
When the Stop Mode Inhibit setting is enabled, the configurable protection element is disabled when the
DECS-450 is in STOP mode. When the DECS-450 enters START mode, the arming delay timer begins
counting down and, when it expires, the configurable protection element is enabled. If Stop Mode Inhibit
is disabled, the arming delay is ignored.
A hysteresis function holds the protection function active for a user-defined percentage above/below the
pickup threshold. This prevents repeated pickups and dropouts where the monitored parameter is
hovering around the pickup threshold. For example, with a hysteresis setting of 5% on a protection
element configured to pick up at 100 Aac of A-phase generator overcurrent, the protection element would
DECS-450 Protection
9-14 9597100990

pick up when the current rises above 100 Aac and remain picked up until the current decreases below
95 Aac.
Each of the eight configurable protection elements has four adjustable thresholds. Each threshold may be
set to pick up when the monitored parameter increases above the pickup setting (Over) or decreases
below the pickup setting (Under). The pickup level for the monitored parameter is defined by a threshold
setting. The threshold setting range is very broad, so be sure to use appropriate values for the selected
parameter or else the protection function may not operate as intended.
After the threshold has been exceeded for the duration of the activation delay, the configurable protection
element trips. If the threshold detection drops out before the activation delay time expires, the activation
delay timer is reset.
Configurable protection pickup and trip elements in BESTlogicPlus may be used in a logic scheme to
initiate corrective action in response to the condition.

Figure 9-18. Configurable Protection Settings

Protection DECS-450
9597100990 10-1

10 • Limiters
DECS-450 limiters ensure that the controlled machine does not exceed its capabilities. Limiters include
overexcitation, underexcitation, stator current, var, and underfrequency/volts per hertz.

Per Unit Settings

Some BESTCOMSPlus® settings provide fields for actual and per unit values. When one of these fields is
edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the other field based on the new value and the
associated rated data (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
If the Rated Data parameters are changed after all per unit values are assigned, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all actual unit settings.

Overexcitation Limiter
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Limiters, OEL
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Limiters, OEL
The overexcitation limiter (OEL) monitors the level of field current supplied by the DECS-450 and limits it
to prevent field overheating.
The OEL can be enabled in all regulation modes. OEL behavior in manual mode can be configured to
limit excitation or issue an alarm. This behavior is configured in BESTlogic™Plus.
Two styles of overexcitation limiting are available in the DECS-450: summing point or takeover. OEL
settings are illustrated in Figure 10-3, Figure 10-4, and Figure 10-6.

Summing Point OEL

Summing point overexcitation limiting compensates for field overcurrent conditions while the machine is
offline or online. Offline and online OEL behavior is dictated by two separate groups of settings. Primary
and secondary setting groups (selectable in configurable logic) provide additional control for two distinct
machine operating conditions.

Offline Operation
For offline operation, there are two levels of summing-point overexcitation limiting: low and high. Figure
10-1 illustrates the relationship of the high-level and low-level OEL thresholds.
FIELD CURRENT

High
Current
High Level
CONTINUOUS Low
Current
Current
Time
Level
0-10sec

TIME IN SECONDS P0063-09

Figure 10-1. Summing Point, Offline, Overexcitation Limiting

The Offline, Low-Level OEL threshold is determined by the Low-Level setting. When the OEL becomes
inactive, the High Current Timer counts down from either the high time, if the High Current Timer has
expired, or from the amount of time spent at high level, if the High Current Timer has not expired. The
generator is permitted to operate indefinitely with this level of excitation.
The Offline, High-Level OEL threshold is determined by the High Level and High Time settings. When the
excitation level exceeds the High Level setting, the DECS-450 acts to limit the excitation to the value of
DECS-450 Limiters
10-2 9597100990

the High-Level setting and a High Level Timer is initiated. If this level of excitation persists until this timer
reaches the High Time setting, the DECS-450 acts to limit the excitation to the value of the Low-Level
setting.

Online Operation
For online operation, there are three levels of summing-point overexcitation limiting: low, medium, and
high. Figure 10-2 illustrates the relationship of the low-, medium-, and high-level OEL thresholds.
FIELD CURRENT

High
Current
Medium Level
High Medium Current
Current Current Level
Time CONTINUOUS Low
Time Current
0-10sec 0-120sec Level

P0063-10
TIME IN SECONDS
Figure 10-2. Summing Point, Online, Overexcitation Limiting
The online, low-level OEL threshold is determined by the low-level setting. When the excitation level is
below the low-level setting, no action is taken by the DECS-450. The generator is permitted to operate
indefinitely with this level of excitation. When the excitation level exceeds the low-level setting for the
duration of the medium and high time settings, the DECS-450 acts to limit the excitation to the value of
the low-level setting.
The online, medium-level OEL threshold is determined by a medium level and medium time setting. When
the excitation level exceeds the medium level setting for the duration of the high time setting, the DECS-
450 acts to limit the excitation to the value of the medium-level setting.
The online, high-level OEL threshold is determined by a high level and high time setting. When the
excitation level exceeds the high level setting, the DECS-450 instantaneously acts to limit the excitation to
the value of the high-level setting.
OEL Voltage Dependency
The OEL voltage dependency function enables the OEL High-Level setting when a fault is present. The
OEL High-Level setting is enabled when the dv/dt level is less than the setting. Otherwise, only the
Medium-Level and Low-Level settings are enabled.

Per Unit Settings

The levels have native units of Primary Amps and the rated data associated with them is Machine Rated
Data, Current – Full Load (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).

Limiters DECS-450
9597100990 10-3

Figure 10-3. OEL Configuration Settings

Figure 10-4. Summing Point OEL Settings

Takeover OEL
Takeover overexcitation limiting limits the field current level in relation to an inverse time characteristic
similar to that shown in Figure 10-5. Separate curves may be selected for online and offline operation. If
the system enters an overexcitation condition, the field current is limited and forced to follow the selected
curve. The inverse time characteristic is defined by Equation 10-1.

DECS-450 Limiters
10-4 9597100990

𝐴𝐴 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑡𝑡𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 =
𝐵𝐵 + √𝐶𝐶 + 𝐷𝐷 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
Equation 10-1. Inverse Pickup Time Characteristic
Where:
tpickup = time to pick up in seconds
A = -95.908
B = -17.165
C = 490.864
D = -191.816
TD = time dial setting <0.1, 20>
MOP = multiple of pickup <1.03, 2.5>

Figure 10-5. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover OEL

Primary and secondary setting groups provide additional control for two distinct machine operating
conditions. Each mode of takeover OEL operation (offline and online) has low-level, high-level, and time
dial settings.
Once the field current decreases below the dropout level (95% of pickup), the function is reset based on
the selected reset method. The available reset methods are inverse, integrating, and instantaneous.
Using the inverse method, the OEL is reset based on time versus multiple of pickup (MOP). The lower the
field current level, the less time is required for reset. Inverse reset uses the following curve (Equation
10-2) to calculate maximum reset time.
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 0.05
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 =
1 − (𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 1.03)2
Equation 10-2. Inverse Reset Time Characteristic
Where:
Reset Time Constant = maximum time to reset in seconds
RC = reset coefficient setting <0.01, 100>
TD = time dial setting <0.1, 20>
MOP = multiple of pickup

For the integrating reset method, the reset time is equal to the pickup time. In other words, the amount of
time spent above the low level threshold is the amount of time required to reset.
Instantaneous reset has no intentional time delay.
BESTCOMSPlus® displays a plot of the takeover OEL setting curves as shown in Figure 10-6.

Limiters DECS-450
9597100990 10-5

The levels have native units of Primary Amps and the rated data associated with them is Machine Rated
Data, Current – Full Load (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).

Figure 10-6. Takeover OEL Settings

Underexcitation Limiter
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Limiters, UEL
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Limiters, UEL
Operating a generator in an underexcited condition can cause the stator end iron to overheat. Extreme
underexcitation may lead to a loss of synchronism. The underexcitation limiter (UEL) senses the leading
var level of the generator and limits decreases in excitation. When enabled, the UEL operates in all
regulation modes. UEL behavior in manual mode can be configured to limit excitation or issue an alarm.
This behavior is configured in BESTlogicPlus.

Note
For UEL to operate, the PARALLEL_EN_LM logic block must be set
true in BESTlogicPlus programmable logic.

UEL settings are illustrated in Figure 10-7 and Figure 10-8.

Underexcitation limiting is implemented through an internally-generated UEL curve or a user-defined UEL
curve. The internally-generated curve is based on the desired reactive power limit at zero real power with
respect to the generator voltage and current rating. The absorbed reactive power axis of the curve on the
UEL Custom Curve screen can be tailored for your application.

DECS-450 Limiters
10-6 9597100990

A user-defined curve can have a maximum of five points. This curve allows the user to match a specific
generator characteristic by specifying the coordinates of the intended leading reactive power (kvar) limit
at the appropriate real power (kW) level.
The levels entered for the user-defined curve are defined for operation at the rated generator voltage. The
user-defined UEL curve can be automatically adjusted based on generator operating voltage by using the
UEL voltage dependency real-power exponent. The user-defined UEL curve is automatically adjusted
based on the ratio of the generator operating voltage divided by the generator rated voltage raised to the
power of the UEL voltage dependency real-power exponent. UEL voltage dependency is further defined
by a real power filter time constant that is applied to the low-pass filter for the real power output.

Figure 10-7. UEL Configuration Settings

Figure 10-8. UEL Custom Curve Screen

Limiters DECS-450
9597100990 10-7

Stator Current Limiter

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Limiters, SCL
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Limiters, SCL
The stator current limiter (SCL) monitors the level of stator current and limits it to prevent stator
overheating. To limit the stator current, the SCL modifies the excitation level according to the direction of
var flow into or out of the generator. Excessive stator current with leading power factor calls for increased
excitation. Excessive stator current with lagging power factor calls for reduced excitation.
The SCL can be enabled in all regulation modes. When operating in Manual mode, the DECS-450 will
announce high stator current but will not act to limit it. Primary and secondary SCL setting groups provide
additional control for two distinct machine operating conditions. Stator current limiting is provided at two
levels: low and high (see Figure 10-9). SCL settings are illustrated in Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-9. Stator Current Limiting

The levels have native units of Primary Amps and the rated data associated with them is Machine Rated
Data, Current (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).

Low-Level Limiting
When the stator current exceeds the low-level setting, the DECS-450 annunciates the elevated level. If
this condition persists for the duration of the High SCL Time setting, the DECS-450 acts to limit the
current to the low-level SCL Setting. When the stator current is below the Low-Level SCL setting, no SCL
limiting action is taken by the DECS-450. The High Current Timer counts down either from the high time,
if the High Current Timer has expired, or from the amount of time spent at high level, if the High Current
Timer has not expired. The generator is permitted to operate indefinitely at or below the low-level
threshold.

High-Level Limiting
When the stator current exceeds the High-Level setting, the DECS-450 acts to limit the current to the
value of the High-Level setting and a High Level Timer is initiated. If this level of current persists until this
timer reaches the High-Level Time setting, the DECS-450 acts to limit the current to the value of the Low-
level SCL setting.

Initial Delay
In the case of low- or high-level stator current limiting, the limiting function will not respond until an initial
time delay expires.

DECS-450 Limiters
10-8 9597100990

Figure 10-10. Stator Current Limiter Settings

Var Limiter
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Limiters, var
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Limiters, VAR
The var limiter can be enabled to limit the level of reactive power exported from the generator. Primary
and secondary setting groups provide additional control for two distinct machine operating conditions. The
var limiter setpoint is expressed as a percentage of the calculated, maximum VA rating for the machine. A
delay setting establishes a time delay between when the var threshold is exceeded and the DECS-450
acts to limit the var flow.
Var limiter settings are illustrated in Figure 10-11.

Figure 10-11. Var Limiter Settings

Limiter Scaling
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Limiters, Scaling
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Limiters, Scaling
Automatic adjustment (scaling) of the overexcitation limiter and stator current limiter is possible through
the DECS-450 auxiliary control input and through the optional AEM-2020 Analog Expansion Module RTD
inputs. Limiter scaling settings are illustrated in Figure 10-12. OEL and SCL scaling may be
independently enabled and disabled. Automatic adjustment of the OEL and SCL is based on six
parameters: signal and scale for three points (levels).

Limiters DECS-450
9597100990 10-9

With the scaling input set to Auxiliary Input, the signal value for each point represents the auxiliary control
input. This input can be a 4 to 20 mAdc signal applied to terminals I+ and I– or a –10 to +10 Vdc signal
applied to terminals V+ and V–.. See the Auxiliary Control section of this manual for details.
With the scaling input set to AEM RTD #, the signal value for each point represents an AEM RTD input in
degrees Fahrenheit. See the Analog Expansion Module section of this manual for details.
The scale value for each point defines the limiter low level as a percent of rated full-load field current for
the OEL and rated stator current for the SCL.

Figure 10-12. Limiter Scaling Settings

Underfrequency Limiter
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Limiters, Underfrequency
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Limiters, UEL
The underfrequency limiter is selectable for underfrequency limiting or volts per hertz limiting. These
limiters protect the generator from damage due to excessive magnetic flux resulting from low frequency
and/or overvoltage.
Underfrequency and volts per hertz limiter settings are illustrated in Figure 10-15.
If the generator frequency decreases below the corner frequency for the selected underfrequency slope
(Figure 10-13), the DECS-450 adjusts the voltage setpoint so that the generator voltage follows the
underfrequency slope. The adjustment range of the corner frequency and slope settings enables the
DECS-450 to precisely match the operating characteristics of the prime mover and the loads being
applied to the generator.

DECS-450 Limiters
10-10 9597100990

Corner Frequency
100 %

P0004-34.vsd
12-03-01

GENERATOR VOLTS

0%
10 Hz Nominal
GENERATOR FREQUENCY
Figure 10-13. Typical Underfrequency Compensation Curve

Volts per Hertz

The volts per hertz limiter prevents the regulation setpoint from exceeding the volts per hertz ratio defined
by the V/Hz High Limiter and V/Hz Low Limiter settings. A typical volts per hertz limiter curve is illustrated
in Figure 10-14.

Figure 10-14. Typical Volts per Hertz Limiter Slopes

Volts per hertz limiter operation is established by the V/Hz High Limiter, V/Hz Low Limiter, and V/Hz Time
Limiter settings. The generator may operate continuously at setpoints below the low limit threshold. When
the regulation setpoint is greater than the low limit threshold for the duration of the time delay, the setpoint
is reduced to the low limit threshold and is prevented from exceeding the low limit threshold. The
regulation setpoint is prevented from exceeding the value of the high limit threshold at all times.

Limiters DECS-450
9597100990 10-11

Figure 10-15. Underfrequency/Volts per Hertz Limiter Settings

DECS-450 Limiters
10-12 9597100990

Limiters DECS-450
9597100990 11-1

11 • Metering
The DECS-450 provides comprehensive metering of internal and system conditions. These capabilities
include extensive parameter metering, status indication, reporting, and real-time metering analysis.

Metering Explorer
DECS-450 metering is accessed through the metering explorer menu on the front panel HMI or the
BESTCOMSPlus® metering explorer.

HMI
On the front panel HMI, the metering explorer is accessed through the Metering branch of the HMI menu.

BESTCOMSPlus®
In BESTCOMSPlus, the metering explorer is located in the upper left portion of the application window.

Metering Screen Docking

A docking feature within the metering explorer allows arrangement and docking of multiple metering
screens. Clicking and dragging a metering screen tab displays a blue, transparent square, several arrow
boxes, and a tab box. These docking elements are illustrated in Figure 11-1.

Figure 11-1. Metering Screen Docking Controls

Dragging the blue square to the “up” (locator A), “right” (locator B), or “down” (locator C) arrow box places
the selected metering screen across the top, along the side, or at the bottom of the window. Once placed,
DECS-450 Metering
11-2 9597100990

the screen’s thumbtack icon can be clicked to dock the screen on the corresponding top, right, or lower
bar. A docked screen is viewed by hovering the mouse pointer over the docked screen.
Dragging the blue square to one of the four arrow boxes (locator D) places the screen inside the selected
window according to the arrow box selected. A metering screen can be placed as a tab inside the
selected window by dropping the screen on the tab box at the center of the four arrow boxes.
Dragging the blue square anywhere other than one of the arrow/tab boxes places the selected metering
screen as a floating window.

Metered Parameters
DECS-450 metering categories include generator, power, bus, field, power system stabilizer (PSS), and
generator synchronization parameters.

Generator
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Generator
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Generator
Metered generator parameters include the voltage (magnitude and angle), current (magnitude and angle),
and frequency. Primary- and per-unit values are available. Figure 11-2 illustrates the generator primary-
values metering screen.

Figure 11-2. Generator Primary-Values Metering

Power
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Power
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Power
Metered power parameters include real power (kW), apparent power (kVA), reactive power (kvar), and
machine power factor. Primary- and per-unit values are available. Accumulated kilowatthours (positive
and negative kWh), kilovarhours (positive and negative kvarh), and kilovoltampere hours (kVAh) are also
metered. Figure 11-3 illustrates the power primary-values screen and Figure 11-4 illustrates the energy
screen.

Metering DECS-450
9597100990 11-3

Figure 11-3. Power Primary-Values

Figure 11-4. Energy

When operating in motor mode, values for var and power factor are opposite in BESTCOMSPlus and on
the front-panel HMI.

Bus
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Bus
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Bus
Metered bus parameters include the voltage across phases A and B (Vab), phases B and C (Vbc),
phases A and C (Vca), and the average bus voltage. The frequency of the bus voltage is also metered.
Primary- and per-unit values are available. Figure 11-5 illustrates the bus primary-values metering screen.

Figure 11-5. Bus Primary-Values Metering

Field
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Field
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Field
Metered field parameters include the field voltage (Vfd), current (Ifd), temperature, and exciter diode
ripple. The exciter diode ripple is reported by the exciter diode monitor (EDM) as a percentage of the
induced ripple in the exciter field current.
The level of excitation power supplied to the field is displayed as a percentage, with 0% being the
minimum and 100% being the maximum.

DECS-450 Metering
11-4 9597100990

Primary- and per-unit values are available. Figure 11-6 illustrates the field primary-values metering
screen.

Figure 11-6. Field Primary-Values Metering

PSS
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, PSS (Power System Stabilizer)
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, PSS
Values metered by the power system stabilizer function display positive sequence voltage and current,
negative sequence voltage and current, terminal frequency deviation, compensated frequency deviation,
per-unit PSS output level and PSS frequency rate of change. The PSS function on/off status is also
reported. Primary- and per-unit values are available. Figure 11-7 illustrates the PSS primary-values
metering screen.

Figure 11-7. PSS Primary-Values Metering

Synchronization
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Synchronization
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Synchronization
Metered generator-to-bus synchronization parameters include the slip frequency, slip angle, and voltage
difference. Primary- and per-unit values are available. Figure 11-8 illustrates the synchronization primary-
values metering screen.

Figure 11-8. Synchronization Primary Values Metering

Metering DECS-450
9597100990 11-5

Auxiliary Control Input

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Aux Input
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Aux Input
The control signal applied at the DECS-450 auxiliary control input is indicated on the Aux Input metering
screen (Figure 11-9). As configured in BESTCOMSPlus, a dc voltage or dc current signal may be applied.

Figure 11-9. Auxiliary Control Input Metering

Tracking
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Tracking
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Tracking
The metered setpoint tracking error between DECS-450 operating modes is displayed on the Tracking
metering screen (Figure 11-10). Status fields are provided for the on/off status for internal setpoint
tracking, external setpoint tracking and null balance, which indicates when the setpoint of an inactive
operating mode matches the metered value.

Figure 11-10. Tracking Metering

Control Panel
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Control Panel
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Control Panel
The Control Panel (Figure 11-11) provides options for changing operating modes, selecting setpoint pre-
positions, fine tuning setpoints, and toggling virtual switches. The setpoints for AVR, FCR, FVR, var, and
PF are displayed, as well as Alarm status, PSS status, and Null Balance status.

DECS-450 Metering
11-6 9597100990

Figure 11-11. Control Panel

Start/Stop Mode: Two indicators show the start/stop mode of the DECS-450. When a mode is active, its
corresponding indicator changes from gray to green. To Start DECS-450 regulation, click the Start button.
Click the Stop button to stop DECS-450 regulation.
AVR/Manual Mode: AVR and Manual Mode status is reported by two indicators. When a mode is active,
its corresponding indicator changes from gray to green. AVR mode is selected by clicking the AVR button
and manual mode is selected by clicking the Manual button.
FCR/FVR Mode: FCR and FVR mode status is reported by two indicators. When a mode is active, its
corresponding indicator changes from gray to green. FCR mode is selected by clicking the FCR button
and FVR mode is selected by clicking the FVR button.
Var/PF Mode: Three indicators report whether Var mode, Power Factor mode, or neither mode is active.
When a mode is active, its corresponding indicator changes from gray to green. When neither mode is
active, the Off indicator changes from gray to green. Var mode is enabled by clicking the var button and
Power Factor mode is enabled by clicking the PF button. Neither mode is enabled by clicking the Off
button. Only one mode can be enabled at any time.
Setpoint Pre-position: A control button and indicator is provided for the three setpoint pre-positions.
Clicking the Set 1 button adjusts the excitation setpoint to the Pre-position 1 value and changes the Pre-
position 1 indicator to green. Pre-positions 2 and 3 are selected by clicking either the Set 2 or Set 3
button.
Setpoints: Five status fields display the active setpoints for AVR mode, FCR mode, FVR mode, var
mode, and Power Factor mode. These active setpoints, represented by a yellow font, are not to be
confused with metered analog values which are represented by a green font throughout
BESTCOMSPlus. For details on operating setpoint settings, see the Regulation section.
Setpoint Fine Adjust: Clicking the Raise button increases the active operating setpoint. Clicking the
Lower button decreases the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is directly
proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse rate.
Setpoint Return: Clicking the Return button changes the active operating setpoint back to the original
value before it was adjusted.

Metering DECS-450
9597100990 11-7

Setpoint Limits: The Upper indicator changes from gray to green when the upper setpoint limit threshold
has been exceeded. The Lower indicator changes from gray to green when the lower setpoint limit
threshold has been exceeded.
Alarm Status: The Alarm Status indicator changes from gray to green when there is an active alarm.
PSS Status: The PSS Status indicator changes from gray to green when the PSS is active.
Null Balance: The Null Balance indicator changes from gray to green when the setpoint of the inactive
operating modes (AVR, FCR, FVR, var, and PF) match the setpoint of the active mode.
Virtual Switches: These buttons control the open or closed status of the six virtual switches. Clicking the
Open button sets the switch to the open position and changes the switch indicator to gray. Clicking the
Close button sets the switch to the closed position and changes the switch indicator to red. A dialog will
appear asking if you are sure you want to open or close the switch.

Metering Summary
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Summary
HMI Navigation Path: Not available via HMI
All of the metering values displayed on the individual, previously described metering screens are
consolidated on the metering summary screen (Figure 11-12). The primary- and per-unit metering
summary screens are available only in BESTCOMSPlus.

Figure 11-12. Metering Summary Screen

Status Indication
Status indication is provided for DECS-450 system functions, inputs, outputs, network load share,
configurable protection, alarms, and the real-time clock.

DECS-450 Metering
11-8 9597100990

System Status
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, System Status
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, System Status
When any of the system functions illustrated in Figure 11-13 are active, the corresponding indicator
changes from gray to green. An inactive function is represented by a gray indicator.

Figure 11-13. System Status Indication Screen

Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Inputs
Status annunciation is provided for the DECS-450, optional Contact Expansion Module (CEM-2020)
inputs and optional Analog Expansion Module (AEM-2020) inputs.

DECS-450 Contact Inputs

Status indication for the DECS-450’s 16 contact sensing inputs is provided on the BESTCOMSPlus
contact inputs screen illustrated in Figure 11-14. An indicator changes from gray to red when a closed
contact is sensed at the corresponding input.

Metering DECS-450
9597100990 11-9

Figure 11-14. DECS-450 Contact Inputs Status Indication Screen

AEM-2020 Inputs
Status annunciations for the optional AEM-2020 Analog Expansion Module’s analog, RTD, thermocouple,
and analog metering inputs are provided on the BESTCOMSPlus remote analog inputs, remote RTD
inputs, remote thermocouple inputs, and remote analog input values screens. These screens are
described and illustrated in the Analog Expansion Module section of this manual.

CEM-2020 Contact Inputs

The status of the 10 contact sensing inputs of the optional CEM-2020 Contact Expansion Module is
provided on the BESTCOMSPlus remote contact inputs screen. See the Contact Expansion Module
section of this manual for a description and illustration of this screen.

Outputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Outputs
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Outputs
Status annunciation is provided for the DECS-450 contact outputs and optional Contact Expansion
Module (CEM-2020) contact outputs. Annunciation is also provided for the optional Analog Expansion
Module (AEM-2020) analog outputs.

DECS-450 Contact Outputs

Status indication for the DECS-450’s Watchdog and 11 programmable contact outputs is provided on the
BESTCOMSPlus contact outputs screen illustrated in Figure 11-15. An indicator changes from gray to
green when the corresponding output changes state (Watchdog output) or closes (Output 1 through 11).

CEM-2020 Contact Outputs

The status of the 24 contact outputs of the optional CEM-2020 Contact Expansion Module is provided on
the BESTCOMSPlus remote contact inputs screen. See the Contact Expansion Module section of this
manual for a description and illustration of this screen.

AEM-2020 Analog Outputs

Metering and status indications provided by the optional AEM-2020 Analog Expansion Module are shown
on the BESTCOMSPlus remote analog outputs screen. This screen is described and illustrated in the
Analog Expansion Module section of this manual.

DECS-450 Metering
11-10 9597100990

Figure 11-15. DECS-450 Contact Outputs Status Indication Screen

Network Load Share

The screen shown in Figure 11-16 reports the error percent, reactive current, NLS average reactive
current, and number of generators online. The status indicators change from gray to green when a status
is active.
The Error percent is the deviation of the unit’s reactive current from the system average. The NLS
Average Reactive Current is the average of the reactive current of every unit in the system. Generators
Online is the number of units actively load sharing.

Figure 11-16. NLS Status Screen

Configurable Protection
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Configurable Protection
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Configurable Protection
Trip status for the eight configurable, supplemental protection elements is annunciated on the
BESTCOMSPlus configurable protection screen (Figure 11-17). An indicator for each protection
element’s four trip thresholds changes from gray to green when the corresponding trip threshold is
exceeded.

Metering DECS-450
9597100990 11-11

Figure 11-17. Configurable Protection Indication Status Screen

Alarms
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Alarms
HMI Navigation Path: Alarms automatically displayed when active
System parameters, communication links, protection functions, and remote inputs/outputs are monitored
for alarm conditions. Active and previously latched alarms are listed on the front panel display and the
Alarms screen of BESTCOMSPlus. At the front panel, an inactive alarm is reset by selecting the alarm
and then pressing the Reset pushbutton. Click the Reset Alarms button on the Alarms screen to clear all
inactive alarms in BESTCOMSPlus. The BESTCOMSPlus Alarms screen is illustrated in Figure 11-18.

Figure 11-18. DECS-450 Alarm Annunciation and Reset Screen

Alarm Configuration
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Alarms
Alarms are configured using BESTCOMSPlus. Customize the reporting style of each alarm by choosing
Disabled, Latching, or Non-Latching. Latching alarms are stored in nonvolatile memory and are retained
even when control power to the DECS-450 is lost. Active alarms are shown on the front panel HMI and in
BESTCOMSPlus until they are cleared. Non-latching alarms are cleared when control power is removed.
Disabling an alarm affects only the annunciation of the alarm and not the actual operation of the alarm.
This means that the alarm will still trip when trip conditions are met and the occurrence will appear on the
sequence of events reports.
The BESTCOMSPlus Alarm Settings screen is shown in Figure 11-19 below.

DECS-450 Metering
11-12 9597100990

Figure 11-19. Alarm Settings Screen

User-Programmable Alarms
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, User Programmable Alarms
Sixteen user programmable alarms are available. User alarm labels are entered on the User
Programmable Alarms screen (Figure 11-20). If the trip condition exists for the duration of the Activation
Delay, the alarm trips. When active, the label of a user programmable alarm is displayed on the
BESTCOMSPlus Alarms screen, on the front panel display, and in the sequence of events reports.
Each alarm provides a logic output that can be connected to a physical output or other logic input using
BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic. Refer to the BESTlogicPlus section for more information on
setting up alarm logic.

Figure 11-20. User Programmable Alarms Screen

Metering DECS-450
9597100990 11-13

Retrieving Alarm Information

Alarms are automatically displayed in the sequence of events reports and on the front panel display when
active. To view active alarms using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Metering Explorer, Status, Alarms screen.

Resetting Alarms
BESTlogicPlus may be used to reset alarms. Use the Settings Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus to open
the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic screen. Select the ALARM_RESET logic block from the list of
Elements. Use the drag and drop method to connect a variable or series of variables to the Reset input.
When this input is set TRUE, this element resets all active alarms. Refer to the BESTlogicPlus section for
more information.

Real-Time Clock
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Real Time Clock
HMI Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Status, Real Time Clock
The DECS-450’s time and date is displayed and adjusted on the Real-Time Clock screen (Figure 11-21).
In BESTCOMSPlus, clicking the Edit button displays a window where the time and date may be adjusted
either manually or synchronized with the connected PC’s clock. Through the HMI, time and date may be
edited manually only.
Advanced clock settings such as time and date format, daylight saving time, network time protocol, and
IRIG are described in the Timekeeping section of this manual.

Figure 11-21. Real-Time Clock Screen

Auto Export Metering

The Auto Export Metering function, in the BESTCOMSPlus Tools menu, automatically saves metering
data files at specific intervals over a period of time while connected to a DECS-450. Enter the number of
exports and the interval between each export. Click the Filter button to choose which parameters are
included in the data file. Enter a base filename for the data files and specify a directory for storing the
files. Click Start to begin the Auto Export Metering session. The first export is performed immediately
upon clicking the Start button. Figure 11-22 illustrates the Auto Export Metering screen.

DECS-450 Metering
11-14 9597100990

Figure 11-22. Auto Export Metering

Metering DECS-450
9597100990 12-1

12 • Event Recorder
DECS-450 event recorder functions include sequence-of-events recording (SER), data logging
(oscillography), and trending.

Sequence-of-Events Recording
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Report Configuration, Sequence of Events Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Not available through the HMI
The DECS-450 SER scans parameters at four-millisecond intervals and records any changes of state
(event) with a time and date stamp. Up to 2,047 events are stored in the record and, if the record is full,
the oldest events are overwritten as new events occur.
More than 400 different parameters are scanned by default, but each parameter may be filtered on or off
to suit user preference. To adjust parameter filters, use the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer to open
Report Configuration, Sequence of Events Setup (Figure 12-1). Parameter filter settings are not available
through the HMI.
To view the current SER record, use the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer to open Reports, Sequence
of Events.

Figure 12-1. Sequence of Events Setup

Data Logging
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Report Configuration, Data Log
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Report Configuration, Datalog
The data logging function of the DECS-450 can record up to six oscillography records. DECS-450
oscillography records use the IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
(COMTRADE). Each record is time- and date-stamped. After six records have been recorded, the
DECS-450 Event Recorder
12-2 9597100990

DECS-450 begins recording the next record over the oldest record. Because oscillography records are
stored in nonvolatile memory, interruptions in DECS-450 control power will not affect the integrity of the
records. Data log settings are configured in BESTCOMSPlus and illustrated in Figure 12-2 through Figure
12-5.

Setup
When oscillography is enabled, the records consist of up to six user-selectable parameters with up to
1,200 data points recorded for each parameter. Data log setup settings are illustrated in Figure 12-2.
A Pre-Trigger Points setting specifies the number of data points to include in a data log that were
recorded prior to the event trigger. The value of this setting affects the duration of the recorded pre-trigger
points, the recorded post-trigger points, and the duration of the post-trigger points. A sample interval
setting establishes the sample rate of the data points recorded. The value of this setting affects the pre-
and post-trigger duration values and the total recording duration for a data log.

Figure 12-2. Data Log Setup

Triggers
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Report Configuration, Data Log
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Configuration Settings, Data Log
Data logging may be triggered by mode triggers, logic triggers, level triggers, or manually through
BESTCOMSPlus.

Mode Triggers
Mode triggers initiate data logging as a result of an internal or external DECS-450 status change. A data
log can be triggered by any of the following status changes:
• Start or Stop mode selected
• Soft Start mode enabled or disabled
• Underfrequency condition
• Manual or AVR mode selected
• Power Factor or Var mode selected
• Limiter active
• Voltage matching enabled or disabled
• Primary or secondary DECS selected
• PSS enabled or disabled
• Auto Sync enabled or disabled
Event Recorder DECS-450
9597100990 12-3

• FCR or FVR mode selected

• Droop mode enabled or disabled
• Network Load Share enabled or disabled
• Line drop compensation enabled or disabled
• Cross-current compensation enabled or disabled
• Test mode enabled or disabled
Mode trigger settings are illustrated in Figure 12-3.

Figure 12-3. Data Log Mode Triggers

Level Triggers
Level triggering initiates a data log when the value of a system parameter crosses an upper threshold,
lower threshold, or both. The parameters available to trigger a data log are listed below.
Level triggers are configured in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer, Report Configuration, Data Log,
Level Triggers screen (Figure 12-4).

Figure 12-4. Data Log Level Triggers

• Auxiliary voltage input • Droop
• AVR output • FCR error
• AVR PID error signal input • FCR output
• Bus frequency • FCR state
• Bus voltage • Field current (Full Load)
• Comp. frequency deviation • Field voltage (Full Load)
• Control output • Field temperature
• Cross current input • Frequency response

DECS-450 Event Recorder

12-4 9597100990

• FVR error • PSS lead/lag #3

• FVR output • PSS lead/lag #4
• FVR state • PSS mechanical power
• Generator apparent power • PSS mechanical power LP #1
• Generator average current • PSS mechanical power LP #2
• Generator average voltage • PSS mechanical power LP #3
• Generator current Ia • PSS mechanical power LP #4
• Generator current Ib • PSS post-limit output
• Generator current Ic • PSS power HP #1
• Generator frequency • PSS pre-limit output
• Generator power factor • PSS speed HP #1
• Generator reactive power • PSS synthesized speed
• Generator real power • PSS terminal voltage
• Generator voltage Vab • PSS torsional filter #1
• Generator voltage Vbc • PSS torsional filter #2
• Generator voltage Vca • PSS washed out power
• Internal State • PSS washed out speed
• Negative sequence current • SCL controller output
• Negative sequence voltage • SCL PF ref.
• Network Load Share • SCL ref.
• Null balance level • SCL state
• OEL controller output • Terminal frequency deviation
• OEL ref. • Time response
• OEL state • UEL controller output
• Position Indication • UEL ref.
• Positive sequence current • UEL state
• Positive sequence voltage • Var limit output
• PSS electrical power • Var limit ref
• PSS filtered mech. Power • Var limit state
• PSS final output • Var/PF error
• PSS frequency rate of change • Var/PF output
• PSS lead/lag #1 • Var/PF state
• PSS lead/lag #2

Logic Triggers
Logic triggering initiates a data log as a result of an internal or external status change. A data log can be
triggered by any combination of alarm, contact output, or contact input state changes. The available logic
triggers are illustrated in Figure 12-5.

Event Recorder DECS-450

9597100990 12-5

Figure 12-5. Data Log Logic Triggers

Trending
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Report Configuration, Trending
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Configuration Settings, Trending
The trend log records the activity of DECS-450 parameters over an extended period of time. When
enabled, up to six parameters can be monitored over a user-defined duration ranging from 1 to
720 hours. Trend log settings are illustrated in Figure 12-6.

DECS-450 Event Recorder

12-6 9597100990

Figure 12-6. Trend Log Setup

Event Recorder DECS-450

9597100990 13-1

13 • Power System Stabilizer

The optional, integrated power system stabilizer (PSS) (DECS-450 style 1XXXXXX) is an IEEE Std 421.5
type PSS2A/2B/2C, dual-input, “integral of accelerating power” stabilizer that provides supplementary
damping for low-frequency, local-mode oscillations and power system oscillations.
PSS features include user-selectable, speed-only sensing, three-wattmeter power measurement, optional
frequency-based operation, generator and motor control modes, and rate of frequency change blocking.

Note
Three-phase current sensing is required for PSS.

PSS settings are illustrated in Figure 13-10, Figure 13-11, Figure 13-12, and Figure 13-13.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, PSS
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, PSS

Supervisory Function and Setting Groups

A supervisory function enables PSS operation only when a sufficient load is applied to the generator. Two
separate groups of PSS settings enable stabilizer operation tailored for two distinct load conditions.

Supervisory Function
When PSS control is enabled, a power-on threshold setting determines the level of power (watts) where
PSS operation is automatically enabled. This threshold is a per-unit setting based on the generator
ratings. (The Configuration section of this manual provides information about entering the generator and
system ratings.) A hysteresis setting provides a margin below the power-on threshold so that transient
dips in power (watts) will not disable stabilizer operation. This hysteresis is a per-unit setting based on the
generator ratings.

Setting Groups
When setting group selection is enabled, a threshold setting establishes the power level where the PSS
gain settings are switched from the primary group to the secondary group. After a transfer to the
secondary gain settings, a hysteresis setting determines the level of (decreasing) power where a transfer
back to the primary gain settings will occur.

Frequency Rate of Change

The PSS rate-of-change function adjusts the PSS output to compensate for a generator rate-of-frequency
change that exceeds the user-defined threshold. This threshold has an adjustment range of 0 to 10 hertz
per second. When the generator frequency rate of change threshold is exceeded for the duration of a
user-defined time delay, the PSS output is driven to zero and then ramped up to its previous, nominal
value over the duration of a user-specified block timer. The delay time and block time are each adjustable
from 0 to 20 seconds. The low-pass filter time constant and washout filter time constant settings are used
to calculate the rate of change. These two settings have an adjustment range of 0 to 20 seconds.

Theory of Operation
The PSS uses an indirect method of power system stabilization that employs two signals: shaft speed
and electrical power. This method eliminates the undesirable components from the speed signal (such as
noise, lateral shaft run-out, or torsional oscillations) while avoiding a reliance on the difficult-to-measure
mechanical power signal.

DECS-450 Power System Stabilizer

13-2 9597100990

PSS function is illustrated by the function blocks and software switches shown in Figure 13-1. This
illustration is also available in BESTCOMSPlus by clicking the PSS Model Info button located on the
Control tab.

Figure 13-1. PSS Function Blocks and Software Switches

Power System Stabilizer DECS-450

9597100990 13-3

Speed Signal
The speed signal is converted to a constant level that is proportional to the shaft speed (frequency).
Two high-pass (frequency washout) filter stages are applied to the resulting signal to remove the average
speed level and produce a speed deviation signal. This ensures that the stabilizer reacts only to changes
in speed and does not permanently alter the generator terminal voltage reference.
The frequency washout filter stages are controlled by time constant settings Tw1 and Tw2. Low-pass
filtering of the speed deviation signal can be enabled or disabled through software switch SSW 0. The
low-pass filter time constant is adjusted by the TI1 setting.
Figure 13-2 shows the high-pass and low-pass filter transfer function blocks in frequency domain form.
(The letter s is used to represent the complex frequency of Laplace operator.)

Disable

Compensated sTw1 sTw2 1

Washed Out
Frequency Enable Speed
1+ sTw1 1+ sTw2 1+ sTl1
SSW 0
P0026-13

PSS Frequency Input Signal

Figure 13-2. Speed Signal

Rotor Frequency Calculation

During steady-state conditions, the terminal frequency of the generator is a good measure of rotor speed.
However, this may not be the case during low frequency transients, due to the voltage drop across the
machine reactance. To compensate for this effect, the DECS-450 first calculates the terminal voltages
and currents. It then adds the voltage drop across the quadrature reactance to the terminal voltages to
obtain internal machine voltages. These voltages are then used to calculate the rotor frequency. This
gives a more accurate measure of rotor speed during low frequency transients when stabilizing action is
required.
The quadrature axis compensation used in the rotor frequency calculation is entered through the
Quadrature Xq setting.

Generator Electrical Power Signal

Figure 13-3 illustrates the operations performed on the power input signal to produce the integral of
electrical power deviation signal.
The generator electrical power output is derived from the generator VT secondary voltages and generator
CT secondary currents applied to the DECS-450. Three-phase current sensing is required for PSS.
The power output is high-pass (washout) filtered to produce the required power deviation signal. If
additional washout filtering is desired, a second high-pass filter can be enabled by software switch
SSW 1. The first high-pass filter is controlled by time constant setting Tw3 and the second high-pass filter
is controlled by time constant setting Tw4.

DECS-450 Power System Stabilizer

13-4 9597100990

SSW 1
sTw3 sTw4 Enable
Tl2 / 2H
Washed Out
Power
Power
1+ sTw3 1+ sTw4 1+ sTl2
Disable
P0026-14

PSS Power Input Signal

Figure 13-3. Generator Electrical Power Signal
After high-pass filtering, the electrical power signal is integrated and scaled, combining the generator
inertia constant (2H) with the speed signal. Low-pass filtering within the integrator is controlled by time
constant TI2.

Derived Mechanical Power Signal

The speed deviation signal and integral of electrical power deviation signal are combined to produce a
derived, integral of mechanical power signal.
An adjustable gain stage, KPE, establishes the amplitude of the electrical power input used by the PSS
function.
The derived integral of mechanical power signal is then passed through a mechanical-power, low-pass
filter and ramp tracking filter. The low-pass filter is controlled by time constant TL3 and provides
attenuation of torsional components appearing in the speed input path. The ramp tracking filter produces
a zero, steady-state error to ramp changes in the integral of electric power input signal. This limits the
stabilizer output variation to very low levels for the mechanical power rates of change that are normally
encountered during operation of utility-scale generators. The ramp tracking filter is controlled by time
constant TR. An exponent consisting of a numerator and denominator is applied to the mechanical power
filter.
Processing of the derived integral of mechanical power signal is illustrated in Figure 13-4.

Washed M −N N

Σ    1 + sT R 
Σ
1 + Derived
Out     Speed
Speed  (1 + sT L 3 )   1 + sT L 3  Deviation
+

KPE P0026-15

Figure 13-4. Derived Mechanical Power Signal

Stabilizing Signal Selection

Figure 13-5 illustrates how software switches SSW 2 and SSW 3 are used to select the stabilizing signal.
Derived speed deviation is selected as the stabilizing signal when the SSW 2 setting is Derived Speed
and the SSW 3 setting is Derived Frequency/Speed. Washed out speed is selected as the stabilizing
signal when the SSW 2 setting is Frequency and the SSW 3 setting is Derived Frequency/Speed.
Washed out power is selected as the stabilizing signal when the SSW 3 setting is Power. (When the
SSW 3 setting is Power, the SSW 2 setting has no effect.)

Power System Stabilizer DECS-450

9597100990 13-5

Derived SSW 2 SSW 3

Stabilizing
Speed
Deviation Signal

Washed
Out Speed P0026-19
12-09-04

Washed
Out Power
Figure 13-5. Stabilizing Signal Selection

Torsional Filters
Two torsional filters, shown in Figure 13-6, are available after the stabilizing signal and before the phase
compensation blocks. The torsional filters provide the desired gain reduction at a specified frequency.
The filters compensate the torsional frequency components present in the input signal.

SSW 4 SSW 5
s 2 + 2 zn w n s + w n
2
s 2 + 2 zn w n s + w n
2
Stabilizing Enable Enable Phase
s 2 + 2zd w n s + w n
Signal 2 Compensation
s 2 + 2zd w n s + w n
2
Disable Disable

P0026-20
12-09-04

Figure 13-6. Torsional Filters

Software switch SSW 4 enables and disables torsional filter 1 and SSW 5 enables and disables torsional
filter 2.
Torsional filters 1 and 2 are controlled by a zeta numerator (Zeta Num), zeta denominator (Zeta Den),
and a frequency response parameter (Wn).

Phase Compensation
The derived speed signal is modified before it is applied to the voltage regulator input. Filtering of the
signal provides phase lead at the electromechanical frequencies of interest (0.1 to 5 Hz). The phase lead
requirement is site-specific and is required to compensate for phase lag introduced by the closed-loop
voltage regulator.
Four phase compensation stages are available. Each phase compensation stage has a phase lead time
constant (T1, T3, T5, T7) and a phase lag time constant (T2, T4, T6, T8). Normally, the first two lead-lag
stages are adequate to match the phase compensation requirements of a unit. If needed, the third and
fourth stages may be added through the settings of software switches SSW 6 and SSW 7. Figure 13-7
illustrates the phase compensation stages and associates software switches.
SSW 6 SSW 7
Stabilizing 1 + s T1 1 + s T3 Exclude Exclude PSS Output Before
Signal 1 + s T2 1 + s T4 Gain and Limits
Include Include

1 + s T5 1 + s T7 P0026-21
12-09-04
1 + s T6 1 + s T8

Figure 13-7. Phase Compensation

Washout Filter and Logic Limiter

The output of the phase compensation stages is connected, through a stabilizer gain stage, to the
washout filter and logic limiter.
Software switch SSW 9 enables and bypasses the washout filter and logic limiter. The washout filter has
two time constants: normal and limit (less than normal).

DECS-450 Power System Stabilizer

13-6 9597100990

The logic limiter compares the signal from the washout filter with the logic limiter upper and lower limit
settings. If the counter reaches the set delay time, the time constant for the washout filter changes from
the normal time constant to the limit time constant. When the signal returns to within the specified limits,
the counter resets and the washout filter time constant changes back to the normal time constant.
Figure 13-8 illustrates the washout filter and logic limiter.

Terminal
Voltage Limiter
P0026-22
VPSS_ULMT 12-13-04

VST

VPSS_LLMT

Vlmt_hi
VPSS_ULMT
Disable

SSW 9
Phase Lead s Tw5
Block Logic Limiter
Enable 1 + s Tw5

VPSS_LLMT

Vlmt_lo

Figure 13-8. Washout Filter and Logic Limiter

Output Stage
Prior to connecting the stabilizer output signal to the voltage regulator input, adjustable gain and upper
and lower limits are applied. The stabilizer output is connected to the voltage regulator input when the
software switch SSW 10 setting is On. Processing of the stabilizer output signal is illustrated in Figure
13-9.

Figure 13-9. Output Stage

Terminal Voltage Limiter

Since the PSS operates by modulating the excitation, it may counteract the voltage regulator’s attempts
to maintain terminal voltage within a tolerance band. To avoid creating an overvoltage condition, the PSS
has a terminal voltage limiter (shown in Figure 13-8) that reduces the upper output limit to zero when the

Power System Stabilizer DECS-450

9597100990 13-7

generator voltage exceeds the terminal voltage setpoint. The terminal voltage limiter is enabled and
disabled by software switch SSW 8. The limit setpoint is normally selected such that the limiter will
eliminate any contribution from the PSS before the timed overvoltage or volts per hertz protection
operates.
The limiter reduces the stabilizer’s upper limit, VPSS_ULMT, at a fixed rate until zero is reached or
overvoltage is no longer present. The limiter does not reduce the AVR reference below its normal level; it
will not interfere with system voltage control during disturbance conditions. The error signal (terminal
voltage minus the limit start point) is processed through a conventional low-pass filter to reduce the effect
of measurement noise. The low-pass filter is controlled by a time constant.

Figure 13-10. PSS Configuration Settings

Figure 13-11. PSS Control Settings

DECS-450 Power System Stabilizer

13-8 9597100990

Figure 13-12. PSS Parameter Settings

Power System Stabilizer DECS-450

9597100990 13-9

Figure 13-13. PSS Output Limiter Settings

DECS-450 Power System Stabilizer

13-10 9597100990

Power System Stabilizer DECS-450

9597100990 14-1

14 • Stability Tuning
A PID control loop is used to tune the transient performance of a DECS-450-based excitation system.
The word proportional indicates that the response of the DECS-450 output is proportional or relative to
the amount of difference observed. Integral means that the DECS-450 output is proportional to the
amount of time that a difference is observed. Integral action eliminates steady state error. Derivative
means that the DECS-450 output is proportional to the required rate of excitation change. Derivative
action minimizes overshoot.

Caution
All stability tuning must be performed with no load on the system or
equipment damage may occur.

AVR Mode
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Gain, AVR
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Gains, AVR Gains
Two sets of PID settings are provided to optimize performance under two distinct operating conditions,
such as with the power system stabilizer (PSS) in or out of service. A fast controller provides optimum
transient performance with the PSS in service while a slower controller may provide stable operation
when the PSS is disabled. BESTCOMSPlus® primary and secondary AVR stability settings are shown in
Figure 14-1.

Predefined Stability Settings

Twenty predefined sets of stability settings are available with the DECS-450. Appropriate PID values are
implemented based on the nominal generator frequency selected (see the Configuration section of this
manual) and the combination of generator (T’do) and exciter (Texc) time constants selected from the gain
option list. (The default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six.)
Additional settings are available to remove the effects of noise on numerical differentiation (AVR
derivative time constant Td) and set the voltage regulator gain level of the PID algorithm (Ka). Using the
recommended Ka value will per unitize the PID control loop, simplifying system modeling and validation.

Custom Stability Settings

Stability tuning can be tailored for optimum generator transient performance. Selecting the Custom
primary gain option enables entry of custom proportional (Kp), integral (Ki), and derivative (Kd) gains.
When tuning the stability gain settings, consider the following guidelines:
• If the transient response has too much overshoot, decrease Kp. If the transient response is too slow,
with little or no overshoot, increase Kp.
• If the time to reach steady-state is too long, increase Ki.
• If the transient response has too much ringing, increase Kd.

DECS-450 Stability Tuning

14-2 9597100990

Figure 14-1. AVR Stability Settings

PID Calculator
The PID calculator is accessed by clicking the PID calculator button (Figure 14-1) and is available only
when the primary gain option is Custom. The PID calculator (Figure 14-2) calculates the gain parameters
Kp, Ki, and Kd based on the generator time constants (T’do) and exciter time constant (Te). If the exciter
time constant is not known, it can be forced to the default value, which is the generator time constant
divided by six. A derivative time constant (Td) setting field enables the removal of noise effects on
numerical differentiation. A voltage regulator gain (Ka) setting field sets the voltage regulator gain level of
the PID algorithm. Calculated and entered parameters can be applied upon closure of the PID calculator.
Generator information appears in the PID Record List where records can be added or removed.
A group of settings can be saved with a unique name and added to a list of gain setting records available
for application. Upon completion of stability tuning, undesired records can be removed from the record
list.

Caution
Calculated or user-defined PID values are to be implemented only
after their suitability for the application has been verified by the user.
Incorrect PID numbers can result in poor system performance or
equipment damage.

Stability Tuning DECS-450

9597100990 14-3

Figure 14-2. PID Calculator

Auto Tuning
During commissioning, excitation system parameters may not be known. These unknown variables
traditionally cause the commissioning process to consume large amounts of time and fuel. With the
development of auto tuning, the excitation system parameters are now automatically identified and the
PID gains are calculated using well-developed algorithms. Automatically tuning the PID controller greatly
reduces commissioning time and cost.
Auto tuning uses a patented particle swarm optimization algorithm to determine system parameters and
calculates corresponding PID gains. The auto tuning function is accessed by clicking the Auto Tune
button (Figure 14-1). BESTCOMSPlus must be in Live Mode in order to begin the auto tuning process.
The auto tuning window (Figure 14-3) provides options for choosing the PID Design Mode and the Power
Input Mode. When the desired settings are selected, click the Start Auto Tune button to start the process.
After the process is complete, click the Save PID Gains (Primary) button to save the data.

Caution
PID values calculated by the Auto Tuning function are to be
implemented only after their suitability for the application has been
verified by the user. Incorrect PID numbers can result in poor system
performance or equipment damage.

DECS-450 Stability Tuning

14-4 9597100990

Figure 14-3. Auto Tuning Window

The File menu contains options for importing, exporting, and printing a graph (.gph) file.

FCR and FVR Modes

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Gain, FCR/FVR
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Gains, FCR Gains or FVR Gains
Stability tuning can be tailored for optimum performance when operating in field current regulation or field
voltage regulation mode. BESTCOMSPlus FCR stability settings and FVR stability settings are illustrated
in Figure 14-4.

FCR Mode Stability Settings

The DECS-450 bases its field current response upon the following settings.
The proportional gain (Kp) is multiplied by the error between the field current setpoint and the actual field
current value. Decreasing Kp reduces overshoot in the transient response. Increasing Kp speeds the
transient response.
The integral gain (Ki) is multiplied by the integral of the error between the current setpoint and the actual
field current value. Increasing Ki reduces the time to reach a steady state.
The derivative gain (Kd) is multiplied by the derivative of the error between the current setpoint and the
actual field current value. Increasing Kd reduces ringing in the transient response.
Additional FCR stability settings remove the noise effect on numerical differentiation (derivative time
constant Td) and set the voltage regulator gain level of the PID algorithm (Ka). Using the recommended Ka
value will per unitize the PID control loop, simplifying system modeling and validation.

Stability Tuning DECS-450

9597100990 14-5

FVR Mode Stability Settings

The DECS-450 bases its field voltage response upon the following settings.
The proportional gain (Kp) is multiplied by the error between the field voltage setpoint and the actual field
voltage value. Decreasing Kp reduces overshoot in the transient response. Increasing Kp speeds the
transient response.
The integral gain (Ki) is multiplied by the integral of the error between the voltage setpoint and the actual
field voltage value. Increasing Ki reduces the time to reach a steady state.
The derivative gain (Kd) is multiplied by the derivative of the error between the voltage setpoint and the
actual field voltage value. Increasing Kd reduces ringing in the transient response.
Additional FVR stability settings remove the noise effect on numerical differentiation (derivative time
constant Td) and set the voltage regulator gain level of the PID algorithm (Ka). Using the recommended Ka
value will per unitize the PID control loop, simplifying system modeling and validation.

Figure 14-4. FCR and FVR Gain Settings

Other Modes and Functions

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Gain, var, PF, OEL, UEL,
SCL, VAR Limiter
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Gains, Other Gains
Settings for stability tuning of the Var and Power Factor modes are provided in the DECS-450 along with
settings for stability tuning of limiters, the voltage matching function, and main field voltage response.
Figure 14-5 illustrates these settings as they appear in BESTCOMSPlus.

Var Mode
The integral gain (Ki) adjusts the Var mode integral gain which determines the characteristic of the DECS-
450 dynamic response to a changed var setpoint.
The loop gain (Kg) adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PI algorithm for var control.

Power Factor Mode

The integral gain (Ki) adjusts the integral gain which determines the characteristic of the DECS-450
dynamic response to a changed power factor setpoint.
The loop gain (Kg) adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PI algorithm for power factor control.

Overexcitation Limiter (OEL)

The integral gain (Ki) adjusts the rate at which the DECS-450 responds during an overexcitation
condition.

DECS-450 Stability Tuning

14-6 9597100990

The loop gain (Kg) adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PI algorithm for the overexcitation limiter
function.

Underexcitation Limiter (UEL)

The integral gain (Ki) adjusts the rate at which the DECS-450 responds during an underexcitation
condition.
The loop gain (Kg) adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PI algorithm for the underexcitation limiter
function.

Stator Current Limiter (SCL)

The integral gain (Ki) adjusts the rate at which the DECS-450 limits stator current.
The loop gain (Kg) adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PI algorithm for the stator current limiter
function.

Var Limiter
The integral gain (Ki) adjusts the rate at which the DECS-450 limits reactive power.
The loop gain (Kg) adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the reactive power limiter
function.

Voltage Matching
The loop gain (Kg) adjusts the rate at which the DECS-450 matches the generator voltage to the bus
voltage.

Figure 14-5. Other Mode and Function Gain Settings

Inner Loop Field Regulation

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Gain, Inner Loop Field
Regulator
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Gains, Inner Loop Field Regulator
When the inner control loop is enabled, the regulator response depends upon the AVR gains and inner
loop gains.
The Ki - Integral Gain setting adjusts the rate at which the DECS-450 responds to changes in the main
field voltage. The Kg - Loop Gain setting adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PI algorithm for the
inner loop field regulator. Figure 14-6 illustrates these settings as they appear in BESTCOMSPlus.

Stability Tuning DECS-450

9597100990 14-7

Figure 14-6. Inner Loop Field Regulator Gain Settings

Converting Gains from a DECS-400

A software tool is provided for converting DECS-400 gain values into equivalent DECS-450 gain values.
In BESTCOMSPlus, click Tools, Convert Gains to open the screen.

Note
The machine’s rated data settings must be programmed prior to converting
gains because the calculations depend on certain rated data parameters.
Refer to the Configuration section of this manual for information on rated data
settings.

Simply enter the DECS-400 gains into the appropriate fields in the DECS-400 column. Select whether
OEL Mode is Summing Point or Takeover. Click Convert to review the new gain values displayed in the
DECS-450 Equivalent column. The Apply Gain button automatically enters the new gain values into the
appropriate DECS-450 gain settings. Figure 14-7 illustrates these settings as they appear in
BESTCOMSPlus.

DECS-450 Stability Tuning

14-8 9597100990

Figure 14-7. Convert Gains Screen

Stability Tuning DECS-450

9597100990 15-1

15 • Mounting
When not shipped as part of assembled equipment, DECS-450 Digital Excitation Control Systems are
delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage. Upon receipt of a DECS-450, check the model
and style number against the requisition and packing list for agreement. Inspect for damage and, if there
is evidence of such, file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler Electric regional sales office, your
sales representative, or a sales representative at Basler Electric.
If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and dust-free
environment.

Mounting Considerations
Because the DECS-450 and Field Isolation Transducer are of solid-state design, they can be mounted at
any convenient angle in an environment where the temperature does not decrease below –40°C (–40°F)
or exceed 60°C (140°F).

DECS-450
An escutcheon plate is required for panel (or cubicle door) mounting. Overall dimensions for the DECS-
450 and escutcheon plate are shown in Figure 15-1. Figure 15-2 shows the panel cutting and drilling
dimensions for mounting a DECS-450 with the escutcheon plate.
Brackets are also available for mounting the DECS-450 in a 19-inch rack. Order part number 9365207030
(two brackets required).
A retrofit kit is available for installing a DECS-450 into a DECS-300 panel cutout. Order part number
9369707009.
The DECS-450 can be installed directly into a DECS-400 panel cutout and existing escutcheon.

Field Isolation Transducer

The Field Isolation Transducer is intended for surface mounting and no panel cutout is required. Figure
15-3 shows the Field Isolation Transducer dimensions and hole drilling locations.

Isolation Power Transformer

In applications where redundant control power is used, ac control power must be applied to the DECS-
450 through an isolation transformer. Basler Electric part number BE31449001 is recommended. Figure
15-4 illustrates the dimensions and mounting hole locations of part number BE31449001.

DECS-450 Mounting
15-2 9597100990

Figure 15-1. DECS-450 with Escutcheon Plate, Overall Dimensions

Mounting DECS-450
9597100990 15-3

Figure 15-2. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions

Figure 15-3. Field Isolation Transducer Dimensions

DECS-450 Mounting
15-4 9597100990

Figure 15-4. Isolation Transformer (BE31449001) Dimensions

Mounting DECS-450
9597100990 16-1

16 • Terminals and Connectors

This section describes the terminals and connectors of the DECS-450 and the Field Isolation Transducer.

DECS-450 Connections
DECS-450 terminals and connectors are located on the rear panel. DECS-450’s current sensing
transformer connections consist of screw terminals and the remaining connections have single-row,
multiple-pin headers that mate with removable connectors wired by the user. DECS-450 connectors vary
according to their function and the specified options.
Figure 16-1 illustrates the DECS-450 rear panel terminals and connectors. Locator letters in the
illustration correspond to the terminal block and connector descriptions in Table 16-1. The front-panel
USB port is illustrated and described in the Controls and Indicators section of this manual.

DECS-450 Terminals and Connectors

16-2 9597100990

Figure 16-1. Rear Panel Terminals and Connectors

Terminals and Connectors DECS-450

9597100990 16-3

Table 16-1. DECS-450 Rear Panel Terminal and Connector Descriptions

Locator Description
A Three terminal sets within this block include two CAN communication ports and an IRIG
input. Both CAN ports are SAE J1939 compliant. CAN 1 is used to communicate with add-
on modules such as the Basler Electric CEM-2020 and AEM-2020. CAN 2 is used to
communicate with an external controller. The IRIG terminals connect to an IRIG source for
synchronization of DECS-450 timekeeping.
B Contact inputs for the Start and Stop functions and programmable contact inputs 1 through
4 are applied to these terminals.
C Programmable contact inputs 5 through 10 are applied to these terminals.
D A portion of these terminal block pins accept connections for programmable contact inputs
11 through 14.
The remaining terminal block pins serve as connections for RS-485 communication.
E A second DECS-450 connects through a standard serial cable to this DB-9 connector for
external setpoint tracking.
F This DB-9 connector is provided for PROFIBUS communication (style XX1XXXX).
G Three-phase generator and bus sensing voltage, obtained from user-supplied voltage
transformers (VTs), connect to these terminals.
H A portion of this terminal block accepts an external analog control signal for auxiliary control
of the regulation setpoint. Terminals I+, I–, V+, and V– are used for external control of the
regulation setpoint with the SH terminal serving as a cable shield connection.
The remaining terminal block pins serve as connections for the Watchdog and
programmable relay outputs 1 through 4.
I Relay contact outputs for programmable relay outputs 4 through 11 connect to these
terminals.
J These terminals accept ac and dc control power to enable DECS-450 operation.
K This optional Ethernet communication port uses the Modbus TCP protocol to provide
remote metering, annunciation, and control. A copper (100BASE-TX) port (style XXXXXTX)
uses a standard RJ-45 jack (as shown) and a fiber optic (100BASE-FX) port (style
XXXXXFX) uses two fiber optic connectors.
L These terminals connect to user-supplied current transformers (CTs) providing three
phases of generator sensing current and a cross-current compensation signal.
M This 15-pin, D-type connector is provided for communication with the Field Isolation
Transducer.
N A portion of this terminal block provides outputs for the four programmable meter drivers.
The remaining terminal block pins supply analog excitation control output.

DECS-450 Wiring
All pluggable headers may have either spring or compression terminals, specified by style. Spring
terminals (style XXXXXXS) secure each wire with a spring-loaded contact. Compression terminals (style
XXXXXXC) secure each wire with a screw compression contact.
All headers accept a maximum wire size of 12 AWG with a recommended wire strip length of 0.4 inches
(10 mm). For compression terminals, the maximum screw torque is 5.3 in-lb (0.6 N•m). All headers are
keyed to help prevent misconnections.
Current sensing connections are made through #8 screw terminals (locator L in Figure 17-1) and accept a
maximum lug width of 0.32 inches (8.1 mm) and a maximum wire size of 14 AWG. The maximum screw
torque is 21 in-lb (2.4 N•m).

DECS-450 Terminals and Connectors

16-4 9597100990

Field Isolation Transducer Connections

Field Isolation Transducer connections consist of #6 screw terminals and a 15-pin, female, D-type
connector designated J1. Figure 16-2 illustrates the Field Isolation Transducer terminals.

Figure 16-2. Field Isolation Transducer Terminals and Connectors

Table 16-2. Field Isolation Transducer Terminal and Connector Descriptions

Locator Description
A GND: The GND terminal serves as the chassis ground connection. Be sure that the Field
Isolation Transducer is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG copper
wire attached to terminal GND.
SH+: Connects to positive output terminal of current shunt
–50: Connects to negative output terminal of 50 mVdc current shunt (if used)
–100: Connects to negative output terminal of 100 mVdc current shunt (if used)
B The field voltage sensing input accepts field voltage at one of five nominal levels. Terminal
sets are provided for a nominal field voltage of 63, 125, 250, 375, and 625 Vdc. Each
voltage input has a positive and negative terminal.
C Signal port connector J1 receives operating power from the DECS-450 and sends field
current and field voltage signals to the DECS-450. J1 connects to the DECS-450 Field
Isolation Transducer connector through a cable (Basler P/N 9372900021) supplied with the
DECS-450.

Field Isolation Transducer Wiring

All connections are made through #6 screw terminals and accept a maximum wire size of 12 AWG. The
recommended screw torque is 9 in-lb (1.01 N•m).

Terminals and Connectors DECS-450

9597100990 17-1

17 • Typical Connections
Typical connection diagrams are provided in this section as a guide when wiring the DECS-450 for
communication and sensing. For cross-current compensation connections, refer to the Voltage and
Current Sensing section in this manual.
Typical connections are shown in Figure 17-1. The “Machine” in Figure 17-1 represents a generator when
the DECS-450 is operating in generator mode and a motor when it is operating in motor mode. The
numbered note locators in Figure 17-1 correspond to the descriptions in Table 17-1.

Notes
• Current transformer (CT) grounding should be applied in
accordance with local codes and conventions.
• In this manual, CT terminals are shown with polarity designations
(+/–) and terminal numbers, however, physical DECS-450 CT
terminals are labeled with terminal numbers only.

DECS-450 contact inputs and outputs are shown in Figure 17-2.

Table 17-1. Typical Connection Drawing Notes

Locator Description
Generator voltage sensing input. Potential transformer required if line voltage exceeds
1
240 Vac.
Connections required only if voltage matching, sync-check, or auto synchronizer functions
2
are used.
See the Power Inputs or Specifications section for control power input ratings.
When redundant ac and dc control power is used, an isolation transformer must be
3
connected between the ac voltage source and the ac control power terminals of the
DECS-450.
If the DECS-450 is providing one end of the J1939 bus, a 120-ohm, 0.5-watt terminating
4 resistor must be installed across terminals 96 (H) and 97 (L) for CAN 1 and 99 (H) and 100
(L) for CAN 2.

DECS-450 Typical Connections

17-2 9597100990

Figure 17-1. Typical DECS-450 Connections

Typical Connections DECS-450

9597100990 17-3

Figure 17-2. DECS-450 Contact Inputs and Outputs

Installation for CE Compliant Systems

To meet EMC requirements for CE compliant systems, install the following:
• A Field Isolation Transducer (FIT) assembly (Basler P/N: 9372900104 or 9372900105)
• An FIT Cable (Basler P/N: 9372900021 [included with 9372900104 and -105] or 9372900022)
• A single ferrite bead around all control power wires near DECS-450 terminals 84 through 87
(Basler P/N: 37995, Fair Rite 0444164181)
• A single ferrite bead around both control output wires near DECS-450 terminals 116 and 117
(Basler P/N: 37995, Fair Rite 0444164181)
• If 100BASE-TX (copper) Ethernet is used, the Ethernet cable must be shielded.

DECS-450 Typical Connections

17-4 9597100990

Typical Connections DECS-450

9597100990 18-1

18 • BESTCOMSPlus® Software
General Description
BESTCOMSPlus® is a Windows®-based, PC application that provides a user-friendly, graphical user
interface (GUI) for use with Basler Electric communicating products. The name BESTCOMSPlus is an
acronym that stands for Basler Electric Software Tool for Communications, Operations, Maintenance, and
Settings.
BESTCOMSPlus provides the user with a point-and-click means to set and monitor the DECS-450. The
capabilities of BESTCOMSPlus make the configuration of one or more DECS-450 controllers fast and
efficient. A primary advantage of BESTCOMSPlus is that a settings scheme can be created, saved as a
file, and then uploaded to the DECS-450 when convenient.
BESTCOMSPlus uses plugins that enable the user to manage multiple Basler Electric products. The
DECS-450 plugin must be activated before use. The plugin is activated automatically by connecting to a
DECS-450. Manual activation is achieved by requesting an activation key from Basler Electric.
The DECS-450 plugin opens inside the BESTCOMSPlus main shell. The same default logic scheme that
is shipped with the DECS-450 is brought into BESTCOMSPlus by downloading settings and logic from
the DECS-450. This gives the user the option of developing a custom setting file by modifying the default
logic scheme or by building a unique scheme from scratch.
BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic is used to program DECS-450 logic for protection elements,
inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. Simply drag and drop elements, components, inputs, and outputs onto the
program grid and draw connections between them to create the desired logic scheme.
BESTCOMSPlus also allows for downloading industry-standard COMTRADE files for analysis of stored
oscillography data. Detailed analysis of the oscillography files can be accomplished using BESTwave™
software.
Figure 18-1 illustrates the typical user interface components of the DECS-450 plugin with
BESTCOMSPlus.

Figure 18-1. Typical User Interface Components

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus® Software
18-2 9597100990

Installation
BESTCOMSPlus® software is built on the Microsoft® .NET Framework. The setup utility that installs
BESTCOMSPlus on your PC also installs the DECS-450 plugin and the required version of .NET
Framework (if not already installed). BESTCOMSPlus operates with systems using Windows® 7 SP1,
Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 version 1607 (Anniversary Update) or later. Microsoft Internet Explorer
5.01 or later must be installed on your PC before installing BESTCOMSPlus. System recommendations
for the .NET Framework and BESTCOMSPlus are listed in Table 18-1.
Table 18-1. System Recommendations for BESTCOMSPlus and the .NET Framework
System Type Component Recommendation
32/64 bit Processor 2.0 GHz
32/64 bit RAM 1 GB minimum, 2 GB recommended
200 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC.)
32 bit Hard Drive
4.5 GB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC.)
200 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC.)
64 bit Hard Drive
4.5 GB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC.)

To install and run BESTCOMSPlus, a Windows user must have Administrator rights. A Windows user with
limited rights may not be permitted to save files in certain folders.

Install BESTCOMSPlus®

Warning
Do not connect a USB cable until setup completes successfully.
Connecting a USB cable before setup is complete may result in
unwanted or unexpected errors.

1. Insert the BESTCOMSPlus CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.

2. When the BESTCOMSPlus Setup and Documentation CD menu appears, click the Install button for
the BESTCOMSPlus application. The setup utility installs BESTCOMSPlus, the .NET Framework (if
not already installed), the USB driver, and the DECS-450 plugin for BESTCOMSPlus on your PC.
After successful installation, BESTCOMSPlus shortcuts are located in the Windows Start menu.

Activation of the DECS-450 Plugin for BESTCOMSPlus®

The DECS-450 plugin is a module that runs inside the BESTCOMSPlus shell and it contains specific
operational and logic settings for the DECS-450. Uploading settings to the DECS-450 is possible only
after activating the DECS-450 plugin.
The DECS-450 plugin can be activated automatically or manually. Automatic activation is achieved by
using a USB cable to establish communication between the DECS-450 and BESTCOMSPlus. Manual
activation is initiated by contacting Basler Electric for an activation key and entering the key into
BESTCOMSPlus. Manual activation is useful if you want to create a settings file prior to receiving your
digital excitation system. Note that if a DECS-450 is not connected, you will not be able to configure
certain Ethernet settings. Ethernet settings can be changed only when an active USB or Ethernet
connection is present. Refer to Manual Activation of DECS-450 Plugin.

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DECS-450

9597100990 18-3

Connect a USB Cable

The USB driver was copied to your PC during BESTCOMSPlus® installation and is installed automatically
after connecting to the DECS-450. USB driver installation progress is shown in the Windows Taskbar
area. Windows will notify you when installation is complete.

Note
In some instances, the Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you for the
USB driver. If this happens, direct the wizard to the following folder:
C:\Program Files\Basler Electric\USB Device Drivers\

If the USB driver does not install properly, refer to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section for a
troubleshooting procedure.
Connect a USB cable between the PC and your DECS-450. Apply control power to the DECS-450 and
wait until the boot sequence is complete.

Start BESTCOMSPlus® and Activate DECS-450 Plugin Automatically

To start BESTCOMSPlus, click the Start button, point to Programs, Basler Electric, and then click the
BESTCOMSPlus icon. During initial startup, the BESTCOMSPlus Select Language screen is displayed
(Figure 18-2). You can choose to have this screen displayed each time BESTCOMSPlus is started, or you
can select a preferred language and this screen will be bypassed in the future. Click OK to continue. This
screen can be accessed later by selecting Tools and Select Language from the menu bar.

Figure 18-2. BESTCOMSPlus Select Language Screen

®
The BESTCOMSPlus platform window opens. Select New Connection from the Communication pull-
down menu and select DECS-450. See Figure 18-3. The DECS-450 plugin is activated automatically after
connecting to a DECS-450.

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus® Software

18-4 9597100990

Figure 18-3. Communication Pull-Down Menu

The DECS-450 Connection screen shown in Figure 18-4 appears. Select USB Connection and click
Connect.

Figure 18-4. DECS-450 Connection Screen

The DECS-450 plugin opens indicating that activation was successful. You can now configure the DECS-
450 communication ports and other DECS-450 settings.

Manual Activation of the DECS-450 Plugin

Manual activation of the DECS-450 plugin is required only if your initial use of BESTCOMSPlus® will be
on a PC that is not connected to a DECS-450. Manual activation is described in the following paragraphs.

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DECS-450

9597100990 18-5

Requesting an Activation Key

When initially running the DECS-450 plugin, the Device Plugin Requires Activation dialog box appears.
You must obtain an activation key from Basler Electric before you can activate the DECS-450 plugin. You
may request an activation key through email or the Basler Electric website. Click the Activate button when
you are ready to enter the activation key you received from Basler Electric.

Entering an Activation Key

With a valid activation key, run the DECS-450 plugin or click Tools, Activate Device. The Activate Device
Plugin pop-up appears (Figure 18-5).

Figure 18-5. Activate Device Plugin Screen

On the Activate Device Plugin screen, select DECS-450 from the Device list. Enter your Email Address
and Activation Key provided by Basler Electric. If you received an email containing the Activation Key,
you can select all of the text in the email and copy it to the Windows clipboard. The Get Data button
extracts the Device, Email Address, and Activation Key from the Windows clipboard and pastes them into
the appropriate fields. Click the Activate button to continue.

Establishing Communication
Communication between BESTCOMSPlus and the DECS-450 is established by clicking the Connect
button on the DECS-450 Connection screen (see Figure 18-4) or by clicking the Connect button on the
lower menu bar of the main BESTCOMSPlus screen (Figure 18-1). If you receive an “Unable to Connect
to Device” error message, verify that communications are configured properly. Only one Ethernet
connection is allowed at one time. Download all settings and logic from the device by selecting Download
Settings and Logic from the Communication pull-down menu. BESTCOMSPlus will read all settings and
logic from the DECS-450 and load them into BESTCOMSPlus memory.

Menu Bars
The menu bars are located near the top of the BESTCOMSPlus® screen (see Figure 18-1). The upper
menu bar has five pull-down menus. With the upper menu bar, it is possible to manage settings files,
configure communication settings, upload and download settings and security files, and compare settings
files. The lower menu bar consists of clickable icons. The lower menu bar is used to change
BESTCOMSPlus views, open a settings file, connect/disconnect, preview metering printout, switch to live
mode, and send settings after a change is made when not in live mode.

Upper Menu Bar (BESTCOMSPlus® Shell)

Upper menu bar functions are listed and described in Table 18-2.
DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus® Software
18-6 9597100990

Table 18-2. Upper Menu Bar (BESTCOMSPlus® Shell)

Menu Item Description
File
New Create a new settings file
Open Open an existing settings file
Open File As Text Generic file viewer for *.csv, *,txt, etc. files
Close Close settings file
Save Save settings file
Save As Save settings file with a different name
Export To File Save settings as a *.csv file
Print Open the print menu
Properties View properties of a settings file
History View history of a settings file
Recent Files Open a previously opened file
Exit Close BESTCOMSPlus program
Communication
New Connection Choose new device or DECS-450
Close Connection Close communication between BESTCOMSPlus and DECS-450
Download Settings and Logic Download operational and logic settings from the device
from Device
Upload Settings and Logic to Upload operational and logic settings to the device
Device
Upload Settings to Device Upload operational settings to the device
Upload Logic to Device Upload logic settings to the device
Download Security from Device Download security settings from the device
Upload Security to Device Upload security settings to the device
Configure Ethernet settings
Upload Device Files Upload firmware to the device
Tools
Check for Updates Check for BESTCOMSPlus® updates via the internet
Select Language Select BESTCOMSPlus language
Activate Device Activate the DECS-450 plugin
Set File Password Password protect a settings file
Compare Settings Files Compare two settings files
Auto Export Metering Exports metering data on a user-defined interval
Convert Gains Converts DECS-400 AVR Kg gain value for use in the DECS-450. Refer
to the Stability Tuning section for details.
Event Log - View View the BESTCOMSPlus event log
Event Log - Verbose Logging Enable/disable verbose logging
Event Log - Verbose Enable/disable verbose communication logging
Communication Logging
Generate Certificate Generate a certificate (not applicable to DECS-450)
Accepted Devices View and delete accepted devices (not applicable to DECS-450)
Window
Cascade All Cascade all windows
Tile Tile horizontally or vertically
Maximize All Maximize all windows

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DECS-450

9597100990 18-7

Menu Item Description

Help
Check for Updates Check for BESTCOMSPlus® updates via the internet
Check for Update Settings Enable or change automatic checking for update
About View general, detailed build, and system information

Lower Menu Bar (DECS-450 Plugin)

Lower menu bar functions are listed and described in Table 18-3.
Table 18-3. Lower Menu Bar (DECS-450 Plugin)

Menu Button Description

View Enables you to view the Metering Panel, Settings Panel, or Show Settings
Information. Opens and saves workspaces. Customized workspaces make
switching between tasks easier and more efficient.

Open File Opens a saved settings file.

Connect/Disconnect Opens the DECS-450 Connection screen, which enables you to connect to the
DECS-450 via USB or Ethernet. Also used to disconnect a connected
DECS-450.

Preview Metering Displays the Print Preview screen where a preview of the Metering printout is
shown. Click on the printer button to send to a printer.

Export Metering Enables all metering values to be exported into a *.csv file.

Options Displays a drop-down list entitled Live Mode Settings, which enables Live
mode where settings are automatically sent to the device in real time as they
are changed.

Send Settings Sends settings to the DECS-450 when BESTCOMSPlus is not operating in
Live Mode. Click on this button after making a setting change to send the
modified setting to the DECS-450.

Settings Explorer
The Settings Explorer is a convenient tool within BESTCOMSPlus® used to navigate through the various
settings screens of the DECS-450 plugin. Descriptions of these configuration settings are organized as
follows:
• General Settings
• Communications
• System Parameters
• Report Configuration
• Operating Settings
• PSS
• Synchronizer/Voltage Matching
• Protection
• Programmable Inputs
• Programmable Outputs
• Alarm Configuration
• BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic
Logic setup will be necessary after making certain setting changes. For more information, refer to the
BESTlogicPlus chapter.

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus® Software

18-8 9597100990

Settings Entry
When entering settings in BESTCOMSPlus, each setting is validated against prescribed limits. Entered
settings that do not conform to the prescribed limits are accepted but flagged as noncompliant. Figure
18-6 illustrates an example of flagged, noncompliant settings (locator A) and the Setting Validation
window (locator B) used to diagnose faulty settings.

Figure 18-6. Flagged, Noncompliant Settings and the Seting Validation Window
The Setting Validation window, viewed by selecting the Setting Validation tab (locator C), displays three
types of annunciations: errors, warnings, and messages. An error describes a problem such as a setting
that is out of range. A warning describes a condition where supporting settings are invalid, causing other
settings to be noncompliant with the prescribed limits. A message describes a minor setting issue that
was automatically resolved by BESTCOMSPlus. An example of a condition triggering a message is entry
of a settings value with a resolution that exceeds the limit imposed by BESTCOMSPlus. In this situation,
the value is automatically rounded and a message is triggered. Each annunciation lists a hyperlinked
name for the noncompliant setting and an error message describing the issue. Clicking the hyperlinked
setting name takes you to the setting screen with the offending setting. Right-clicking the hyperlinked
setting name will restore the setting to its default value.

Note
It is possible to save a DECS-450 settings file in BESTCOMSPlus with
noncompliant settings. However, it is not possible to upload
noncompliant settings to the DECS-450.

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DECS-450

9597100990 18-9

Metering Explorer
The Metering Explorer is used to view real-time system data including generator voltages and currents,
input/output status, alarms, reports, and other parameters. Refer to the Metering section for more
information about the Metering Explorer.

Settings File Management

A settings file contains all DECS-450 settings and logic and its file extension is “bst4”.
It is possible to save only the DECS-450 logic displayed on the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic
screen as a separate logic library file. This is helpful when similar logic is required for multiple DECS-450
systems. The file extension of a logic file created in BESTCOMSPlus is “bsl4”.
It is important to note that settings and logic can be uploaded to the device separately or together, but are
always downloaded together. For more information on logic files, refer to the BESTlogicPlus section.

Opening a Settings File

To open a DECS-450 settings file with BESTCOMSPlus, click the File menu and choose Open. The Open
dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to use normal Windows techniques to select the file that
you want to open. Select the file and choose Open. You can also open a file by clicking on the Open File
button on the lower menu bar. If connected to a device, you will be asked to upload the settings and logic
from the file to the current device. If you choose Yes, the settings displayed in BESTCOMSPlus instance
will be overwritten with the settings of the opened file.

Saving a Settings File

Select Save or Save As from the File pull-down menu. A dialog box pops up allowing you to enter a
filename and location to save the file. Select the Save button to complete the save.

Upload Settings and/or Logic to Device

To upload a settings file to the DECS-450, open the file or create a new file through BESTCOMSPlus.
Then pull down the Communication menu and select Upload Settings and Logic to Device. If you want to
upload operational settings without logic, select Upload Settings to Device. If you want to upload logic
without operational settings, select Upload Logic to Device. You are prompted to enter the username and
password. The default username is “A” and the default password is “A”. If the username and password
are correct, the upload begins and the progress bar is shown.

Download Settings and Logic from Device

To download settings and logic from the DECS-450, pull down the Communication menu and select
Download Settings and Logic from Device. If the settings in BESTCOMSPlus® have changed, a dialog
box will open asking if you want to save the current settings changes. You can choose Yes or No. After
you have taken the required action to save or discard the current settings, downloading begins.
BESTCOMSPlus reads all settings and logic from the DECS-450 and loads them into BESTCOMSPlus
memory.

Printing a Settings File

To view a preview of the settings printout, select Print from the File pull-down menu. To print the settings,
select the printer icon in the upper left corner of the Print Preview screen.

Comparing Settings Files

BESTCOMSPlus has the ability to compare two settings files. To compare files, pull down the Tools menu
and select Compare Settings Files. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Compare Setup dialog box appears
(Figure 18-7). Select the location of the first file under Left Settings Source and select the location of the
second file under Right Settings Source. If you are comparing a settings file located on your PC hard

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus® Software

18-10 9597100990

drive or portable media, click the folder button and navigate to the file. If you want to compare settings
downloaded from a unit, click the Select Unit button to set up the communication port. Click the Compare
button to compare the selected settings files.

Figure 18-7. BESTCOMSPlus Settings Compare Setup

A dialog box will appear and notify you if any differences were found. The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings
Compare dialog box (Figure 18-8) is displayed where you can view all settings (Show All Settings), view
only the differences (Show Settings Differences), view all logic (Show All Logic Paths), or view only logic
differences (Show Logic Path Differences). Select Close when finished.

Figure 18-8. BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Compare

Automatic Metering Export

The auto export metering function automatically exports metering data over a user-defined period when a
DECS-450 connection is active. The user specifies the Number of Exports and the Interval between each

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DECS-450

9597100990 18-11

export. Enter a filename for the metering data and a folder in which to save. The first export is performed
immediately after clicking the Start button. Click the Filter button to select specific metering screens.
Figure 18-9 illustrates the Auto Export Metering screen.

Figure 18-9. Auto Export Metering Screen

Firmware Updates
Future enhancements to the DECS-450 functionality may require a firmware update. Because default
settings are loaded when DECS-450 firmware is updated, your settings should be saved in a file prior to
upgrading firmware.

Warning!

Before performing any maintenance procedures, remove the DECS-

450 from service. Refer to the appropriate site schematics to ensure
that all steps have been taken to properly and completely de-energize
the DECS-450.

Caution – Settings will be lost!

Default settings will be loaded into the DECS-450, reports and events
will be cleared, and the DECS-450 will reboot when firmware is
updated. BESTCOMSPlus® can be used to download settings and
save the settings in a file so that they can be restored after updating
firmware. Refer to Settings File Management for help with saving a
settings file.

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus® Software

18-12 9597100990

Note
The latest version of BESTCOMSPlus software should be downloaded
from the Basler Electric website and installed before performing a
firmware upgrade.

A device package contains firmware for the DECS-450, the optional Contact Expansion Module (CEM-
2020), and the optional Analog Expansion Module (AEM-2020). Embedded firmware is the operating
program that controls the actions of the DECS-450. The DECS-450 stores firmware in nonvolatile flash
memory that can be reprogrammed through the communication ports. It is not necessary to replace
EPROM chips when updating the firmware with a newer version.
The DECS-450 can be used in conjunction with CEM-2020 or AEM-2020 expansion modules which
expand the DECS-450 capabilities. When upgrading the firmware in any component of this system, the
firmware in ALL of the components of the system should be upgraded to ensure compatibility of
communications between the components.

Caution
The order in which the components are upgraded is critical.
Expansion modules must be upgraded before the DECS-450. This
is necessary because the DECS-450 must be able to communicate
with the expansion modules in order send firmware to them. If the
DECS-450 is upgraded first, and the new firmware included a change
to the expansion module communication protocol, it is possible that
the expansion modules could no longer communicate with the
upgraded DECS-450. Without communications between the
DECS-450 and the expansion modules, upgrading the expansion
modules is not possible.

Note
If power is lost or communication is interrupted during file transfer to
the DECS-450, the firmware upload will fail. The device will continue
to use the previous firmware. Once communication has been restored,
the user must start the firmware upload again. Select Upload Device
Files from the Communication pull-down menu and proceed normally.

Upgrading Firmware in Expansion Modules

The following procedure is used to upgrade firmware in the expansion modules. This must be completed
before upgrading firmware in the DECS-450. If no expansion module is present, proceed to Upgrading
Firmware in the DECS-450.
1. Remove the DECS-450 from service. Refer to the appropriate site schematics to ensure that all
steps have been taken to properly and completely de-energize the DECS-450.
2. Apply control power to the DECS-450.
3. Enable the expansion modules that are present in the system. If they have not already been
enabled, enable the expansion modules in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer,
Communications, CAN Bus, Remote Module Setup screen.
4. Verify that the DECS-450 and the associated expansion modules are communicating. This can
be verified by examining the alarm status using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus or from
the front panel by navigating to Metering > Status > Alarms. When communications are
functioning properly, there should be no active AEM or CEM Communications Failure alarms.
5. Connect to the DECS-450 through the USB or Ethernet port if not already connected.
BESTCOMSPlus® Software DECS-450
9597100990 18-13

6. Select Upload Device Files from the Communication pull-down menu.

7. You will be asked to save the current settings file. Select Yes or No.
8. When the Basler Electric Device Package Uploader screen (Figure 18-10) appears, click on the
Open button to browse for the device package you have received from Basler Electric. The
Package Files along with File Details are listed. Place a check in the boxes next to the individual
files you want to upload.

Figure 18-10. Basler Electric Device Package Uploader

9. Click on the Upload button and the Proceed with Device Upload screen will appear. Select Yes or
No.
10. After selecting Yes, the DECS-450 Selection screen will appear. Select either USB or Ethernet.
11. After file(s) have been uploaded, click the Close button on the Basler Electric Device Package
Uploader screen and disconnect communication to the DECS-450.

Upgrading Firmware in the DECS-450

The following procedure is used to upgrade firmware in the DECS-450. This must be completed after
upgrading firmware in any expansion modules.
1. Remove the DECS-450 from service. Refer to the appropriate site schematics to ensure that all
steps have been taken to properly and completely de-energize the DECS-450.
2. Apply control power to the DECS-450.
3. Connect to the DECS-450 with BESTCOMSPlus. Check the firmware Application Version on the
General Settings > Device Info screen.
4. Select Upload Device Files from the Communication pull-down menu. You do not have to be
connected to the DECS-450 at this time. Save settings when prompted, if desired.
5. Open the desired device package file (decs450.bef).
6. Check the box for DECS-450 Firmware. Note the version number of the DECS-450 firmware; this
is the version that will be used to set the Application Version in the settings file in a later step.
7. Click the Upload button and follow the instructions that appear to begin the upgrade process.
8. After the upload is complete, disconnect communication to the DECS-450.
9. Load the saved settings file into the DECS-450.

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus® Software

18-14 9597100990

a. Close all settings files.

b. From the File pull-down menu, select New, DECS-450.
c. Connect to the DECS-450.
d. Once all settings have been read from the DECS-450, open the saved settings file by
selecting File, Open File in the BESTCOMSPlus menu. Then browse for the file to
upload.
e. When BESTCOMSPlus asks if you wish to upload settings and logic to the device, click
Yes.
f. If you are receiving upload failures and indications that the logic is incompatible with the
firmware version, check that the DECS-450 style number in the saved file matches that of
the DECS-450 into which the file is being uploaded. The style number in the settings file
is found under General Settings > Style Number in BESTCOMSPlus.
g. If the style number of the settings file does not match that of the DECS-450 into which it
is to be loaded, disconnect from the DECS-450, then modify the style number in the
settings file. Then repeat the steps titled Load the Saved Settings File into the DECS-
450.

BESTCOMSPlus® Updates
Enhancements to DECS-450 firmware typically coincide with enhancements to the DECS-450 plugin for
BESTCOMSPlus®. When a DECS-450 is updated with the latest version of firmware, the latest version of
BESTCOMSPlus should also be obtained.
• If you received a CD-ROM containing a firmware update from Basler Electric, then that CD-ROM
will also contain the corresponding version of BESTCOMSPlus software.
• You can download the latest version of BESTCOMSPlus at www.basler.com.
• BESTCOMSPlus automatically checks for updates when enabled. To enable, click Help, then
Check for Update Settings. When the dialog opens, click the Check Automatically box and Save.
(An internet connection is required.)
• You can use the manual “check for updates” function in BESTCOMSPlus to ensure that the latest
version is installed by selecting Check for Updates in the Help menu. (An internet connection is
required.)

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DECS-450

9597100990 19-1

19 • BESTlogic™Plus
Introduction
BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic is a programming method used for managing the input, output,
protection, control, monitoring, and reporting capabilities of Basler Electric's DECS-450 Digital Excitation
Control System. Each DECS-450 has multiple, self-contained logic blocks that have all of the inputs and
outputs of its discrete component counterpart. Each independent logic block interacts with control inputs
and hardware outputs based on logic variables defined in equation form with BESTlogicPlus.
BESTlogicPlus equations entered and saved in the DECS-450 system's nonvolatile memory integrate
(electronically wire) the selected or enabled protection and control blocks with control inputs and
hardware outputs. A group of logic equations defining the logic of the DECS-450 is called a logic scheme.
Two default active logic schemes are preloaded into the DECS-450. One default logic scheme is tailored
for a system with the PSS option disabled and the other is for a system with PSS enabled. The proper
default logic scheme is loaded depending on the PSS option selected in the system style number. These
schemes are configured for a typical protection and control application of a synchronous generator and
virtually eliminate the need for "start-from-scratch" programming. BESTCOMSPlus® can be used to open
a logic scheme that was previously saved as a file and upload it to the DECS-450. The default logic
schemes can also be customized to suit your application. Detailed information about logic schemes is
provided later in this section.
BESTlogicPlus is not used to define the operating settings (modes, pickup thresholds, and time delays) of
the individual protection and control functions. Operating settings and logic settings are interdependent
but separately programmed functions. Changing logic settings is similar to rewiring a panel and is
separate and distinct from making the operating settings that control the pickup thresholds and time
delays of a DECS-450. Detailed information about operating settings is provided in other sections of this
instruction manual.

Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices. Nonvolatile
memory is used to store information (such as settings) that needs to be
preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise restarted.
Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a physical limit on the
number of times they can be erased and written. In this product, the limit is
100,000 erase/write cycles. During product application, consideration should
be given to communications, logic, and other factors that may cause
frequent/repeated writes of settings or other information that is retained by the
product. Applications that result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce
the useable product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.

Overview of BESTlogic™Plus
Use BESTCOMSPlus to make BESTlogicPlus settings. Use the Settings Explorer to open the
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic tree branch as shown in Figure 19-1.
The BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic screen contains a logic library for opening and saving logic files,
tools for creating and editing logic documents, and protection settings.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-2 9597100990

Figure 19-1. BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic Tree Branch

BESTlogic™Plus Composition
There are three main groups of objects used for programming BESTlogicPlus. These groups are I/O,
Components, and Elements. For details on how these objects are used to program BESTlogicPlus, see
the paragraphs on Programming BESTlogicPlus.

I/O
This group contains Input Objects, Output Objects, Off-Page Objects, and Alarms. Table 19-1 lists the
names and descriptions of the objects in the I/O group.
Table 19-1. I/O Group, Names and Descriptions
Name Description Symbol
Input Objects
Logic 0 Always false (Low).

Logic 1 Always true (High).

Status, Front Panel Buttons

Down Button True while the front panel Down
arrow button is pressed.

Edit Button True while the front panel Edit

button is pressed.

Left Button True while the front panel Left

arrow button is pressed.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-3

Name Description Symbol

Reset Button True while the front panel Reset
button is pressed.

Right Button True while the front panel Right

arrow button is pressed.

Up Button True while the front panel Up arrow

button is pressed.

Physical Inputs
Start Input True when the physical Start input
is active.

Stop Input True when the physical Stop input

is active.

IN1 - IN14 True when Physical Input x is

active.

Remote Inputs
IN15 - IN24 True when Remote Input x is
active.
(Available when an optional CEM-
2020 is connected.)
Virtual Inputs
VIN1 - VIN6 True when Virtual Input x is active.

Status Inputs
Anticipatory Sync True when Anticipatory is selected.
Selected (Synchronizer screen)

Auto Mode Active True when the unit is in Auto mode

(AVR).

Auto Sync True when DECS auto-sync is

Enabled enabled.

Bus Dead True when the Bus Dead condition

settings have been exceeded.

Bus Failed True when the Bus Stable condition

settings are not met.

Bus Stable True when the Bus Stable condition

settings have been exceeded.

Control Power True when the DECS-450 power

Input Failure supply is lost.

Crowbar Activated True when the CROWBARSTATUS

logic element has a true input.

Dead Bus Close True when this option is user-

Request enabled; a dead bus is closed
automatically upon detection. False
when this option is disabled; a dead
bus will remain open.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-4 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

External Tracking True when external tracking is
Active running.

Failed To Buildup True when the Failed to Buildup

alarm is active.

FCR Active True when the unit is in FCR mode.

Field Flash Active True when field flash is active.

Field Short Circuit True when a field short circuit

Status condition is detected.

FVR Active True when the unit is in FVR mode.

Gen Breaker Fail The generator breaker did not close

to Close in the close wait time period.

Gen Breaker Fail The generator breaker did not open

to Open in the close wait time period.

Gen Breaker Sync True when generator breaker sync

Fail has failed.

Gen Dead True when the Generator Breaker

Dead condition settings have been
exceeded.
Gen Failed True when the Generator Breaker
Stable condition settings are not
met.
Gen Stable True when the Generator Breaker
Stable condition settings have been
exceeded.
GOV Contact Type True when this option is selected.
Proportional (Governor Bias Control Settings
screen)
Inner Loop Field True when the inner loop field
Regulator Active regulator is active.

Internal Tracking True when internal tracking is

Active running.

IRIG Sync Lost True when IRIG signal is not being

received.

KW Threshold True when kW output is below the

standard (non-Grid Code) PF
Active Power Level.
Manual Mode True when the unit is in Manual
Active mode (FCR/FVR).

Network Load True when network load sharing is

Share Active active.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-5

Name Description Symbol

Network Load True when the unit’s configuration
Share Config does not match the configuration of
Mismatch the other units with load sharing
enabled.
Network Load True when any of the load sharing
Share ID Missing enabled units are not detected on
the network.
Network Load True when data is being received
Share Receiving from a specific unit on the load
ID 1 - 16 share network.
Network Load This element functions in
Share Status 1-4 conjunction with the Network Load
Share Broadcast elements on all
units on the network. True when the
corresponding Network Load Share
Broadcast element input is true on
another unit on the network.
No Network Load True when Network Load Sharing is
Share Data enabled but there is no data being
Received received from other network load
sharing devices.
NTP Sync Lost True when NTP server has lost
communications.

Null Balance True when Null Balance is achieved

in both external and internal
tracking.
OEL True when the Overexcitation
Limiter is active.

PF Controller True when the unit is in PF mode.

Active

PLL Sync Selected True when phase locked loop (PLL)

is selected. (Synchronizer screen)

Preposition Active True when any preposition is

active.

Preposition 1 True when Preposition 1 is active.

Active

Preposition 2 True when Preposition 2 is active.

Active

Preposition 3 True when Preposition 3 is active.

Active

PSS Active True when the power system

(Optional) stabilizer (PSS) is turned on and
running.
PSS Current True when the phase current is
Unbalanced unbalanced and the PSS is active.
(Optional)
PSS Power Below True when the input power is below
Threshold the Power Level threshold and the
(Optional) PSS is active.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-6 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

PSS Secondary True when the PSS is using
Group Active secondary settings.
(Optional)
PSS Speed Failed True when the frequency is out of
(Optional) range for a length of time calculated
internally by the DECS-450 and the
PSS is active.
PSS Test On True when the power system
(Optional) stabilizer test signal (Frequency
Response) is active.
PSS Voltage Limit True when the calculated terminal
(Optional) voltage upper or lower limit is
reached and the PSS is active.
PSS Voltage True when the phase voltage is
Unbalanced unbalanced and the PSS is active.
(Optional)
SCL True when the Stator Current
Limiter is active.

Setpoint at Lower True when the active mode’s

Limit setpoint is at the lower limit.

Setpoint at Upper True when the active mode’s

Limit setpoint is at the upper limit.

Soft Start Active True during softstart.

Start Status True when the unit is in Start mode.

Sync Active True when synchronization is

active.

Transfer True when watchdog has timed out

Watchdog and system control will switch to an
alternate redundant DECS-450.
Transient Boost True when transient boost is active.
Active

UEL True when the Under Excitation

Limiter is active.

Under Frequency True when the Under Frequency or

V/Hz the Volts/Hz Limiter is active.

Unknown Network True when there is another unit on

Load Share the network whose load share
Protocol Version protocol version is not the same as
this units load share protocol
version.
Var Controller True when the unit is in VAR mode.
Active

Var Limiter Active True when the Var Limiter is active.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-7

Name Description Symbol

Voltage Matching True when Voltage Matching is
Active active.

Status, Protection
24 Pickup True when this protective element
has picked up.

24 Trip True when this protective element

has tripped.

25-1 Status True when the conditions for

synchronization are met.

27 Pickup True when this protective element

has picked up.

27 Trip True when this protective element

has tripped.

32R Pickup True when this protective element

has picked up.

32R Trip True when this protective element

has tripped.

40Q Pickup True when this protective element

has picked up.

40Q Trip True when this protective element

has tripped.

59 Overvoltage True when this protective element

Pickup has picked up.

59 Overvoltage True when this protective element

Trip has tripped.

81 Overfrequency True when this protective element

Pickup has picked up.

81 Overfrequency True when this protective element

Trip has tripped.

81 True when this protective element

Underfrequency has picked up.
Pickup
81 True when this protective element
Underfrequency has tripped.
Trip
Exciter Open True when this protective element
Diode Pickup has picked up.

Exciter Open True when this protective element

Diode Trip has tripped.

Exciter Shorted True when this protective element

Diode Pickup has picked up.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-8 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

Exciter Shorted True when this protective element
Diode Trip has tripped.

Field Overcurrent True when this protective element

Pickup has picked up.

Field Overcurrent True when this protective element

Trip has tripped.

Field True when this protective element

Overtemperature has picked up.
Pickup
Field True when this protective element
Overtemperature has tripped.
Trip
Field Overvoltage True when this protective element
Pickup has picked up.

Field Overvoltage True when this protective element

Trip has tripped.

Gen Below 10 Hz True when this protective element

Pickup has picked up.

Gen Below 10 Hz True when this protective element

Trip has tripped.

Loss of Field True when this protective element

Isolation has picked up.
Transducer Pickup
Loss of Field True when this protective element
Isolation has tripped.
Transducer Trip
Loss of Sensing True when this protective element
Pickup has picked up.

Loss of Sensing True when this protective element

Trip has tripped.

Status, Configurable Protection

Configurable There are four thresholds for each
Protection 1-8 of the eight Configurable Protection
blocks. Each threshold can be set
to Over or Under mode and the
threshold limit and activation delay
can each be set. See the Protection
section in this manual for more
details. Each threshold has a
separate logic block for the pickup
and the trip. Configurable
Protection #1 with its Threshold #1
Pickup and Trip blocks is shown to
the right. The pickup block is true
when the threshold is exceeded.
The trip block is true when the
corresponding pickup block
threshold is exceeded for the
duration of the time delay.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-9

Name Description Symbol

Status, Contact Expansion Module
Contact Expansion Contact Expansion Module
Module Connected Connected. True when an optional
CEM-2020 is connected to the
DECS-450.
Contact Expansion True when there is no
Module Comms communication from the CEM.
Failure
Contact Expansion True when more than one CEM is
Module Duplicate detected. Only one CEM is
CEM supported at a time.
Contact Expansion True when selected CEM type
Module Hardware differs from detected CEM type. Go
Mismatch to Settings Explorer,
Communications, CAN Bus,
Remote Module Setup to select the
CEM type (18 or 24 contacts).
Status, Analog Expansion Module
Analog Expansion Analog Expansion Module
Module Connected Connected. True when an optional
AEM-2020 is connected to the
DECS-450.
Analog Expansion True when there is no
Module Comms communication from the AEM.
Failure
Analog Expansion True when more than one AEM is
Module Duplicate detected. Only one AEM is
AEM supported at a time.
Analog Expansion There are four thresholds for each
Module, of the eight Remote Analog Input
Remote Analog blocks. Each threshold has a
Inputs 1-8 separate logic block for the pickup
and the trip. Remote Analog Input
#1 with its Threshold #1 Pickup and
Trip blocks is shown to the right.
For more details on configuring the
Remote Analog Inputs, see the
Analog Expansion Module section
in this manual. The pickup block is
true when the threshold is
exceeded. The trip block is true
when the corresponding pickup
block threshold is exceeded for the
duration of the time delay.

Analog Expansion Each Remote Analog Input has one

Module Out of Range Block. True when
parameters exceed out of range
Remote Analog threshold. This function alerts the
Inputs, Out of user of an open or damaged analog
Range 1-8 input wire.
Analog Expansion True when the analog output
Module connection is open.
Remote Analog
Outputs 1-4

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-10 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

Analog Expansion There are four thresholds for each
Module of the eight Remote RTD Input
Remote RTD blocks. Each threshold has a
Inputs 1-8 separate logic block for the pickup
and the trip. Remote RTD Input #1
with its Threshold #1 Pickup and
Trip blocks is shown to the right.
For more details on configuring the
Remote RTD Inputs, see the
Analog Expansion Module section
in this manual. The pickup block is
true when the threshold is
exceeded. The trip block is true
when the corresponding pickup
block threshold is exceeded for the
duration of the time delay.

Analog Expansion Each Remote RTD Input has one

Module Out of Range Block. True when
parameters exceed out of range
Remote RTD threshold. This function alerts the
Inputs, Out of user of an open or damaged analog
Range 1-8 input wire.
Analog Expansion There are four thresholds for both
Module of the Remote Thermocouple Input
Remote blocks. Each threshold has a
Thermocouple separate logic block for the pickup
Inputs 1-2 and the trip. Remote Thermocouple
Input #1 with its Threshold #1
Pickup and Trip blocks is shown to
the right. For more details on
configuring the Remote
Thermocouple Inputs, see the
Analog Expansion Module section
in this manual. The pickup block is
true when the threshold is
exceeded. The trip block is true
when the corresponding pickup
block threshold is exceeded for the
duration of the time delay.

Output Objects
Physical Outputs Physical Contact Outputs 1 through
OUT1 - OUT11 11.

Analog Outputs True when the selected parameter

Analog Output M1 exceeds the set range.
Out of Range –
Analog Output M4
Out of Range
Analog Outputs True when the control output
Control Output Out exceeds the selected range.
of Range
Remote Outputs Remote Contact Outputs 12
OUT12 - OUT35 through 35. (Available when an
optional CEM-2020 is connected.)

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-11

Name Description Symbol

Off-Page Objects
Used in conjunction with the Off-
Page Input to transform an output
on one logic page into an input on
another logic page. Outputs can be
renamed by right-clicking and
Off-Page Output
selecting Rename Output. Right-
clicking will also show pages that
the corresponding inputs can be
found on. Selecting the page will
take you to that page.
Used in conjunction with the Off-
Page Output to transform an output
on one logic page into an input on
another logic page. Inputs can be
renamed by right-clicking and
Off-Page Input
selecting Rename Input. Right-
clicking will also show pages that
the corresponding outputs can be
found on. Selecting the page will
take you to that page.
Alarms
Global Alarm True when one or more alarms are
set.

Programmable True when a programmable alarm

Alarms 1 - 16 is set.

Components
This group contains Logic Gates, Pickup and Dropout Timers, Latches, and Comment Blocks. Table 19-2
lists the names and descriptions of the objects in the Components group.
Table 19-2. Components Group, Names and Descriptions
Name Description Symbol
Logic Gates
AND
Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
NAND
Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
OR
Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-12 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

NOR
Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
XOR
Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
XNOR
Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
NOT
Input Output
(INVERTER)
0 1
1 0
Rising Edge The output is true when the rising edge of a pulse is detected on the
input signal.

Falling Edge The output is true when the falling edge of a pulse is detected on the
input signal.

Pickup and Dropout Timers

Drop Out Used to set a delay in the logic.
Timer For more information, refer to Programming BESTlogicPlus, Pickup
and Dropout Timers, later in this section.

Pick Up Timer Used to set a delay in the logic.

For more information, refer to Programming BESTlogicPlus, Pickup
and Dropout Timers, later in this section.

Latches
Reset Priority When the Set input is on and the Reset input is off, the latch will go to
Latch the SET (ON) state. When the Reset input is on and the Set input is
off, the latch will go to the RESET (OFF) state. If both the Set and
Reset inputs are on at the same time, a reset priority latch will go to
the RESET (OFF) state.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-13

Name Description Symbol

Set Priority When the Set input is on and the Reset input is off, the latch will go to
Latch the SET (ON) state. When the Reset input is on and the Set input is
off, the latch will go to the RESET (OFF) state. If both the Set and
Reset inputs are on at the same time, a set priority latch will go to the
SET (ON) state.

Other
Comment Enter user comments.
Block

Counter True when the count reaches a user-selected number.

COUNT_UP increments the count when a true is received.
COUNT_DOWN decrements the count when a true is received.
RESET resets the count to zero when a true is received.
OUTPUT is true when the count reaches the trigger count.
The trigger count is set by the user and is found in Settings Explorer,
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic, Logic Counters.

Elements
Table 19-3 lists the names and descriptions of the elements in the Elements group.
Table 19-3. Elements Group, Names and Descriptions
Name Description Symbol
24 When true, this element blocks, or disables,
the 24 overexcitation protection function.

25 When true, this element blocks, or disables,

the 25 sync-check protection function.

27P When true, this element blocks, or disables,

the 27 undervoltage protection function.

32 When true, this element blocks, or disables,

the 32 reverse power protection function.

40Q When true, this element blocks, or disables,

the 40Q loss of excitation protection
function.

59P When true, this element blocks, or disables,

the 59 overvoltage protection function.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-14 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

81O When true, this element blocks, or disables,
the 81O overfrequency protection function.

81U When true, this element blocks, or disables,

the 81U underfrequency protection function.

ALARM RESET When true, this element resets all active

alarms.

ANALOG OUTPUT 1-4 When true, this element disables analog

DISABLE output 1. Similar elements are provided for
analog outputs 2 through 4.

AUTO ENABLE When true, this element sets the unit in Auto
mode (AVR).

AUTO TRANSFER When true, this element sets the unit as

ENABLE secondary. When false, the unit is primary.

CONTROL OUTPUT When true, this element disables the control

DISABLE output.

CROSS CURRENT When true, this element disables cross

COMPENSATION current compensation.
DISABLE

CROWBAR STATUS When true, this element sets the Crowbar

Activated Status Input true.

DATALOG LOGIC When true, Logic Status x can be selected

STATUS and displayed in the data log and the real-
time monitor.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-15

Name Description Symbol

DATALOG TRIGGER When true, this element triggers the datalog
to begin recording data.

DROOP DISABLE When true, this element disables droop

when the unit is operating in AVR mode.

EXCITER OPEN When true, this element blocks, or disables,

DIODE the Exciter Diode Monitor, Open Diode
protection function.

EXCITER SHORTED When true, this element blocks, or disables,

DIODE the Exciter Diode Monitor, Shorted Diode
protection function.

EXTERNAL When true, this element disables external

TRACKING DISABLE tracking.

FIELD When true, this element blocks, or disables,

OVERCURRENT the Field Overcurrent protection function.

FIELD When true, this element blocks, or disables,

OVERTEMPERATURE the Field Overtemperature protection
function.

FIELD When true, this element blocks, or disables,

OVERVOLTAGE the Field Overvoltage protection function.

GEN BELOW 10 HZ When true, this element blocks, or disables,

the Gen Below 10 Hz protection function.

GENERATOR This element is used to connect the breaker

BREAKER open and close output signals from the
DECS-450 to physical output contacts to
open and close the generator breaker, and
map breaker status feedback to a contact
input. In addition, contact inputs can be
mapped to allow switches to be
implemented to manually initiate breaker
open and close requests.
GENERATOR BREAKER Inputs GENERATOR BREAKER Outputs
Status: This input allows a contact input to be The outputs must be mapped to the contact outputs of the DECS-
mapped that will provide breaker status 450 that will be used to drive the breaker.
feedback to the DECS-450. When the contact Open: This output is pulsed TRUE (closes the output contact it is
input is closed, the breaker is indicated to be mapped to) when the DECS-450 is providing a signal to the
closed. When the contact input is open, the breaker to open. It will be a pulse if the Breaker Output Contact
breaker is indicated to be open. Type is set to Pulse on the Breaker Hardware screen under
DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-16 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

Open: This input allows a contact input to be Synchronizer/Voltage Matching in the Settings Explorer, and the
mapped that can be used to initiate a manual length is determined by the Open Pulse Time. It will be a constant
breaker open request. When this input is output if the Generator Breaker Hardware Contact Type is set to
pulsed closed, the breaker opens. continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough for the
Close: This input allows a contact input to be breaker to actually open before the pulse is removed.
mapped that can be used to initiate a manual Close: This output is pulsed TRUE (closes the output contact it is
breaker close request. When this input is mapped to) when the DECS-450 is providing a signal to the
pulsed and the generator is stable, a close breaker to close. It will be a pulse if the Breaker Output Contact
request is initiated. If the Dead Bus Close Type is set to Pulse on the Breaker Hardware screen under
Enable parameter is TRUE, and the bus is Synchronizer/Voltage Matching in the Settings Explorer, and the
dead, the breaker will close. If the bus is length is determined by the Close Pulse Time. It will be a
stable, the DECS-450 will synchronize the constant output if the Generator Breaker Hardware Contact Type
generator to the bus, and then close the is set to continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough
breaker. for the breaker to actually open before the pulse is removed.
GOVERNOR Can be connected to inputs of other logic
blocks. When the Governor is being raised,
the Raise output is true. When being
lowered, the Lower output is true.

INNER LOOP FIELD When true, this element disables the inner
REGULATOR loop field regulator.
DISABLE

INTERNAL TRACKING When true, this element disables internal

DISABLE tracking.

LINE DROP DISABLE When true, this element disables line drop
when the unit is operating in AVR mode.

LOAD SHARE This element allows load sharing with

DISABLE specific units on the network to be disabled.
When an input to this block is true, load
share data received from that unit is ignored
by the DECS-450.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-17

Name Description Symbol

LOSS OF FIELD When true, this element disables the Loss of
ISOLATION Field Isolation Transducer function.
TRANSDUCER

LOSS OF SENSING When true, this element disables the Loss of

DISABLE Sensing function.

LOSS OF SENSING When true, this element disables the transfer

TRANSFER DISABLE to Manual mode during a Loss of Sensing
condition.

LOWER ENABLE When true, this element lowers the active

setpoint.

MANUAL ENABLE When true, this element switches the unit to

Manual mode.

MANUAL MODE FCR When true, this element switches the

ONLY Manual mode to FCR.

NETWORK LOAD When true, this element disables network

SHARE DISABLE load sharing.

NLS BROADCAST This element functions in conjunction with

the Network Load Share Status inputs on all
units on the network. When an input is true,
the corresponding Network Load Share
Status input on all units on the network is
true.

OEL DISABLE When true, this element disables the OEL.

OEL DISABLED IN When true, this element disables OEL when

MANUAL MODE the unit is operating in Manual mode.

OEL ONLINE When true, this element enables the use of

OEL when the unit is considered online.

OEL SELECT When true, this element selects the

SECONDARY secondary settings for OEL.
SETTINGS

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-18 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

PARALLEL ENABLE When true, this element informs the unit that
LM it is online. The element should be enabled
when the 52LM is closed.
This element also allows UEL and droop
compensation to operate when true.
PID SELECT When true, this element selects secondary
SECONDARY PID settings.
SETTINGS

PF/VAR ENABLE When true, this element enables the PF and

Var controller, and informs the unit that it is
online. The Var/PF Selection element must
be set to true to use var or PF mode. This
element should be enabled when the 52JK
is closed.
PREPOSITION 1 When true, this element informs the unit to
ENABLE use setpoints for Preposition 1.

PREPOSITION 2 When true, this element informs the unit to

ENABLE use setpoints for Preposition 2.

PREPOSITION 3 When true, this element informs the unit to

ENABLE use setpoints for Preposition 3.

PROTECTION When true, this element informs the unit to

SELECT use secondary values for protection.
SECONDARY
SETTINGS

PSS OUTPUT When true, this element disables the output

DISABLE of the PSS. The PSS continues to run, but
the output is not used. (Available when the
controller is equipped with the optional
Power System Stabilizer, style number
1XXXXXX)
PSS SEQ CNTRL When true, PSS sequence (phase rotation)
ENABLED control is enabled. (Available when the
controller is equipped with the optional
Power System Stabilizer, style number
1XXXXXX)
PSS SEQ CNTRL When true, ACB phase rotation is selected.
SELECTION When false, ABC phase rotation is selected.
(Available when the controller is equipped
with the optional Power System Stabilizer,
style number 1XXXXXX)
PSS MOTOR When true, the PSS is in motor mode. When
false the PSS is in generator mode.
(Available when the controller is equipped
with the optional Power System Stabilizer,
style number 1XXXXXX)

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-19

Name Description Symbol

PSS SELECT When true, this element selects secondary
SECONDARY settings for the PSS. (Available when the
SETTINGS controller is equipped with the optional
Power System Stabilizer, style number
1XXXXXX)
RAISE ENABLE When true, this element raises the active
setpoint.

SCL DISABLE When true, this element disables the SCL.

SCL SELECT When true, this element selects the

SECONDARY secondary settings for SCL.
SETTINGS

SOFT START SELECT When true, this element selects the

SECONDARY secondary settings for soft start.
SETTINGS

START ENABLE When true, this element starts the unit.

STOP ENABLE When true, this element stops the unit.

Transfer Watchdog When true, this element energizes the

Trip transfer watchdog output relay.

UEL DISABLE When true, this element disables the UEL.

UEL DISABLED IN When true, this element disables UEL when

MANUAL MODE the unit is operating in Manual mode.

UEL SELECT When true, this element selects secondary

SECONDARY settings for UEL.
SETTINGS

UNDERFREQUENCY When true, this element disables the V/Hz

V/HZ DISABLE Underfrequency limiter.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-20 9597100990

Name Description Symbol

USER When true, this element triggers a
PROGRAMMABLE programmable alarm.
ALARM 1 - 16

VAR LIMITER When true, this element disables the var

DISABLE limiter.

VAR LIMITER When true, this element selects the

SELECT secondary settings on the Var limiter.
SECONDARY
SETTINGS

VAR/PF MODE The var input selects var control and the PF
input selects power factor control.

VAR/PF SELECT When true, this element allows the selection

ENABLE of Var and PF modes.

VOLTAGE MATCHING When true, this element disables voltage

DISABLE matching when the unit is operating in AVR
mode.

Logic Schemes
A logic scheme is a group of interconnected logic blocks that define the operation of a DECS-450 Digital
Excitation System. Only one logic scheme can be active at a time. In most applications, preprogrammed
logic schemes eliminate the need for custom programming. Preprogrammed logic schemes may provide
more inputs, outputs, or features than are needed for a particular application. This is because a
preprogrammed scheme is designed for a large number of applications with no special programming
required. Unneeded logic block outputs may be left open to disable a function or a function block can be
disabled through operating settings.
When a custom logic scheme is required, programming time is reduced by modifying the default logic
scheme.

The Active Logic Scheme

The DECS-450 needs an active logic scheme in order to function. All DECS-450 controllers are delivered
with a default, active logic scheme preloaded in memory. If the default logic scheme meets the
requirements of your application, then only the operating settings (system parameters and threshold
settings) need to be adjusted before placing the DECS-450 in service.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-21

Sending and Retrieving Logic Schemes

Retrieving a Logic Scheme from the DECS-450
To retrieve settings from the DECS-450, the unit must be connected to a computer through a
communications port. Once connected, settings can be downloaded from the DECS-450 by selecting
Download Settings and Logic on the Communication menu.

Sending a Logic Scheme to the DECS-450

To send settings to the DECS-450, the unit must be connected to a computer through a communications
port. Once connected, settings can be uploaded to the DECS-450 by selecting Upload Settings and Logic
on the Communication menu.

Caution
Always remove the DECS-450 from service prior to changing or
modifying the active logic scheme. Attempting to modify a logic
scheme while the DECS-450 is in service could generate unexpected
or unwanted outputs.
Modifying a logic scheme in BESTCOMSPlus® does not automatically
make that scheme active in the DECS-450. The modified scheme
must be uploaded into the DECS-450. See the paragraphs on Sending
and Retrieving Logic Schemes above.

Default Logic Schemes

The default logic scheme for PSS-disabled systems is shown in Figure 19-2 and Figure 19-3 and the
default logic scheme for PSS-enabled systems is shown in Figure 19-4, Figure 19-5, and Figure 19-6.
The default logic for physical outputs is the same for PSS-disabled and PSS-enabled systems and is
shown in Figure 19-7.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-22 9597100990

Figure 19-2. PSS-Disabled Default Logic – Logic Page 1 Tab

Figure 19-3. PSS-Disabled Default Logic - Logic Page 2 Tab

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-23

Figure 19-4. PSS-Enabled Default Logic - Logic Page 1 Tab

Figure 19-5. PSS-Enabled Default Logic - Logic Page 2 Tab

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-24 9597100990

Figure 19-6. PSS-Enabled Default Logic - Logic Page 3 Tab

Figure 19-7. Default Logic - Physical Outputs Tab

Programming in BESTlogic™Plus
To program BESTlogicPlus, use the Settings Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus to open the BESTlogicPlus
Programmable Logic tree branch as shown in Figure 19-1.
The drag and drop method is used to connect a variable or series of variables to the logic inputs, outputs,
components, and elements. To draw a link from port to port (triangles), left click on a port, pull the link
onto another port, and release the left mouse button. The endpoint of the link automatically snaps to the
nearest port when within a certain proximity. A red port indicates that a connection to the port is required
or missing. A black port indicates that a connection to the port is not required. Drawing links from input to
input or output to output is not allowed. Only one link may be connected to any one output.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-25

If an object or element is disabled, it will have a yellow X on it. To enable the element, navigate to the
settings page for that element. A red X indicates that an object or element is not available per the style
number of the DECS-450.
Logic blocks may be automatically arranged by right clicking a blank area in the program grid and
selecting Auto-Layout.
The following conditions must be met before BESTCOMSPlus will allow logic to be uploaded to the
DECS-450:
• A minimum of two inputs and a maximum of 32 inputs on any multi-port (AND, OR, NAND, NOR,
XOR, and XNOR) gate.
• A maximum of 32 logic levels for any particular path. A path is considered an input block or an output
side of an element block through gates to an output block or an input side of an element block. This
includes any OR gates on the Physical Outputs page, but not the matched pairs of Physical Outputs
blocks.
• A maximum of 256 gates per logic level with a maximum of 256 gates allowed per diagram. All output
blocks and input sides of element blocks are at the maximum logic level of the diagram. All gates are
pushed forward/upwards in logic levels and buffered to reach the final output block or element block if
needed.
Three status indicators are located in the lower right corner of the BESTlogicPlus window. These
indicators show the Logic Save Status, Logic Diagram Status, and Logic Layer Status. Table 19-4 defines
the colors for each indicator.
Table 19-4. Status Indicators
Indicator Color Definition
Logic Save Status Orange Logic has changed since last save.
(Left) Green Logic has NOT changed since last save.
Logic Diagram Status Red Requirements NOT met as listed above.
(Center) Green Requirements met as listed above.
Logic Layer Status Red Requirements NOT met as listed above.
(Right) Green Requirements met as listed above.

Pickup and Dropout Timers

A pickup timer produces a TRUE output when the elapsed time is greater than or equal to the Pickup
Time setting after a FALSE to TRUE transition occurs on the Initiate input from the connected logic.
Whenever the Initiate input status transitions to FALSE, the output transitions to FALSE immediately.
A drop out timer produces a TRUE output when the elapsed time is greater than or equal to the Dropout
Time setting after a TRUE to FALSE transition occurs on the Initiate input from the connected logic.
Whenever the Initiate input transitions to TRUE, the output transitions to FALSE immediately.
Refer to Figure 19-8, Pickup and Dropout Logic Timer Blocks.
To program logic timer settings, use the Settings Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus to open the
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic/Logic Timers tree branch. Enter a Name label that will appear on the
timer logic block. The Time Delay value range is 0 to 250 hours in 1 hour increments, 0 to 59 minutes in 1
minute increments, or 0 to 59.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments. Next, open the Components tab inside
the BESTlogicPlus window and drag a timer onto the program grid. Right click on the timer and pick
Select Timer from the menu to open the Logic Timer Properties window. From here, select the desired
timer’s radio button and click OK.
Timing accuracy is ±15 milliseconds.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-26 9597100990

Initiate
Initiate Pickup Output
Timer Pickup Time

Output

P0048-03

Initiate
Initiate Dropout Output
Timer Dropout Time

Output

Figure 19-8. Pickup and Dropout Timer Logic Blocks

Offline Logic Simulator

You can use the offline logic simulator to test your custom logic before placing it in operation. The state of
various logic elements can be toggled to verify that the logic states travel through the system as
expected.
The offline logic simulator allows you to change the state of various logic elements to illustrate how that
state travels through the system. Before running the logic simulator, you must click the Save button on
the BESTlogicPlus toolbar to save the logic to memory. Changes to the logic (other than changing the
state) are disabled when the simulator is enabled. Colors are selected by clicking the Options button on
the BESTlogicPlus toolbar. By default, Logic 0 is red and Logic 1 is green. Using your mouse, double-
click on a logic element to change its state.
An example of the offline logic simulator is shown in Figure 19-9. STOP_ENABLE is Logic 0 (red) when
Input 1 is Logic 1 (green), Input 2 is Logic 0 (red), and the inverter is Logic 1 (green).

Figure 19-9. Offline Logic Simulator Example

BESTlogic™Plus File Management

To manage BESTlogicPlus files, use the Settings Explorer to open the BESTlogicPlus Programmable
Logic tree branch. Use the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic toolbar to manage BESTlogicPlus files.
Refer to Figure 19-10. For information on Settings Files management, refer to the BESTCOMSPlus
Software section.

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 19-27

Figure 19-10. BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic Toolbar

Saving a BESTlogicPlus File

After programming BESTlogicPlus settings, click on the Save button to save the settings to memory.
Before the new BESTlogicPlus settings can be uploaded to the DECS-450, you must select Save from
the File pull-down menu located at the top of the BESTCOMSPlus main shell. This step will save both the
BESTlogicPlus settings and the operating settings to a file.
The user also has the option to save the BESTlogicPlus settings to a unique file that contains only
BESTlogicPlus settings. Click on the Logic Library drop-down button and select Save Logic Library File.
Use standard Windows® techniques to save the file and enter a filename.

Opening a BESTlogicPlus File

To open a saved BESTlogicPlus file, click on the Logic Library down button on the BESTlogicPlus
Programmable Logic toolbar and select Open Logic Library File. Use standard Windows techniques to
find and open the file.

Protecting a BESTlogicPlus File

Locking and protecting is useful when sending logic files to other personnel to be modified. Locked
object(s) cannot be changed. To view the lock status of the object(s), select Show Lock Status from the
Protection drop-down menu. To lock object(s), use the mouse to select object(s) to be locked, right click
on the selected object(s) and select Lock Object(s). The gold colored padlock next to the object(s) will
change from an open to a locked state. To protect a logic document, select Protect Logic Document from
the Protection button. Establishing a password is optional.

Uploading a BESTlogicPlus File

To upload a BESTlogicPlus file to the DECS-450, first open, or create, the file in BESTCOMSPlus. Then
click the Communication menu and select Upload Logic.

Downloading a BESTlogicPlus File

To download a BESTlogicPlus file from the DECS-450, click the Communication menu and select
Download Settings and Logic from Device. If the logic currently in BESTCOMSPlus has changed, a dialog
box will prompt you to save the current logic changes, then the download will begin.

Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes

To copying a saved logic scheme and assign a unique name, load the desired logic scheme into
BESTCOMSPlus. Click on the Logic Library button and select Save Logic Library File. Use standard
Windows® techniques to save the new file and enter a unique filename.

Printing a BESTlogicPlus File

Clicking the Printer icon, located on the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic toolbar, opens the Print
Preview screen. This screen displays a print preview of the logic scheme and provides many standard
printer and page setup settings.

Clearing the On-Screen Logic Diagram

Click on the Clear button to clear the on-screen logic diagram and start over.

DECS-450 BESTlogic™Plus
19-28 9597100990

BESTlogic™Plus Examples
Example 1 - GOVR Logic Block Connections
Figure 19-11 illustrates the GOVR logic block and two output logic blocks. Output 6 is active while the
governor is being raised and Output 9 is active while the governor is being lowered.

Figure 19-11. Example 1 - GOVR Logic Block Connections

Example 2 - AND Gate Connections

Figure 19-12 illustrates a typical AND gate connection. In this example, Output 11 will become active
when the bus and the generator are dead.

Figure 19-12. Example 2 - AND Gate Connections

BESTlogic™Plus DECS-450
9597100990 20-1

20 • Communication
Local Communication
The USB port (type B) connects the DECS-450 with a PC operating BESTCOMSPlus® for local, short-
term communication. This mode of communication is useful for settings configuration and system
commissioning. The USB port is located on the front panel and illustrated in the Controls and Indicators
section of this manual. A USB device driver for the DECS-450 is automatically installed on your PC during
the installation of BESTCOMSPlus. Information about establishing communication between
BESTCOMSPlus and the DECS-450 is provided in the BESTCOMSPlus Software section of this manual.

Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices. Nonvolatile
memory is used to store information (such as settings) that needs to be
preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise restarted.
Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a physical limit on the
number of times they can be erased and written. In this product, the limit is
100,000 erase/write cycles. During product application, consideration should
be given to communications, logic, and other factors that may cause
frequent/repeated writes of settings or other information that is retained by the
product. Applications that result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce
the useable product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.

Communication with a Second DECS-450

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, RS232 Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, RS232 Setup.
Communication between two DECS-450s enables external regulation setpoint tracking to occur in a dual,
or redundant, application.
DECS-450 controllers use a female DB-9 (RS-232) connector for communication. This connector is
located on the rear panel and is illustrated in the Terminals and Connectors section of this manual. A five-
foot (1.5 meter) cable, part number 9310300032, is available for interconnecting two DECS-450
controllers.

Modbus® Communication
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, Modbus Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, Modbus
DECS-450 systems support the RS-485 mode and Modbus TCP (Ethernet) mode at the same time.
DECS-450 Modbus communication registers are listed and defined in the Modbus Communication
section of this manual.
Modbus settings for RS-485 and Ethernet are illustrated in Figure 20-1.

DECS-450 Communication
20-2 9597100990

Figure 20-1. Modbus Setup

RS-485 Communication
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, RS-485 Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, RS-485 Setup
An RS-485 port uses the Modbus RTU (remote terminal unit) protocol for polled communication with other
networked devices or remote annunciation and control with an IDP-801 Interactive Display Panel. RS-485
terminals are located on the rear panel and are identified as RS-485 A, B, and C. Terminal A serves as
the send/receive A terminal, terminal B serves as the send/receive B terminal, and terminal C serves as
the signal ground terminal. Figure 20-2 illustrates typical RS-485 connections for multiple DECS-450
controllers communicating over a Modbus network.

Figure 20-2. Typical RS-485 Connections

Communication DECS-450
9597100990 20-3

RS-485 port communication settings are illustrated in Figure 20-3.

Figure 20-3. RS-485 Port Communication Settings

CAN Communication
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, CAN Bus Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, CAN Bus, CAN Bus Setup
Two separate CAN (controller area network) ports are provided on the DECS-450. One CAN interface
(CAN 1) facilitates communication between the DECS-450 and optional modules such as the contact
expansion module (CEM-2020) or analog expansion module (AEM-2020). A second CAN interface (CAN
2) enables the DECS-450 to transmit generator and system parameters to a generator controller such as
Basler’s DGC-2020HD. CAN 2 also permits DECS-450 setpoint and mode control from an external device
connected to the CAN.
Both CAN bus interfaces utilize the SAE J1939 messaging protocol.
DECS-450 CAN parameters are listed and defined in the CAN Communication section of this manual.

Connections
DECS-450 CAN connections should be made with twisted-pair, shielded cable. Each CAN port
(designated CAN 1 and CAN 2) has a CAN high (H) terminal, a CAN low (L) terminal, and a CAN drain
(SH) terminal. CAN port terminals are illustrated in the Terminals and Connectors section of this manual.

Port Configuration
Each DECS-450 CAN port must be identified by a unique address number. The baud rate of each port
can be configured for 125 kbps or 250 kbps.
The Allowed Command Address is the J1939 address from which the DECS-450 will accept broadcast
data. If the address is set to 255 or the same as the DECS-450 CAN Bus Interface address, then
broadcast data is accepted from any address. Otherwise, broadcast data is accepted from only the
specified address. Port configuration settings are illustrated in Figure 20-4.

Figure 20-4. CAN Port Configuration Settings

DECS-450 Communication
20-4 9597100990

Remote Module Setup

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, Remote Module
Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, CAN Bus, Remote Module Setup
Optional, external modules, such as the contact expansion module (CEM-2020) and analog expansion
module (AEM-2020), communicate via the DECS-450 CAN 1 interface and are configured through the
DECS-450 front panel HMI and BESTCOMSPlus. These settings are illustrated in Figure 20-5.

Figure 20-5. Remote Module Setup

Ethernet Communication
An Ethernet port uses the Modbus TCP protocol for polled communication with other networked devices
or remote annunciation and control with an IDP-801 or IDP-1201 Interactive Display Panel.
Depending upon the style number, each DECS-450 is equipped with either a copper (100BASE-TX)
Ethernet communication port (style XXXXXTX) or a fiber optic (100BASE-FX) Ethernet communication
port (style XXXXXFX). The ST type fiber optic port uses a 1300 nanometer, near-infrared (NIR) light
wavelength transmitted via two strands of multimode optical fiber, one for receive (RX) and the other for
transmit (TX). The copper or fiber optic Ethernet connector is located on the rear panel. DECS-450
metering, annunciation, and control is provided through the Ethernet port using the Modbus TCP protocol.
DECS-450 Modbus communication registers are listed and defined in the Modbus Communication
section of this manual.

Note
Industrial Ethernet devices designed to comply with IEC 61000-4
series of specifications are recommended.

Ethernet Connection
1. Connect the DECS-450 to the PC using a standard Ethernet cable.
2. In BESTCOMSPlus, click Communication, New Connection, DECS-450, or click the Connection
button on the lower menu bar. The DECS-450 Connection window appears. (Figure 20-6)
3. If you know the IP address of the DECS-450, click the radio button for the Ethernet Connection IP
at the top of the DECS-450 Connection window, enter the address into the fields and click the
Connect button.
4. If you don’t know the IP address, you can perform a scan to search for all connected devices by
clicking the Ethernet button in the Device Discovery box. After the scan is complete, a window
containing the connected devices will be displayed. (Figure 20-7)

Communication DECS-450
9597100990 20-5

Figure 20-6. DECS-450 Connection Window

Figure 20-7. Device Discovery Window

5. Adding any or all of the detected devices to the Device Directory eliminates the need to scan for
connected devices each time a connection is desired. Simply select a device from the list and
click Add. Clicking Add All will add all detected devices from the list to the Device Directory. The
Device Directory stores the name, model, and address of devices you have added. Click the radio
button for Select Device to Connect to, select the device from the Device Directory list, and click
the Connect button at the top of the DECS-450 Connection window.
6. Choose the desired device from the list and click Connect. Wait for connection to complete.

DECS-450 Communication
20-6 9597100990

7. The Advanced button displays the window shown in Figure 20-8. It contains options for enabling
Auto Reconnect, downloading settings after reconnect, the delay between retries (in
milliseconds), and the maximum number of attempts (Figure 20-8).

Figure 20-8. Advanced Properties, Auto Reconnect

Note

The PC running BESTCOMSPlus software must be configured

correctly to communicate with the DECS-450. The PC must have an
IP address in the same subnet range as the DECS-450 if the
DECS-450 is operating on a private, local network.
Otherwise, the PC must have a valid IP address with access to the
network and the DECS-450 must be connected to a properly
configured router. The network settings of the PC depend on the
operating system installed. Refer to the operating system manual for
instructions.
On most Microsoft Windows based PCs, the network settings can be
accessed through the Network Connections icon located inside the
Control Panel.

PROFIBUS Communication
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, Profibus Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, Profibus
On units equipped with the PROFIBUS communication protocol (style XX1XXXX), the DECS-450 sends
and receives PROFIBUS data through a DB-9 port located on the rear panel. DECS-450 PROFIBUS
communication parameters are listed and defined in the PROFIBUS Communication section of this
manual.
PROFIBUS communication settings are illustrated in Figure 20-9.

Communication DECS-450
9597100990 20-7

Figure 20-9. Profibus Setup

DECS-450 Communication
20-8 9597100990

Communication DECS-450
9597100990 21-1

21 • Configuration
Before the DECS-450 is placed in service, it must be configured for the controlled equipment and
application.

Generator, Field, and Bus Ratings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Rated Data
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, System Parameters, Rated Data
Generator, field, and bus rating settings are illustrated in Figure 21-1.
For proper excitation control and protection, the DECS-450 must be configured with the ratings of the
controlled generator and field. These ratings are typically shown on the generator nameplate or can be
obtained from the generator manufacturer. Required generator ratings include the voltage, frequency,
power factor, and apparent power (kVA). Generator current and real power (kW) are listed with the other
generator ratings as read-only settings. These values are automatically calculated from the other
generator ratings entered by the user. Required field ratings include the no load dc voltage and current,
full load voltage and current, field resistance, ambient temperature and brush voltage drop.
In applications where the generator will be synchronized/paralleled with a bus, the DECS-450 must be
configured with the rated bus voltage.
The Operating Power, PPT Secondary Voltage setting is used to calculate the recommended Ka (Loop
Gain) value.
When using the DECS-450 with an exciter requiring an inverted output, enable the Invert Output setting to
invert the DECS-450 control output. Refer to the Programmable Inputs and Outputs section in the manual
for more information.

Caution
Selecting inverted control output with an excitation system that does not require it may
result in equipment damage.

DECS-450 Configuration
21-2 9597100990

Figure 21-1. Generator, Bus, Field, Ratings

Field Isolation Transducer

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Field Isolation Transducer
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, System Parameters, Field Isolation Transducer
Field Isolation Transducer configuration consists of settings for shunt rating and field voltage input. See
Figure 21-2.

Figure 21-2. Field Isolation Transducer Ratings

Sensing Transformer Ratings and Configuration

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Sensing Transformers
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, System Parameters, Sensing Transformers
DECS-450 configuration includes entry of the primary and secondary values for the transformers that
supply generator and bus sensing values to the DECS-450. These configuration settings are illustrated in
Figure 21-3.

Configuration DECS-450
9597100990 21-3

Generator PT
Voltage settings for the generator PT primary and secondary windings establish the nominal PT voltages
expected by the DECS-450. Phase rotation (ABC or ACB) can be specified. Options for the generator
voltage sensing connections include single-phase (across phases A and C) and three-phase sensing.

Generator CTs
Current settings for the generator CT primary and secondary windings establish the nominal CT current
values expected by the DECS-450. Options for the generator current sensing connections include A-
phase, B-phase, C-phase, or three-phase.

Bus PT
Voltage settings for the bus PT primary and secondary windings establish the nominal bus PT voltages
expected by the DECS-450. Options for the bus voltage sensing connections include single-phase
(across phases A and C) and three-phase sensing.

Figure 21-3. Sensing Transformer Ratings and Configuration

Startup Functions
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Operating Settings, Startup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Operating Settings, Startup
DECS-450 startup functions consist of soft start and field flashing. These settings are illustrated in Figure
21-4.

Soft Start
During startup, the soft start function prevents voltage overshoot by controlling the rate of generator
terminal voltage buildup (toward the setpoint). Soft start is active in AVR, FCR, and FVR regulation
modes. Soft start behavior is based on two parameters: level and time. The soft start level is expressed
as a percentage of the setpoint of the active mode and determines the starting point for generator voltage
buildup during startup. The soft start time defines the amount of time allowed for the buildup of generator
voltage during startup. Two groups of soft start settings (primary and secondary) provide for independent
startup behavior which is selectable through BESTlogic™Plus.

DECS-450 Configuration
21-4 9597100990

Field Flashing
To ensure generator voltage buildup, the field flashing function applies and removes flashing power from
an external field flashing source. Field flashing is active in AVR, FCR, and FVR control modes. During
system startup, the application of field flashing is based on two parameters: level and time.
The Field Flash Dropout Level setting determines the level of generator voltage where field flashing is
withdrawn. In AVR mode, the field flash dropout level is expressed as a percentage of the setpoint of the
active mode. In FCR mode, the level is expressed as a percentage of the field current. In FVR mode, the
level is expressed as a percentage of the field voltage.
The Maximum Field Flash Time setting defines the maximum length of time that field flashing may be
applied during startup.
To use the field flashing function, one of the DECS-450 programmable contact outputs must be
configured as a field flashing output.

Figure 21-4. Startup Function Settings

Device Information
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Device Info
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, General Settings, Device Information, DECS-450
Device information includes user-assigned identification labeling and read-only firmware version
information and product information. Device information (Figure 21-5) is provided for the DECS-450,
CEM-2020 Contact Expansion Module, and AEM-2020 Analog Expansion Module.

Firmware and Product Information

Firmware and product information can be viewed on the HMI display and Device Info tab of
BESTCOMSPlus.

Firmware Information
Firmware information is provided for the DECS-450, optional CEM-2020, and optional AEM-2020. This
information includes the application part number, application version, application build date, and boot
code version. Also included is the version of the boot code. When configuring settings in BESTCOMSPlus
while disconnected from a DECS-450, an Application Version Number setting is available to ensure
compatibility between the selected settings and the actual settings available in the DECS-450.

Product Information
Product information for the DECS-450, CEM-2020, and AEM-2020 includes the device model number
and serial number.

Configuration DECS-450
9597100990 21-5

Device Identification
The user-assigned Device ID is used to identify DECS-450 controllers in reports and during polling.

Figure 21-5. Device Information

Display Units
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Display Units
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, General Settings, Display Units
When working with DECS-450 settings in BESTCOMSPlus, you have the option of viewing the settings in
English or Metric units. The display units setting is illustrated in Figure 21-6.

Figure 21-6. Display Units

DECS-450 Configuration
21-6 9597100990

Configuration DECS-450
9597100990 22-1

22 • Security
DECS-450 units are secured by password-protected user accounts. Each account is assigned an access
level that permits certain operations. An additional layer of security controls the type of operations allowed
through certain DECS-450 communication ports.
Security settings are uploaded and downloaded separately from the settings and logic. See the
BESTCOMSPlus® section for more information on uploading and downloading security settings.

Password Access
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Device Security Setup, User
Name Setup
User accounts may be created which consist of a user name, password, and an access level. The
different access levels are listed in Table 22-1. An account has access to the assigned access level as
well as all the levels below it. For example, an account with Settings access level has access to
operations granted by the Settings, Operator, Control, and Read access levels.
Table 22-1. Password Access Levels and Descriptions
Access Level Description
Admin (6) Create, edit, and delete users and device security. Includes levels 1 through 5
below.
Design (5) Create or change programmable logic. Includes levels 1 through 4 below.
Settings (4) Edit all settings. Does not include logic settings. Includes levels 1, 2, and 3 below.
Operator (3) Set date and time, reset accumulated metering values, and erase event data.
Includes levels 1 and 2 below.
Control (2) Operate real-time controls. Includes level 1 below.
Read (1) Read all system parameters, metering, and logs. No changes or operation allowed.
None (0) All access is denied.

Password Creation and Configuration

User accounts are created and configured on the BESTCOMSPlus User Name Setup screen (Figure
22-1). To create and configure a username and password, perform the following steps.

1. Disable Live Mode in BESTCOMSPlus.

2. In the BESTCOMSPlus settings explorer, navigate to General Settings, Device Security Setup,
User Name Setup. When prompted, enter a username of “A” and a password of “A” and log on.
This factory-default username and password grants administrator-level access. It is highly
recommended that this factory-default password be changed immediately to prevent undesired
access.
3. To set up a new account, select an “UNASSIGNED” entry in the user list. To edit an existing
account, select it in the user list.
4. Enter a username.
5. Enter a password for the user.
6. Reenter the password created in step 5 to verify.
7. Select the maximum allowed access level for the user.
8. To set an expiration date for a user’s access, enter number of days. Otherwise, leave the
expiration value at zero.

DECS-450 Security
22-2 9597100990

9. Click the Save User button.

10. Open the Communication menu, and click Upload Security to Device.
11. BESTCOMSPlus notifies you when the security upload is successful.

Figure 22-1. Password Access Settings

Port Security
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Device Security Setup, Port
Access Setup
An additional layer of security restricts operations through the DECS-450 communication ports.
The Unsecured Access Level setting sets the maximum level of access allowed without entering a
username/password. The Secured Access Level setting sets the maximum level of access allowed with a
password.

Caution
Setting the Secured Access Level to None on any port makes that port
unusable. If the Secured Access Level is set to None on all available ports, the
DECS-450 must be returned to Basler Electric for repair.

Only one port can be in use at a time by an account with Control access or higher. For example, if a user
is logged in with Control access at one port, all users at other ports (even Admins) are granted only Read
access until the initial user with Control access logs off.

Port Access Configuration

Communication port access is configured on the BESTCOMSPlus Port Access Setup screen (Figure
22-2). To configure communication port access, perform the following steps.

1. Disable Live Mode in BESTCOMSPlus.

2. In the BESTCOMSPlus settings explorer, navigate to General Settings, Device Security Setup,
Port Access Setup. When prompted, enter a username of “A” and a password of “A” and log on.
This factory-default username and password allows administrator-level access. It is highly

Security DECS-450
9597100990 22-3

recommended that this factory-default password be changed immediately to prevent undesired

access.
3. Highlight the desired communication port in the port list.
4. Select the highest unsecured access level for the port.
5. Select the highest secured access level for the port.
6. Save the configuration by clicking the Save Port button.
7. Open the Communication menu, and click Upload Security to Device.
8. BESTCOMSPlus notifies you when the security upload is successful.

Figure 22-2. Port Access Configuration Settings

Login and Access Controls

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Device Security Setup, Access
Control
Additional controls are available to limit login time and login attempts. These control settings are
illustrated in Figure 22-3.

Access Timeout
The Access Timeout setting maintains security by automatically withdrawing password access if a user
neglects to log out. If no activity is detected for the duration of the access timeout setting, password
access is automatically withdrawn.

Login Failure
A Login Attempts setting limits the number of times that login can be attempted. A Login Time Window
setting limits the length of time permitted during the login process. If login is unsuccessful, access is
blocked for the duration of the Login Lockout Time setting.

DECS-450 Security
22-4 9597100990

Figure 22-3. Login and Access Control Settings

Security Shutdown Alarm

The DECS-450 verifies its style and serial numbers during power-on self-test. The Security Shutdown
alarm is annunciated when the DECS-450 has detected an unauthenticated style or serial number.
When the security shutdown alarm is active, the following occurs:
1. The transfer watchdog will trip and remain latched to indicate that this unit is not in control.
2. The DECS-450 will neither start excitation nor run other control functions.
3. The DECS-450 will retain communication functions to annunciate the alarm.
If your DECS-450 has annunciated this alarm, contact Basler Electric for support.

Security DECS-450
9597100990 23-1

23 • Timekeeping
The DECS-450 clock is used by the logging functions to timestamp events. DECS-450 timekeeping may
be either self-managed by the internal clock or coordinated with an external source through a network or
IRIG device. BESTCOMSPlus® Timekeeping settings are shown in Figure 23-1.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Clock Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, General Settings, Clock Setup

Time and Date Format

Clock display settings enable you to configure the time and date reported by the DECS-450 to match the
local conventions. The time may be configured for either the 12- or 24-hour format with the Time Format
setting. The Date Format setting configures the reported date for one of three available formats: MM-DD-
YYYY, DD-MM-YYYY, or YYYY-MM-DD.

Daylight Saving Time Adjustments

The DECS-450 can automatically compensate for the start and end of daylight saving time (DST) on a
fixed- or floating-date basis. An example of a fixed date is “March 2” and an example of a floating date is
“Second Sunday of March”. DST compensation may be set in respect to your local time or coordinated
universal time (UTC). DST start and end dates are fully configurable and include a bias adjustment.

Network Time Protocol (NTP)

When connected to an Ethernet network, the DECS-450 can use NTP to synchronize with a radio,
atomic, or other clock located on the internet/intranet, to maintain accurate timekeeping.

NTP Settings
NTP is enabled in the DECS-450 by entering the internet protocol (IP) address of the network timeserver
in the four decimal-separated fields of the NTP Address setting. Time zone offset settings provide the
necessary offset from the coordinated universal time (UTC) standard. Central standard time is six hours
and zero minutes behind (–6, 0) UTC and is the default setting.
The Time Priority Setup must be used to enable a connected time source. When multiple time sources
are connected, the Time Priority Setup can be used to rank the sources according to their priority.

IRIG
When the IRIG source is enabled, through the Time Priority Setup, it synchronizes the DECS-450 internal
clock with the time code signal.
Some older IRIG receivers may use a time code signal compatible with IRIG standard 200-98, format
B002, which does not contain year information. To use this standard, select the IRIG without Year radio
button in the IRIG Decoding box. Year information is stored in nonvolatile memory so the year is retained
during a control power interruption.
The IRIG input accepts a demodulated (dc level-shifted) signal. For proper recognition, the applied IRIG
signal must have a logic high level of no less than 3.5 Vdc and a logic low level that is no higher than 0.5
Vdc. The input signal voltage range is –10 Vdc to +10 Vdc. Input resistance is nonlinear and
approximately 4 k

DECS-450 Timekeeping
23-2 9597100990

Figure 23-1. Clock Setup

Timekeeping DECS-450
9597100990 24-1

24 • Testing
Testing of the DECS-450’s regulation and optional power system stabilizer (PSS) (style 1XXXXXX)
performance is possible through the integrated analysis tools of BESTCOMSPlus®.

Real-Time Metering Analysis

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Analysis
HMI Navigation Path: Analysis functions are not available through front panel HMI.
Proper voltage regulator performance is critical to PSS performance. Step response measurements of the
voltage regulator should be performed to confirm the AVR gain and other critical parameters. A transfer
function measurement between terminal voltage reference and terminal voltage should be performed with
the machine operating at very low load. This test provides an indirect measurement of the PSS phase
requirement. As long as the machine is operating at very low load, the terminal voltage modulation does
not produce significant speed and power changes.
The BESTCOMSPlus Real-Time Metering Analysis screen is used to perform and monitor online AVR
and PSS testing. Six plots of user-selected data may be generated and the logged data may be stored in
a file for later examination. BESTCOMSPlus must be in Live Mode to start plotting. Live Mode is found
under the Options menu on the lower menu bar. RTM Analysis screen controls and indications are
illustrated in Figure 24-1.

Figure 24-1. RTM Analysis Screen

DECS-450 Testing
24-2 9597100990

The RTM Analysis screen controls are provided for:

• Selecting the parameters to be graphed
• Adjusting the resolution of the graph x axis and the range of the graph y axis
• Starting and stopping plot captures
• Opening existing graph files, saving captured plots in graph files, and printing captured graphs

Graph Parameters
Any six of the following parameters may be selected for plotting.
• Auxiliary voltage input (Vaux) • Null Balance State (Null State)
• Average line current (Iavg) • OEL controller output
• Average line-to-line voltage (Vavg) • OEL field current reference
• AVR error signal (Errln) • OEL integrator value
• AVR PID output • Phase A current (Ia)
• Bus frequency (B Hz) • Phase A to B, line-to-line voltage (Vab)
• Bus voltage (Vbus) • Phase B current (Ib)
• Compensated frequency deviation • Phase B to C, line-to-line voltage (Vbc)
(CompF) • Phase C current (Ic)
• Control output (CntOp) • Phase C to A, line-to-line voltage Vca
• Cross-current input (Iaux) • Position Indication (PositionInd)
• Droop • Positive sequence current (I1)
• FCR error to PID • Positive sequence voltage (V1)
• FCR integrator value • Post-limit output (Post)
• FCR PID output • Power factor (PF)
• Field current (Ifd) (Full Load) • Power HP #1 (x5)
• Field temperature • Pre-limit output (Prelim)
• Field voltage (Vfd) (Full Load) • PSS electrical power (PSSkW)
• Filtered mechanical power (MechP) • PSS terminal voltage (Vtmag)
• Final PSS output (Pout) • Rate of frequency change
• Frequency response signal (Test) • Reactive power (kvar)
• FVR error to PID • Real power (kW)
• FVR integrator value • S1 Logic status point 1
• FVR PID output • S2 Logic status point 2
• Generator frequency (G Hz) • S3 Logic status point 3
• Inner loop error • S4 Logic status point 4
• Inner loop field voltage feedback • S5 Logic status point 5
• Inner loop output • S6 Logic status point 6
• Inner loop PID input • SCL controller output
• Inner loop reference • SCL gen current reference
• Internal state (TrnOp) • SCL integrator value
• Lead-lag #1 (x15) • SCL PF reference
• Lead-lag #2 (x16) • Speed HP #1 (x2)
• Lead-lag #3 (x17) • Synthesized speed (Synth)
• Lead-lag #4 (x31) • Terminal frequency deviation (TermF)
• Logic limiter washout filter • Terminal voltage low-pass filter
• Mechanical power (x10) • Terminal voltage ramp filter
• Mechanical power (x11) • Time response signal (Ptest)
• Mechanical power (x7) • Torsional filter #1 (Tflt1)
• Mechanical power (x8) • Torsional filter #2 (x29)
• Mechanical power (x9) • Total power (kVA)
• Negative sequence current (I2) • Transfer output
• Negative sequence voltage (V2) • UEL controller output (UelOutput)
• Network load share error • UEL integrator value
• Network load share PI output • UEL var reference
• Null Balance Level (Null Balance) • Var limiter integrator value

Testing DECS-450
9597100990 3

• Var limiter output • Var/PF PID output

• Var limiter reference • Washed out power (WashP)
• Var/PF error to PID • Washed out speed (WashW)
• Var/PF integrator value

Frequency Response
Frequency response testing functions are available by clicking the Frequency Response button on the
RTM Analysis screen. Frequency Response screen functions are illustrated in Figure 24-2 and described
below.

Test Mode
Frequency response testing may be performed in Manual or Auto mode. In Manual mode, a single
frequency can be specified to obtain the corresponding magnitude and phase responses. In Auto mode,
BESTCOMSPlus® will sweep the range of frequencies and obtain the corresponding magnitude and
phase responses.

Manual Test Mode Options

Manual test mode options include settings to select the frequency and magnitude of the applied test
signal. A time delay setting selects the time after which the magnitude and phase response
corresponding to the specified frequency is computed. This delay allows transients to settle before
computations are made.

Auto Test Mode Options

Automatic test mode options include settings to select the minimum frequency, maximum frequency, and
magnitude of the sinusoidal wave that is applied during a frequency response test.

Figure 24-2. Frequency Response Screen

Bode Plotting
A Bode plot can be printed, opened, and saved in graph (.gph) format.

Transfer Function
The point in the DECS-450 logic circuitry where a signal is injected for analysis of magnitude and phase
responses is selectable. Signal points include PSS Comp Frequency, PSS Electric Power, AVR
Summing, AVR PID Input, and Manual PID Input.
The type of input signal to be injected and output point are selectable, and include:

DECS-450 Testing
24-4 9597100990

• AvrOut • Synth: Synthsized Speed {pu}

• B Hz: Bus Frequency {Hz} • TermF: Terminal Frequency Deviation
• CntOp: Control Output {pu} • Test: Frequency Response Signal {pu}
• CompF: Compensated Frequency Deviation • Tflt1: Torsional Filter #1 {pu}
• Droop • TrnOp: Internal State {pu}
• ErrIn: AVR Error Signal • UelOutput: UEL Controller Output
• FcrErr • V1: Positive Sequence Voltage {pu}
• FcrOut • V2: Negative Sequence Voltage {pu}
• FvrErr • Vab: PhA-PhB L-L Voltage {pu}
• FvrOut • Var/PfErr
• G Hz: Generator Frequency {Hz} • Var/PfOut
• I1: Positive Sequence Current {pu} • VarLimOutput: Var Limiter Output
• I2: Negative Sequence Current {pu} • Vaux: Aux Voltage Input {pu}
• Ia: Phase A Current {pu} • Vavg: Ave L-L Voltage {pu}
• Iaux: Cross Current Input {pu} • Vbc: PhB-PhC L-L Voltage {pu}
• Iavg: Ave Line Current{pu} • Vbus: Bus Voltage {pu}
• Ib: Phase B Current {pu} • Vca: PhC-PhA L-L Voltage {pu}
• Ic: Phase C Current {pu} • Vfd: Field Voltage {pu} (Full Load)
• Ifd: Field Current {pu} (Full Load) • Vtmag: PSS Term Voltage
• kVA: Total Power {pu} • WashP: Washed Out Power
• kvar: Reactive Power {pu} • WashW: Washed Out Speed {pu}
• kW: Real Power {pu} • x02: Speed HP #1
• MechP: Filtered Mechanical Power • x05: Power HP #1 {pu}
• Network Load Share • x07: Mechanical Power {pu}
• NullBalance: Null Balance Level • x08: Mechanical Power LP #1
• OelOutput: OEL Controller Output • x09: Mechanical Power LP #2
• PF: Power Factor • x10: Mechanical Power LP #3
• Post: Post-Limit Output {pu} • x11: Mechanical Power LP #4
• POut: Final PSS Output {pu} • x15: Lead-Lag #1 {pu}
• Prelim: Pre-Limit Output {pu} • x16: Lead-Lag #2 {pu}
• PssW: PSS Electric Power {pu} • x17: Lead-Lag #3 {pu}
• Ptest: Time Response Signal {pu} • x29: Torsional Filter #2 {pu}
• SclOutput: SCL Controller Output • x31: Lead-Lag #4 {pu}

Frequency Response
Read-only frequency response fields indicate the magnitude response, phase response, and test signal
frequency. The magnitude response and phase response correspond to the test signal previously applied.
The test frequency value reflects the frequency of the test signal currently being applied.

Caution
Exercise caution when performing frequency response testing on a
generator connected to the grid. Avoid frequencies that are close to
the resonant frequency of the machine or neighboring machines.
Frequencies above 3 Hz may correspond to the lowest shaft torsional
frequencies of a generator. A torsional profile for the machine should
be obtained from the manufacturer and consulted before conducting
any frequency response tests.

Time Response
Tests should be performed at various load levels to confirm that the input signals are calculated or
measured correctly. Since the PSS function uses compensated terminal frequency in place of speed, the
derived mechanical power signal should be examined carefully to ensure that it does not contain any
components at the electromechanical oscillation frequencies. If such components are present, it indicates
that the frequency compensation is less than ideal or that the machine inertia value is incorrect.

Testing DECS-450
9597100990 24-5

PSS test signal configuration settings are provided on the Time Response screen shown in Figure 24-3.
Click the RTM Analysis screen’s Time Response button to access this screen.

Signal Input
Signal input selections determine the point in the PSS circuitry where the test signal is applied. Test
points include AVR Summing, PSS Comp Frequency, PSS Electric Power, PSS Derived Speed, Manual
Summing, and var/PF.
A time delay is provided to delay the start of a PSS test after the Time Response screen Start button is
clicked.

Figure 24-3. Time Response Screen

Test Signal Characteristics

Test signal characteristics (magnitude, offset, frequency, and duration) may be adjusted according to the
type of test signal selected.

Magnitude
The test signal magnitude is expressed as a percentage and excludes the gain of externally-applied
signals.

Offset
A dc offset can be applied to the PSS test signal. The offset is expressed as a per-unit value used in
proper context wherever the test signal is applied. A dc offset cannot be applied to a Step test signal.

Frequency
The test signal frequency can be adjusted as desired for Step and Sine test signals. See Swept Sine Test
Signal for information about configuring the frequency attributes of swept sine test signals.

Duration
A duration setting controls the total test duration for Sine and External test signals. For Step test signals,
the duration setting determines the “on” period of the signal. The duration setting does not apply to Swept
Sine signals.

Swept Sine Test Signals

Swept Sine test signals employ a unique set of characteristics that include the sweep style, frequency
step, and start/stop frequencies.
Sweep Type
A Swept Sine test signal may be configured as linear or logarithmic.
Start and Stop Frequencies
The range of a Swept Sine test signal is determined by Start Frequency and Stop Frequency settings.

DECS-450 Testing
24-6 9597100990

Frequency Step
The frequency of a Swept Sine test signal is incremented according to the sweep type used. For linear
sweeps, the test signal frequency is incremented by Frequency Step every half-cycle of the system
frequency. For logarithmic sweeps, the test signal frequency is multiplied by 1.0 plus Frequency Step
every half-cycle of the system frequency.

Step Response Analysis

A standard technique for verifying overall system response is through step response measurements. This
involves exciting the local electromechanical oscillation modes through a fixed step change in the AVR
reference. Damping and frequency of oscillation can be measured directly from recordings of generator
speed and power for different operating conditions and settings. Normally this test is performed with
variations of the following:
• Generator active and reactive power loading
• Stabilizer gain
• System configuration (e.g., lines out of service)
• Stabilizer parameters (e.g., phase lead, frequency compensation)
As the stabilizer gain is increased, the damping should increase continuously while the natural frequency
of oscillation should remain relatively constant. Large changes in the frequency of oscillation, a lack of
improvement in damping, or the emergence of new modes of oscillation are all indications of problems
with the selected settings.
Step response testing is performed using the Step Response Analysis screen. This screen (Figure 24-4)
is accessed by clicking the Step Response button in the RTM Analysis window. The Step Response
Analysis screen consists of:
• Metering fields: average generator voltage, vars, total PF, field voltage, and field current
• An alarms window that displays any active alarms possibly triggered by a step change
• A checkbox to select triggering of a data record when a setpoint step change is performed
• Tabs for controlling the application of step changes to the AVR, FCR, FVR, var, and PF setpoints.
Tab functions are described in the following paragraphs.

Note
If logging is in progress, another log cannot be triggered.
Response characteristics displayed on the Step Response Analysis screen
are not automatically updated when the DECS-450 operating mode is
switched externally. The screen must be manually updated by exiting and then
reopening the screen.

AVR, FCR, and FVR Tabs

The AVR, FCR, and FVR tabs have similar controls that enable the application of step changes to their
respective setpoints. The AVR tab controls are illustrated in Figure 24-4. AVR, FCR, and FVR tab controls
are described below.
Step changes that increase or decrease the setpoint are applied by clicking the increment (up arrow) or
decrement (down arrow) button. Step-change setting fields (one for increase and one for decrease)
establish the percent change in the setpoint that occurs when the increment or decrement button is
clicked. Three read-only fields indicate the current setpoint, a one-step increase in setpoint, a one-step
decrease in setpoint, and the original setpoint. A button is provided to return the setpoint to its original
value, which is displayed in the read-only field adjacent to the button.

Testing DECS-450
9597100990 24-7

Figure 24-4. Step Response Analysis - AVR Tab

Var and PF Tabs

The var and PF tabs have similar controls that apply step changes to their respective setpoints. PF tab
controls are illustrated in Figure 24-5. Var and PF tab controls are described below.

Figure 24-5. Step Response Analysis - Var Tab

The setpoint may be adjusted by clicking the increment (up arrow) or decrement (down arrow) button.
Two Var Step Point settings are provided. Clicking the right-arrow button beside the fields initiates a step
change to the corresponding setpoint value. A button is provided to return the setpoint to its original
value, which is displayed in the read-only field adjacent to the button.

Analysis Options
Options are provided to arrange the layout of plots and adjust graph display.

Layout Tab
Up to six data plots may be displayed in three different layouts on the RTM screen. Check the Cursors
Enabled box to enable cursors used for measuring between two horizontal points. See Figure 24-6.

Graph Display Tab

Options are provided to adjust graph history and poll rate. Graph height sets the displayed graphs to a
fixed height in pixels. When the Auto Size box is checked, all displayed graphs are automatically sized to
equally fit the available space. History length is selectable from 1 to 30 minutes. Poll rate is adjustable
between 100 to 500 milliseconds. Lowering the history and poll rate may improve PC performance while
plotting.
Check the Sync Graph Scrolling box to sync scrolling of all graphs when any horizontal scroll bar is
moved. See Figure 24-7.
DECS-450 Testing
24-8 9597100990

Figure 24-6. Analysis Options Screen, Layout Tab

Figure 24-7. Analysis Options Screen, Graph Display Tab

Testing DECS-450
9597100990 25-1

25 • CAN Communication
Introduction
The DECS-450 provides two CAN Bus interfaces, designated as CAN 1 and CAN 2.
CAN Bus interface 1 facilitates communication between the DECS-450 and optional modules such as the
Contact Expansion Module (CEM-2020) and Analog Expansion Module (AEM-2020). Refer to the Contact
Expansion Module and Analog Expansion Module sections for more information.
CAN Bus interface 2 enables the DECS-450 to provide generator and system parameters to a generator
controller such as the Basler DGC-2020HD. CAN 2 also permits DECS-450 setpoint and mode control
from an external device connected to the CAN. The parameters sent over CAN 2 are listed in this
chapter.
Both CAN Bus interfaces use the SAE J1939 messaging protocol.
Refer to the Communication section for CAN port configuration and the Terminals and Connectors
section for wiring.

CAN Parameters
Supported CAN parameters are listed in Table 25-1. The first column contains the parameter group
number (PGN), the second column contains the parameter name, the third column contains the unit of
measurement for a parameter, the fourth column contains the suspect parameter number (SPN), and the
fifth column contains the broadcast rate for a parameter.
Table 25-1. CAN Parameters
Broadcast
PGN Name Units SPN
Rate
0xFDA6 Generator Excitation Field Voltage Volts 3380 100 ms
Generator Excitation Field Current Amps 3381
Generator Output Voltage Bias Percentage Percent 3382
0xFDA7 Voltage Regulator Load Compensation Mode n/a 3375 1s
Voltage Regulator var/PF Operating Mode n/a 3376
Voltage Regulator Underfrequency Compensation Enabled n/a 3377
Voltage Regulator Soft Start State n/a 3378
Voltage Regulator Enabled n/a 3379
0xFDFD Generator Phase CA L-L AC RMS Voltage Volts 2443 100 ms
(Unsupported) n/a 2247
Generator Phase C AC RMS Current Amps 2451
0xFE00 Generator Phase BC L-L AC RMS Voltage Volts 2442 100 ms
(Unsupported) n/a 2446
Generator Phase B AC RMS Current Amps 2450
0xFE03 Generator Phase AB L-L AC RMS Voltage Volts 2441 100 ms
(Unsupported) n/a 2445
Generator Phase A AC RMS Current Amps 2249
0xFE06 Generator Average L-L AC RMS Voltage Volts 2440 100 ms
(Unsupported) n/a 2444
Generator Average AC Frequency Hertz 2436
Generator Average AC RMS Current Amps 2448
0xFE04 Generator Total Reactive Power var 2456 100 ms
Generator Overall PF n/a 2464
Generator Overall PF Lagging n/a 2518

DECS-450 CAN Communication

25-2 9597100990

Broadcast
PGN Name Units SPN
Rate
0xFE05 Generator Total Real Power Watts 2452 100 ms
Generator Total Apparent Power VA 2460
0xFF00 Contact I/O Status n/a n/a 100 ms
Start Input - Byte 0, bits 0,1
Stop Input - Byte 0, bits 2,3
Input 1 - Byte 0, bits 4,5
Input 2 - Byte 0, bits 6,7
Input 3 - Byte 1, bits 0,1
Input 4 - Byte 1, bits 2,3
Input 5 - Byte 1, bits 4,5
Input 6 - Byte 1, bits 6,7
Input 7 - Byte 2, bits 0,1
Input 8 - Byte 2, bits 2,3
Input 9 - Byte 2, bits 4,5
Input 10 - Byte 2, bits 6,7
Input 11 - Byte 3, bits 0,1
Input 12 - Byte 3, bits 2,3
Input 13 - Byte 3, bits 4,5
Input 14 - Byte 3, bits 6,7
Watchdog Output - Byte 4, bits 0,1
Output 1 - Byte 4, bits 2,3
Output 2 - Byte 4, bits 4,5
Output 3 - Byte 4, bits 6,7
Output 4 - Byte 5, bits 0,1
Output 5 - Byte 5, bits 2,3
Output 6 - Byte 5, bits 4,5
Output 7 - Byte 5, bits 6,7
Output 8 - Byte 6, bits 0,1
Output 9 - Byte 6, bits 2,3
Output 10 - Byte 6, bits 4,5
Output 11 - Byte 6, bits 6,7
Notes
0 = Open
1 = Closed
2 = Reserved
3 = Reserved
0xFF01 Requested Generator Excitation Field Voltage (FVR Setpoint) Volts 3380 n/a
Requested Generator Excitation Field Current (FCR Setpoint) Amps 3381 n/a
0xFF02 Requested Operating Mode n/a n/a 100 ms
Byte 0, Bits 0-2
Notes
1 = FCR
2 = AVR
3 = VAR
4 = PF
5 = FVR
Will not override if held by logic.
Byte 0, Bits 3–7 unused
Bytes 1–7 unused
0xF015 Requested Generator Total AC Reactive Power (var Setpoint) var 3383 n/a
Requested Generator Overall PF (PF Setpoint) n/a 3384 n/a
Requested Generator Overall PF Lagging (PF Setpoint) n/a 3385 n/a
0xF01C Requested Generator Average L-L AC RMS Voltage Volts 3386 n/a
(AVR Setpoint)

CAN Communication DECS-450

9597100990 25-3

Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

The DECS-450 sends an unsolicited message for a currently active diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
Previously active DTCs are available upon request. Active and previously active DTCs can be cleared on
request. Table 25-2 lists the diagnostic information that the DECS-450 obtains over the CAN Bus
interface.
DTCs are reported in coded diagnostic information that includes the Suspect Parameter Number (SPN),
Failure Mode Identifier (FMI), and Occurrence Count (OC) as listed in Table 3. All parameters have an
SPN and are used to display or identify the items for which diagnostics are being reported. The FMI
defines the type of failure detected in the subsystem identified by an SPN. The reported problem may not
be an electrical failure but a subsystem condition needing to be reported to an operator or technician. The
OC contains the number of times that a fault has gone from active to previously active.
Table 25-2. Diagnostic Information Obtained Over CAN Bus Interface 2
PGN Name
0xEA00 Request DTCs
0xFECA Currently Active DTCs
0xFECB Previously Active DTCs
0xFECC Clear Previously Active DTCs
0xFED3 Clear Active DTCs
Table 25-3. Reported DTCs

SPN hex (decimal) Name FMI hex (decimal) *

0x263 (611) Loss of Sensing Fault 0x00 (0)
0x264 (612) EDM Fault 0x0E (14)
0xD34 (3380) Field Overvoltage Fault 0x00 (0)
0xD35 (3381) Field Overcurrent Fault 0x00 (0)
0x988 (2440) Overvoltage Fault 0x0F (15)
0x988 (2440) Undervoltage Fault 0x11 (17)
0x998 (2456) Loss of Excitation Fault 0x11 (17)
* 0 = Data valid but above normal range, most severe.
14 = Special instructions.
15 = Data valid but above normal range, least severe.
17 = Data valid but below normal range, least severe.

DECS-450 CAN Communication

25-4 9597100990

CAN Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-1

26 • Modbus® Communication
Introduction
This document describes the Modbus® communications protocol employed by DECS-450 systems and
how to exchange information with DECS-450 systems over a Modbus network. DECS-450 systems
communicate by emulating a subset of the Modicon 984 Programmable Controller.

Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices. Nonvolatile
memory is used to store information (such as settings) that needs to be
preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise restarted.
Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a physical limit on the
number of times they can be erased and written. In this product, the limit is
100,000 erase/write cycles. During product application, consideration should
be given to communications, logic, and other factors that may cause
frequent/repeated writes of settings or other information that is retained by the
product. Applications that result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce
the useable product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.
Modbus communications use a master-slave technique in which only the master can initiate a transaction.
This transaction is called a query. When appropriate, a slave (DECS-450) responds to the query. When a
Modbus master communicates with a slave, information is provided or requested by the master.
Information residing in the DECS-450 is grouped categorically as follows:
• General
• Binary Points
• Metering
• Limiters
• Setpoints
• Global Settings
• Relay Settings
• Protection Settings
• Gains
• Legacy Modbus
All supported data can be read as specified in the Register Table. Abbreviations are used in the Register
Table to indicate the register type. Register types are:
• Read/Write = RW
• Read Only = R
When a slave receives a query, the slave responds by either supplying the requested data to the master
or performing the requested action. A slave device never initiates communications on the Modbus and will
always generate a response to the query unless certain error conditions occur. The DECS-450 is
designed to communicate on the Modbus network only as slave devices.
Refer to the Communication chapter for Modbus communication setup and the Terminals and Connectors
chapter for wiring.

Message Structure
Device Address Field
The device address field contains the unique Modbus address of the slave being queried. The addressed
slave repeats the address in the device address field of the response message. This field is 1 byte.

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-2 9597100990

Although Modbus protocol limits a device address from 1 - 247. The address is user-selectable at
installation and can be altered during real-time operation.

Function Code Field

The function code field in the query message defines the action to be taken by the addressed slave. This
field is echoed in the response message and is altered by setting the most significant bit (MSB) of the
field to 1 if the response is an error response. This field is 1 byte in length.
The DECS-450 maps all available data into the Modicon 984 holding register address space supports the
following function codes:
• Function 03 (03 hex) - read holding registers
• Function 06 (06 hex) - preset single register
• Function 08 (08 hex), subfunction 00 - diagnostics: return query data
• Function 08 (08 hex), subfunction 01 - diagnostics: restart communications option
• Function 08 (08 hex), subfunction 04 - diagnostics: force listen only mode
• Function 16 (10 hex) - preset multiple registers

Data Block Field

The query data block contains additional information needed by the slave to perform the requested
function. The response data block contains data collected by the slave for the queried function. An error
response will substitute an exception response code for the data block. The length of this field varies with
each query.

Error Check Field

The error check field provides a method for the slave to validate the integrity of the query message
contents and allows the master to confirm the validity of response message contents. This field is 2 bytes.

Modbus Modes of Operation

A standard Modbus network offers the remote terminal unit (RTU) transmission mode and Modbus TCP
mode for communication. DECS-450 systems support the Modbus TCP mode and RS-485 mode at the
same time. To enable editing over Modbus TCP, or RS-485, the unsecured access level for the port must
be configured to the appropriate access level. See the Security chapter of this manual for more
information on security and access levels. These two modes of operation are described below.
A master can query slaves individually or universally. A universal ("broadcast") query, when allowed,
evokes no response from any slave device. If a query to an individual slave device requests actions
unable to be performed by the slave, the slave response message contains an exception response code
defining the error detected. Exception response codes are quite often enhanced by the information found
in the "Error Details" block of holding registers.
The Modbus protocol defines a simple Protocol Data Unit (PDU) independent of the underlying
communication layers. The mapping of the Modbus protocol on specific buses or networks can introduce
some additional fields on the Application Data Unit (ADU). See Figure 26-1.

ADU

Additional address Function code Data Error Check

PDU
Figure 26-1. General Modbus Frame
The client that initiates a Modbus transaction builds the Modbus Application Data Unit. The function code
indicates to the server which kind of action to perform.

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-3

Modbus® Over Serial Line

Message Structure
Master initiated queries and DECS-450 responses share the same message structure. Each message is
comprised of four message fields. They are:
• Device Address (1 byte)
• Function Code (1 byte)
• Data Block (n bytes)
• Error Check field (2 bytes)
Each 8-bit byte in a message contains two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. The message is transmitted in a
continuous stream with the LSB of each byte of data transmitted first. Transmission of each 8-bit data
byte occurs with one start bit and either one or two stop bits. Parity checking is performed, when enabled,
and can be either odd or even. The transmission baud rate is user-selectable, and can be set at
installation and altered during real-time operation. The DECS-450 Modbus supports baud rates up to
115200. The factory default baud rate is 19200.
DECS-450 systems support RS-485 compatible serial interfaces. This interface is accessible from the left
side panel of the DECS-450.
Message Framing and Timing Considerations
When receiving a message via the RS-485 communication port, the DECS-450 requires an inter-byte
latency of 3.5 character times before considering the message complete.
Once a valid query is received, the DECS-450 waits a specified amount of time before responding. This
time delay is set on the Modbus Setup screen under Communications in BESTCOMSPlus®. This
parameter contains a value from 10 - 10,000 milliseconds. The default value is 10 milliseconds.
Table 26-1 provides the response message transmission time (in seconds) and 3.5 character times (in
milliseconds) for various message lengths and baud rates.
Table 26-1. Timing Considerations

3.5 Character Time Message Tx Time (s)

Baud Rate (ms) 128 Bytes 256 Bytes
1200 32.08 1.17 2.34
2400 16.04 0.59 1.17
4800 8.021 0.29 0.59
9600 4.0104 0.15 0.29
19200 2.0052 0.07 0.15
38400 1.0026 0.04 0.07
57600 0.6684 0.02 0.04
115200 0.3342 0.01 0.02

Modbus on TCP/IP
Application Data Unit
The following describes the encapsulation of a Modbus request or response when it is carried on a
Modbus TCP/IP network. See Figure 26-2.

Modbus TCP/IP ADU

MBAP Header Function code Data

PDU

Figure 26-2. Modbus Request/Response Over TCP/IP

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication
26-4 9597100990

A dedicated header is used on TCP/IP to identify the Modbus Application Data Unit. It is called the MBAP
header (Modbus Application Protocol header).
This header provides some differences compared to the Modbus RTU application data unit used on a
serial line:
• The Modbus ‘slave address’ field usually used on Modbus Serial Line is replaced by a single byte
‘Unit Identifier’ within the MBAP header. The ‘Unit Identifier’ is used to communicate via devices
such as bridges, routers, and gateways that use a single IP address to support multiple
independent Modbus end units.
• All Modbus requests and responses are designed in such a way that the recipient can verify that
a message is finished. For function codes where the Modbus PDU has a fixed length, the function
code alone is sufficient. For function codes carrying a variable amount of data in the request or
response, the data field includes a byte count.
• When Modbus is carried over TCP, additional length information is carried in the MBAP header to
allow the recipient to recognize message boundaries even if the message has been split into
multiple packets for transmission. The existence of explicit and implicit length rules and use of a
CRC-32 error check code (on Ethernet) results in an infinitesimal chance of undetected corruption
to a request or response message.

MBAP Header Description

The MBAP Header contains the fields listed in Table 26-2.
Table 26-2. MBAP Header Fields
Fields Length Description Client Server
Transaction 2 Bytes Identification of a Modbus Initialized by Recopied by the
Identifier request/response transaction. the client. server from the
received request.
Protocol 2 Bytes 0 = Modbus protocol. Initialized by Recopied by the
Identifier the client. server from the
received request.
Length 2 Bytes Number of following bytes. Initialized by Initialized by the
the client server (response).
(request).
Unit Identifier 1 Byte Identification of a remote Initialized by Recopied by the
slave connected on a serial the client. server from the
line or on other buses. received request.
The header is 7 bytes long:
• Transaction Identifier – Used for transaction pairing, the Modbus server copies in the response
the transaction identifier of the request.
• Protocol Identifier – Used for intra-system multiplexing. The Modbus protocol is identified by the
value 0.
• Length – A byte count of the following fields, including the Unit Identifier and data fields.
• Unit Identifier – Used for intra-system routing purpose. It is typically used to communicate to a
Modbus or a Modbus serial line slave through a gateway between an Ethernet TCP/IP network
and a Modbus serial line. This field is set by the Modbus Client in the request and must be
returned with the same value in the response by the server.
Note: All Modbus TCP ADU are sent via TCP on registered port 502.

Error Handling and Exception Responses

Any query received that contains a non-existent device address, a framing error, or CRC error is ignored.
No response is transmitted. Queries addressed to the DECS-450 with an unsupported function or illegal

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-5

values in the data block result in an error response message with an exception response code. The
exception response codes supported by the DECS-450 are provided in Table 26-3.
Table 26-3. Supported Exception Response Codes
Code Name Description
01 Illegal Function The query Function/Subfunction Code is unsupported;
query read of more than 125 registers; query preset of
more than 100 registers.
02 Illegal Data A register referenced in the data block does not support
Address queried read/write; query preset of a subset of a numerical
register group.
03 Illegal Data Value A preset register data block contains an incorrect number
of bytes or one or more data values out of range.

DECS-450 Modbus® via Ethernet

Modbus can communicate through Ethernet if the IP address of the DECS-450 is configured as described
in the Communications chapter of this manual.

Detailed Message Query and Response for RTU Transmission Mode

A detailed description of DECS-450 supported message queries and responses is provided in the
following paragraphs.

Read Holding Registers

Query
This query message requests a register or block of registers to be read. The data block contains the
starting register address and the quantity of registers to be read. A register address of N will read holding
register N+1. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.
Device Address
Function Code = 03 (hex)
Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo
No. of Registers Hi
No. of Registers Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check
The number of registers cannot exceed 125 without causing an error response with the exception code
for an illegal function.

Response
The response message contains the data queried. The data block contains the block length in bytes
followed by the data (one Data Hi byte and one Data Lo byte) for each requested register.
Reading an unassigned holding register returns a value of zero.
Device Address
Function Code = 03 (hex)
Byte Count
Data Hi (For each requested register, there is one Data Hi and one Data Lo.)
Data Lo
.
.
Data Hi
Data Lo
DECS-450 Modbus® Communication
26-6 9597100990

CRC Hi error check

CRC Lo error check

Return Query Data

This query contains data to be returned (looped back) in the response. The response and query
messages should be identical. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is
returned.
Device Address
Function Code = 08 (hex)
Subfunction Hi = 00 (hex)
Subfunction Lo = 00 (hex)
Data Hi = xx (don't care)
Data Lo = xx (don't care)
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Restart Communications Option

This query causes the remote communications function of the DECS-450 to restart, terminating an active
listen only mode of operation. No effect is made upon primary relay operations. Only the remote
communications function is affected. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response
message is returned.
If the DECS-450 receives this query while in the listen only mode, no response message is generated.
Otherwise, a response message identical to the query message is transmitted prior to the
communications restart.
Device Address
Function Code = 08 (hex)
Subfunction Hi = 00 (hex)
Subfunction Lo = 01 (hex)
Data Hi = xx (don't care)
Data Lo = xx (don't care)
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Listen Only Mode

This query forces the addressed DECS-450 to the listen only mode for Modbus communications, isolating
it from other devices on the network. No responses are returned.
While in the listen only mode, the DECS-450 continues to monitor all queries. The DECS-450 does not
respond to any other query until the listen only mode is removed. All write requests with a query to Preset
Multiple Registers (Function Code = 16) are also ignored. When the DECS-450 receives the restart
communications query, the listen only mode is removed.

Device Address
Function Code = 08 (hex)
Subfunction Hi = 00 (hex)
Subfunction Lo = 04 (hex)
Data Hi = xx (don't care)
Data Lo = xx (don't care)
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Preset Multiple Registers

A preset multiple registers query could address multiple registers in one slave or multiple slaves. If the
query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-7

Query
A Preset Multiple Register query message requests a register or block of registers to be written. The data
block contains the starting address and the quantity of registers to be written, followed by the Data Block
byte count and data. The DECS-450 will perform the write when the device address in query is a
broadcast address or the same as the DECS-450 Modbus Unit ID (device address).
A register address of N will write Holding Register N+1.
Data will cease to be written if any of the following exceptions occur.
• Queries to write to Read Only registers result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal
Data Address”.
• Queries attempting to write more than 100 registers cause an error response with Exception Code
“Illegal Function”.
• An incorrect Byte Count will result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data Value”.
• There are several instances of registers that are grouped together to collectively represent a single
numerical DECS-450 data value (i.e. - floating point data, 32-bit integer data, and strings). A query to
write a subset of such a register group will result in an error response with Exception Code “Illegal
Data Address”.
• A query to write a not allowed value (out of range) to a register results in an error response with
Exception Code of “Illegal Data Value”.
Device Address
Function Code = 10 (hex)
Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo
No. of Registers Hi
No. of Registers Lo
Byte Count
Data Hi
Data Lo
.
.
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check
Response
The response message echoes the starting address and the number of registers. There is no response
message when the query is a broadcast (device address = 0).

Device Address
Function Code = 10 (hex)
Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo
No. of Registers Hi
No. of Registers Lo
CRC Hi Error Check
CRC Lo Error Check

Preset Single Register

A Preset Single Register query message requests a single register to be written. If the query is a
broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.
Note: Only data types INT16, INT8, UINT16, UINT8, and String (not longer than 2 bytes), can be preset
by this function.

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-8 9597100990

Query
Data will cease to be written if any of the following exceptions occur.
• Queries to write to Read Only registers result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal
Data Address”.
• A query to write an unallowed value (out of range) to a register results in an error response with
Exception Code of “Illegal Data Value”.
Device Address
Function Code = 06 (hex)
Address Hi
Address Lo
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Response
The response message echoes the Query message after the register has been altered.

Data Formats
DECS-450 systems support the following data types:
• Data types mapped to 2 registers
o Unsigned Integer 32 (Uint32)
o Floating Point (Float)
o Strings maximum 4 characters long (String)
• Data types mapped to 1 register
o Unsigned Integer 16 (Uint16)
o Unsigned Integer 8 (Uint8)
o Strings maximum 2 characters long (String)
• Data types mapped to more than 2 registers
o Strings longer than 4 characters (String)

Floating Point Data Format (Float)

The Modbus floating point data format uses two consecutive holding registers to represent a data value.
The first register contains the low-order 16 bits of the following 32-bit format:
• MSB is the sign bit for the floating-point value (0 = positive).
• The next 8 bits are the exponent biased by 127 decimal.
• The 23 LSBs comprise the normalized mantissa. The most-significant bit of the mantissa is always
assumed to be 1 and is not explicitly stored, yielding an effective precision of 24 bits.
The value of the floating-point number is obtained by multiplying the binary mantissa times two raised to
the power of the unbiased exponent. The assumed bit of the binary mantissa has the value of 1.0, with
the remaining 23 bits providing a fractional value. Table 26-4 shows the floating-point format.
Table 26-4. Floating Point Format
Sign Exponent + 127 Mantissa
1 Bit 8 Bits 23 Bits

The floating-point format allows for values ranging from approximately 8.43X10-37 to 3.38X1038. A
floating-point value of all zeroes is the value zero. A floating-point value of all ones (not a number)
signifies a value currently not applicable or disabled.

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-9

Example: The value 95,800 represented in floating-point format is hexadecimal 47BB1C00. This number
will read from two consecutive holding registers as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) hex 1C
K (Lo Byte) hex 00
K+1(Hi Byte) hex 47
K+1(Lo Byte) hex BB
The same byte alignments are required to write.

Long Integer Data Format (Uint32)

The Modbus long integer data format uses two consecutive holding registers to represent a 32-bit data
value. The first register contains the low-order 16 bits and the second register contains the high-order 16
bits.
Example: The value 95,800 represented in long integer format is hexadecimal 0x00017638. This number
will read from two consecutive holding registers as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) hex 76
K (Lo Byte) hex 38
K+1(Hi Byte) hex 00
K+1(Lo Byte) hex 01
The same byte alignments are required to write.

Integer Data Format (Uint16) or Bit-Mapped Variables in Uint16 Format

The Modbus integer data format uses a single holding register to represent a 16-bit data value.
Example: The value 4660 represented in integer format is hexadecimal 0x1234. This number will read from
a holding register as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) hex 12
K (Lo Byte) hex 34
The same byte alignments are required to write.
The Uint16 Data Format is listed in Binary Points (Table 26-7), below.
Example: Register 900 occupies 16 rows in the Register Table where each row gives the name of specific
bit-mapped data such as 900-0 indicates bit 0 of register 900 is mapped to RF-TRIG.

Short Integer Data Format/Byte Character Data Format (Uint8)

The Modbus short integer data format uses a single holding register to represent an 8-bit data value. The
holding register high byte will always be zero.
Example: The value 132 represented in short integer format is hexadecimal 0x84. This number will read
from a holding register as follows:
Holding Register Value
K (Hi Byte) hex 00
K (Lo Byte) hex 84
The same byte alignments are required to write.

String Data Format (String)

The Modbus string data format uses one or more holding registers to represent a sequence, or string, of
character values. If the string contains a single character, the holding register high byte will contain the
ASCII character code and the low byte will be zero.

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-10 9597100990

Example: The string “PASSWORD” represented in string format will read as follows:
Holding Register Value
K (Hi Byte) ‘P’
K (Lo Byte) ‘A’
K+1(Hi Byte) ‘S’
K+1(Lo Byte) ‘S’
K+2(Hi Byte) ‘W’
K+2(Lo Byte) ‘O’
K+3(Hi Byte) ‘R’
K+3(Lo Byte) ‘D’

Example: If the above string is changed to “P”, the new string will read as follows:
Holding Register Value
K (Hi Byte) ‘P’
K (Lo Byte) hex 00
K+1(Hi Byte) hex 00
K+1(Lo Byte) hex 00
K+2(Hi Byte) hex 00
K+2(Lo Byte) hex 00
K+3(Hi Byte) hex 00
K+3(Lo Byte) hex 00
The same byte alignments are required to write.

CRC Error Check

This field contains a two-byte CRC value for transmission error detection. The master first calculates the
CRC and appends it to the query message. The DECS-450 system recalculates the CRC value for the
received query and performs a comparison to the query CRC value to determine if a transmission error
has occurred. If so, no response message is generated. If no transmission error has occurred, the slave
calculates a new CRC value for the response message and appends it to the message for transmission.
The CRC calculation is performed using all bytes of the device address, function code, and data block
fields. A 16-bit CRC-register is initialized to all 1's. Then each eight-bit byte of the message is used in the
following algorithm:
First, exclusive-OR the message byte with the low-order byte of the CRC-register. The result, stored in
the CRC-register, will then be right-shifted eight times. The CRC-register MSB is zero-filled with each
shift. After each shift, the CRC-register LSB is examined. If the LSB is a 1, the CRC-register is
exclusive-ORed with the fixed polynomial value A001 (hex) prior to the next shift. Once all bytes of the
message have undergone the above algorithm, the CRC-register will contain the message CRC value to
be placed in the error check field.

Secure DECS-450 Login via Modbus

To login to the DECS-450 via Modbus, write the string username|password to the Secure Login register
(40500). Substitute “username” with the user name of the desired access level, include the pipe “|”
symbol, and substitute “password” with the password of the chosen access level. To view the current
access level, read the Current Access register (45420). Write any value to the Logout register (45417) to
log out of the DECS-450. Upon disconnecting from Modbus over TCP/IP, the user is automatically logged
out of the DECS-450. However, upon disconnecting from Modbus over serial line, the user remains
logged in.

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-11

Modbus Parameters
General
General parameters are listed in Table 26-5.
Table 26-5. General Group Parameters
Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range
System Data Model Number 45000 String 64 R 0–64
System Data App Version Information 45032 String 64 R 0–64
System Data App Sub-version Version 45064 String 64 R 0–64
System Data Boot Version Information 45096 String 64 R 0–64
System Data Firmware Part Number 45128 String 64 R 0–64
Time Date 45160 String 16 R 0–16
Time Time 45168 String 16 R 0–16
Unit Information Style Number 45176 String 32 R 0–32
Unit Information Serial Number 45192 String 32 R 0–32
DECS Control Control Output Var PF 45208 Float 4 R n/a
DECS Control Control Output OEL 45210 Float 4 R n/a
DECS Control Control Output UEL 45212 Float 4 R n/a
DECS Control Control Output SCL 45214 Float 4 R n/a
DECS Control Control Output AVR 45216 Float 4 R n/a
DECS Control Control Output FCR 45218 Float 4 R n/a
DECS Control Control Output FVR 45220 Float 4 R n/a
DECS Control Invert Output (SCT/PPT) 45222 Uint32 4 RW Disabled=0 Enabled=1

Security
Table 26-6. Security Group Parameters
Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range
Security Secure Login 45400 String 34 RW 0–34
Security Logout 45417 String 5 RW 0–5
Security Current Access 45420 Uint32 4 R No Access=0,
Read Access=1
Control Access=2
Operator Access=3
Setting Access=4
Design Access=5
Administrator Access=6
Security Save Changes 45422 Uint32 4 RW n/a

Binary Points
Table 26-7. Binary Point Group Parameters
Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range
System Data RF trig 45800 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
System Data PU logic 45800 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
System Data Trip logic 45800 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
System Data Logic trig 45800 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
System Data Breaker Status 45800 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Real Time Clock Alarm 45800 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Date Time Set Alarm 45800 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Firmware Change Alarm 45800 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Frequency out of range alarm 45800 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Ethernet link lost alarm 45800 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms USB com alarm 45800 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-12 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

Alarms IRIG sync lost alarm 45800 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Logic equal none alarm 45800 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms No user setting alarm 45800 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms NTP sync lost alarm 45800 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Microprocessor Reset Alarm 45800 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 1 45801 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 2 45801 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 3 45801 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 4 45801 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 5 45801 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 6 45801 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 7 45801 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 8 45801 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 9 45801 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 10 45801 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 11 45801 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 12 45801 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 13 45801 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 14 45801 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 15 45801 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Programmable Alarm 16 45801 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Underfrequency V/Hz Alarm 45802 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms OEL alarm 45802 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms UEL alarm 45802 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Failed to build up alarm 45802 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms SCL alarm 45802 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms PSS voltage unbalanced alarm 45802 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms PSS current unbalanced alarm 45802 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms PSS power below threshold alarm 45802 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms PSS speed failed alarm 45802 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms PSS voltage limit alarm 45802 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Transfer watchdog alarm 45802 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Crowbar activated 45802 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Var limiter active alarm 45802 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Voltage Matching active 45802 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Invalid logic alarm 45802 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarms Control Power Input Failure 45802 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Alarm Report Alarm Output 45803 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Start Input 45803 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Stop Input 45803 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 1 45803 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 2 45803 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 3 45803 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 4 45803 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 5 45803 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 6 45803 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 7 45803 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 8 45803 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 9 45803 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 10 45803 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 11 45803 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-13

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

Contact Inputs Input 12 45803 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 13 45803 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Inputs Input 14 45804 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Watchdog Output 45804 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 1 45804 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 2 45804 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 3 45804 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 4 45804 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 5 45804 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 6 45804 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 7 45804 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 8 45804 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 9 45804 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 10 45804 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Outputs Output 11 45804 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Hardware Ports Field Short Circuit Status 45804 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 1 45804 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 2 45804 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 3 45805 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 4 45805 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 5 45805 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 6 45805 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Manual FCR only 45805 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Droop disable 45805 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Cross-current compensation disable 45805 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Line drop disable 45805 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Parallel enable LM 45805 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Auto transfer enable 45805 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Soft start select group 2 45805 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control PSS select group 2 45805 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control OEL select group 2 45805 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control UEL select group 2 45805 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control SCL select group 2 45805 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Protection select group 2 45805 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control PID select group 2 45806 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Var PF selection 45806 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control DECS start stop (external) 45806 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control DECS manual auto 45806 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Null balance 45806 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control DECS pre-position 45806 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Var limiter select group 2 45806 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Pre-position 1 active 45806 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Pre-position 2 active 45806 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Pre-position 3 active 45806 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Var active 45806 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control PF active 45806 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control FVR active 45806 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control FCR active 45806 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Manual active 45806 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Auto active 45806 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS PSS Meter PSS active 45807 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-14 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

DECS Regulator Meter Setpoint at lower limit 45807 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Regulator Meter Setpoint at upper limit 45807 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Field Overvoltage Block 45807 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Field Overvoltage Pickup 45807 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Field Overvoltage Trip 45807 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Field Overcurrent Block 45807 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Field Overcurrent Pickup 45807 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Field Overcurrent Trip 45807 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Exciter Diode Monitor Block open diode 45807 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Exciter Diode Monitor Pickup open diode 45807 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Exciter Diode Monitor Trip open diode 45807 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Exciter Diode Monitor Block shorted diode 45807 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Exciter Diode Monitor Pickup shorted diode 45807 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Exciter Diode Monitor Trip shorted diode 45807 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Loss of Sensing Block 45808 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Loss of Sensing Pickup 45808 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Loss of Sensing Trip 45808 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
25 Block 45808 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
25 Status 45808 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
25 VM1 status 45808 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
27P Block 45808 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
27P Pickup 45808 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
27P Trip 45808 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
59P Block 45808 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
59P Pickup 45808 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
59P Trip 45808 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
81O Block 45808 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
81O Pickup 45808 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
81O Trip 45808 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
81U-1 Block 45808 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
81U-1 Pickup 45809 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
81U-1 Trip 45809 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Gen Below 10 Hz Block 45809 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Gen Below 10 Hz Pickup 45809 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Gen Below 10 Hz Trip 45809 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
40Q Block 45809 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
40Q Pickup 45809 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
40Q Trip 45809 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
32R Block 45809 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
32R Pickup 45809 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
32R Trip 45809 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 1 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Pickup 45809 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 1 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Trip 45809 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 1 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Pickup 45809 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 1 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Trip 45809 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 1 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Pickup 45809 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 1 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Trip 45810 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 1 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Pickup 45810 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 1 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Trip 45810 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 2 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Pickup 45810 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 2 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Trip 45810 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-15

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

Configurable Protection 2 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Pickup 45810 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 2 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Trip 45810 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 2 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Pickup 45810 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 2 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Trip 45810 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 2 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Pickup 45810 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 2 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Trip 45810 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 3 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Pickup 45810 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 3 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Trip 45810 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 3 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Pickup 45810 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 3 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Trip 45810 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 3 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Pickup 45810 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 3 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Trip 45811 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 3 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Pickup 45811 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 3 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Trip 45811 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 4 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Pickup 45811 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 4 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Trip 45811 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 4 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Pickup 45811 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 4 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Trip 45811 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 4 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Pickup 45811 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 4 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Trip 45811 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 4 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Pickup 45811 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 4 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Trip 45811 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 5 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Pickup 45811 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 5 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Trip 45811 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 5 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Pickup 45811 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 5 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Trip 45811 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 5 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Pickup 45811 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 5 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Trip 45812 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 5 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Pickup 45812 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 5 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Trip 45812 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 6 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Pickup 45812 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 6 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Trip 45812 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 6 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Pickup 45812 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 6 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Trip 45812 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 6 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Pickup 45812 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 6 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Trip 45812 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 6 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Pickup 45812 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 6 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Trip 45812 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 7 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Pickup 45812 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 7 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Trip 45812 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 7 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Pickup 45812 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 7 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Trip 45812 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 7 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Pickup 45812 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 7 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Trip 45813 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 7 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Pickup 45813 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 7 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Trip 45813 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 8 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Pickup 45813 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 8 Configurable Protection Threshold 1 Trip 45813 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 8 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Pickup 45813 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 8 Configurable Protection Threshold 2 Trip 45813 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 8 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Pickup 45813 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-16 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

Configurable Protection 8 Configurable Protection Threshold 3 Trip 45813 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 8 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Pickup 45813 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Configurable Protection 8 Configurable Protection Threshold 4 Trip 45813 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Communication Failure 45813 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration Duplicate AEM 45813 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Input 1 Out of Range 45813 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Input 2 Out of Range 45813 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Input 3 Out of Range 45813 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Input 4 Out of Range 45814 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Input 5 Out of Range 45814 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Input 6 Out of Range 45814 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Input 7 Out of Range 45814 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Input 8 Out of Range 45814 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration RTD Input 1 Out of Range 45814 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration RTD Input 2 Out of Range 45814 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration RTD Input 3 Out of Range 45814 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration RTD Input 4 Out of Range 45814 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration RTD Input 5 Out of Range 45814 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration RTD Input 6 Out of Range 45814 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration RTD Input 7 Out of Range 45814 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration RTD Input 8 Out of Range 45814 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Output 1 Out of Range 45814 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Output 2 Out of Range 45814 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Output 3 Out of Range 45814 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Configuration AEM Output 4 Out of Range 45815 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 1 Threshold 1 Pickup 45815 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 1 Threshold 1 Trip 45815 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 1 Threshold 2 Pickup 45815 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 1 Threshold 2 Trip 45815 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 1 Threshold 3 Pickup 45815 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 1 Threshold 3 Trip 45815 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 1 Threshold 4 Pickup 45815 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 1 Threshold 4 Trip 45815 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 2 Threshold 1 Pickup 45815 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 2 Threshold 1 Trip 45815 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 2 Threshold 2 Pickup 45815 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 2 Threshold 2 Trip 45815 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 2 Threshold 3 Pickup 45815 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 2 Threshold 3 Trip 45815 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 2 Threshold 4 Pickup 45815 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 2 Threshold 4 Trip 45816 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 3 Threshold 1 Pickup 45816 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 3 Threshold 1 Trip 45816 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 3 Threshold 2 Pickup 45816 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 3 Threshold 2 Trip 45816 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 3 Threshold 3 Pickup 45816 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 3 Threshold 3 Trip 45816 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 3 Threshold 4 Pickup 45816 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 3 Threshold 4 Trip 45816 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 4 Threshold 1 Pickup 45816 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 4 Threshold 1 Trip 45816 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-17

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

AEM Protection 4 Threshold 2 Pickup 45816 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 4 Threshold 2 Trip 45816 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 4 Threshold 3 Pickup 45816 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 4 Threshold 3 Trip 45816 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 4 Threshold 4 Pickup 45816 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 4 Threshold 4 Trip 45817 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 5 Threshold 1 Pickup 45817 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 5 Threshold 1 Trip 45817 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 5 Threshold 2 Pickup 45817 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 5 Threshold 2 Trip 45817 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 5 Threshold 3 Pickup 45817 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 5 Threshold 3 Trip 45817 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 5 Threshold 4 Pickup 45817 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 5 Threshold 4 Trip 45817 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 6 Threshold 1 Pickup 45817 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 6 Threshold 1 Trip 45817 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 6 Threshold 2 Pickup 45817 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 6 Threshold 2 Trip 45817 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 6 Threshold 3 Pickup 45817 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 6 Threshold 3 Trip 45817 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 6 Threshold 4 Pickup 45817 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 6 Threshold 4 Trip 45818 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 7 Threshold 1 Pickup 45818 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 7 Threshold 1 Trip 45818 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 7 Threshold 2 Pickup 45818 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 7 Threshold 2 Trip 45818 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 7 Threshold 3 Pickup 45818 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 7 Threshold 3 Trip 45818 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 7 Threshold 4 Pickup 45818 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 7 Threshold 4 Trip 45818 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 8 Threshold 1 Pickup 45818 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 8 Threshold 1 Trip 45818 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 8 Threshold 2 Pickup 45818 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 8 Threshold 2 Trip 45818 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 8 Threshold 3 Pickup 45818 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 8 Threshold 3 Trip 45818 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 8 Threshold 4 Pickup 45818 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
AEM Protection 8 Threshold 4 Trip 45819 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 1 Threshold 1 Pickup 45819 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 1 Threshold 1 Trip 45819 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 1 Threshold 2 Pickup 45819 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 1 Threshold 2 Trip 45819 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 1 Threshold 3 Pickup 45819 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 1 Threshold 3 Trip 45819 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 1 Threshold 4 Pickup 45819 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 1 Threshold 4 Trip 45819 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 2 Threshold 1 Pickup 45819 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 2 Threshold 1 Trip 45819 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 2 Threshold 2 Pickup 45819 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 2 Threshold 2 Trip 45819 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 2 Threshold 3 Pickup 45819 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-18 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

RTD Protection 2 Threshold 3 Trip 45819 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 2 Threshold 4 Pickup 45819 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 2 Threshold 4 Trip 45820 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 3 Threshold 1 Pickup 45820 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 3 Threshold 1 Trip 45820 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 3 Threshold 2 Pickup 45820 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 3 Threshold 2 Trip 45820 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 3 Threshold 3 Pickup 45820 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 3 Threshold 3 Trip 45820 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 3 Threshold 4 Pickup 45820 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 3 Threshold 4 Trip 45820 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 4 Threshold 1 Pickup 45820 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 4 Threshold 1 Trip 45820 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 4 Threshold 2 Pickup 45820 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 4 Threshold 2 Trip 45820 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 4 Threshold 3 Pickup 45820 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 4 Threshold 3 Trip 45820 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 4 Threshold 4 Pickup 45820 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 4 Threshold 4 Trip 45821 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 5 Threshold 1 Pickup 45821 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 5 Threshold 1 Trip 45821 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 5 Threshold 2 Pickup 45821 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 5 Threshold 2 Trip 45821 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 5 Threshold 3 Pickup 45821 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 5 Threshold 3 Trip 45821 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 5 Threshold 4 Pickup 45821 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 5 Threshold 4 Trip 45821 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 6 Threshold 1 Pickup 45821 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 6 Threshold 1 Trip 45821 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 6 Threshold 2 Pickup 45821 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 6 Threshold 2 Trip 45821 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 6 Threshold 3 Pickup 45821 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 6 Threshold 3 Trip 45821 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 6 Threshold 4 Pickup 45821 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 6 Threshold 4 Trip 45822 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 7 Threshold 1 Pickup 45822 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 7 Threshold 1 Trip 45822 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 7 Threshold 2 Pickup 45822 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 7 Threshold 2 Trip 45822 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 7 Threshold 3 Pickup 45822 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 7 Threshold 3 Trip 45822 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 7 Threshold 4 Pickup 45822 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 7 Threshold 4 Trip 45822 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 8 Threshold 1 Pickup 45822 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 8 Threshold 1 Trip 45822 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 8 Threshold 2 Pickup 45822 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 8 Threshold 2 Trip 45822 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 8 Threshold 3 Pickup 45822 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 8 Threshold 3 Trip 45822 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 8 Threshold 4 Pickup 45822 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
RTD Protection 8 Threshold 4 Trip 45823 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-19

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

Thermocouple Protection 1 Threshold 1 Pickup 45823 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 1 Threshold 1 Trip 45823 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 1 Threshold 2 Pickup 45823 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 1 Threshold 2 Trip 45823 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 1 Threshold 3 Pickup 45823 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 1 Threshold 3 Trip 45823 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 1 Threshold 4 Pickup 45823 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 1 Threshold 4 Trip 45823 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 2 Threshold 1 Pickup 45823 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 2 Threshold 1 Trip 45823 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 2 Threshold 2 Pickup 45823 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 2 Threshold 2 Trip 45823 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 2 Threshold 3 Pickup 45823 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 2 Threshold 3 Trip 45823 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 2 Threshold 4 Pickup 45823 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Thermocouple Protection 2 Threshold 4 Trip 45824 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 1 45824 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 2 45824 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 3 45824 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 4 45824 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 5 45824 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 6 45824 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 7 45824 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 8 45824 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 9 45824 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Input 10 45824 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 1 45824 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 2 45824 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 3 45824 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 4 45824 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 5 45824 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 6 45825 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 7 45825 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 8 45825 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 9 45825 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 10 45825 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 11 45825 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 12 45825 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 13 45825 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 14 45825 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 15 45825 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 16 45825 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 17 45825 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 18 45825 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 19 45825 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 20 45825 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 21 45825 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 22 45826 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 23 45826 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Contact Expansion Module Output 24 45826 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Synchronizer Synchronization failed alarm 45826 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-20 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

Network Load Share Network load share disable 45826 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Unknown load share protocol version 45826 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share RCC active 45826 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 1 45826 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 2 45826 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 3 45826 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 4 45826 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 5 45826 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 6 45826 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 7 45826 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 8 45826 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 9 45826 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 10 45827 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 11 45827 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 12 45827 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 13 45827 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 14 45827 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 15 45827 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Receiving ID 16 45827 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Network load share configuration mismatch 45827 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share Network load share ID missing 45827 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 1 enabled 45827 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 2 enabled 45827 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 3 enabled 45827 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 4 enabled 45827 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 5 enabled 45827 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 6 enabled 45827 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 7 enabled 45827 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 8 enabled 45828 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 9 enabled 45828 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 10 enabled 45828 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 11 enabled 45828 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 12 enabled 45828 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 13 enabled 45828 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 14 enabled 45828 bit 6 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 15 enabled 45828 bit 7 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share ID 16 enabled 45828 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share NLS status 1 45828 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share NLS status 2 45828 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share NLS status 3 45828 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Network Load Share NLS status 4 45828 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
24 Block 45828 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
24 Pickup 45828 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
24 Trip 45828 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
24 24 alarm 45829 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control Transient boost active 45829 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
DECS Control KW threshold status 45829 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
More Alarms Bridge overtemperature warning 45829 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
More Alarms Bridge overtemperature alarm 45829 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Reserved 45829 bit 5 Uint16 2 R n/a
Reserved 45829 bit 6 Uint16 2 R n/a

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-21

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Range

Reserved 45829 bit 7 Uint16 2 R
Field Overtemperature Block 45829 bit 8 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Field Overtemperature Pickup 45829 bit 9 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Field Overtemperature Trip 45829 bit 10 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Loss of Field Isolation Block 45829 bit 11 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Transducer
Loss of Field Isolation Pickup 45829 bit 12 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Transducer
Loss of Field Isolation Trip 45829 bit 13 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Transducer
81U-2 Block 45829 bit 14 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
81U-2 Pickup 45829 bit 15 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
81U-2 Trip 45830 bit 0 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Analog Output Analog output 1 out of range 45830 bit 1 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Analog Output Analog output 2 out of range 45830 bit 2 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Analog Output Analog output 3 out of range 45830 bit 3 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Analog Output Analog output 4 out of range 45830 bit 4 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0
Analog Output Control output out of range 45830 bit 5 Uint16 2 R True=1 False=0

Metering
Table 26-8. Metering Group Parameters
Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range
Per Unit Meter Gen Vab pu 45900 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Vbc pu 45902 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Vca pu 45904 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Vavg pu 45906 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Ia pu 45908 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Ib pu 45910 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Ic pu 45912 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Iavg pu 45914 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Kw pu 45916 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Kva pu 45918 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Gen Kvar pu 45920 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Positive sequence voltage pu 45922 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Negative sequence voltage pu 45924 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Positive sequence current pu 45926 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Negative sequence current pu 45928 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Bus Vab pu 45930 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Bus Vbc pu 45932 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Bus Vca pu 45934 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Bus vavg pu 45936 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Voltage difference pu 45938 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Reserved 45940 Float 4 R Per Unit n/a
Per Unit Meter Gen frequency pu 45942 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Bus frequency pu 45944 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Field current pu 45946 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Field voltage pu 45948 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Slip frequency pu 45950 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter Icc pu 45952 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter AVR setpoint pu 45954 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter FCR setpoint pu 45956 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Per Unit Meter FVR setpoint pu 45958 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-22 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Per Unit Meter Var setpoint pu 45960 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Field Voltage Meter VX 45962 Float 4 R Volt -1000 – 1000
Field Current Meter IX 45964 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
DECS PSS Meter Terminal Frequency Deviation 45966 Float 4 R Percent n/a
DECS PSS Meter Compensated Frequency 45968 Float 4 R Percent n/a
Deviation
DECS PSS Meter PSS output 45970 Float 4 R n/a n/a
DECS Regulator Meter Tracking error 45972 Float 4 R Percent n/a
DECS Regulator Meter Control output PU 45974 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 – 10
DECS Regulator Meter Exciter Diode Monitor Ripple 45976 Float 4 R Percent n/a
Percent
DECS Regulator Meter Control output 45978 Float 4 R Percent n/a
DECS Regulator Meter NLS error percent 45980 Float 4 R Percent n/a
DECS Regulator Meter LL magnitude pu 45982 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 – 10
DECS Regulator Meter NLS LL magnitude avg pu 45984 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 – 10
DECS Regulator Meter NLS number generators online 45986 Int 32 4 R n/a n/a
Generator Voltage Meter VAB 45988 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Generator Voltage Meter VBC 45990 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Generator Voltage Meter VCA 45992 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Generator Voltage Meter VAVG LL 45994 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Generator Voltage Meter VAB 45996 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Primary 1
Generator Voltage Meter VBC 45998 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Primary 1
Generator Voltage Meter VCA 46000 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Primary 1
Generator Voltage Meter VAVG LL 46002 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Primary 1
Generator Voltage Meter VAB 46004 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Angle 1
Generator Voltage Meter VBC 46006 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Angle 1
Generator Voltage Meter VCA 46008 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Angle 1
Generator Voltage Meter VAB 46010 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Generator Voltage Meter VBC 46022 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Generator Voltage Meter VCA 46034 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Gen Voltage Meter Primary VAB 46046 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Gen Voltage Meter Primary VBC 46058 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Gen Voltage Meter Primary VCA 46070 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Bus Voltage Meter VAB 46082 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Bus Voltage Meter VBC 46084 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Bus Voltage Meter VCA 46086 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Bus Voltage Meter VAVG LL 46088 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Bus Voltage Meter Primary 1 VAB 46090 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Bus Voltage Meter Primary 1 VBC 46092 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-23

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Bus Voltage Meter Primary 1 VCA 46094 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Bus Voltage Meter Primary 1 VAVG LL 46096 Float 4 R Volt 0–2000000000
Bus Voltage Meter Angle 1 VAB 46098 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Bus Voltage Meter Angle 1 VBC 46100 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Bus Voltage Meter Angle 1 VCA 46102 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Bus Voltage Meter Angle 1 VAB 46104 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Bus Voltage Meter VBC 46116 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Magnitude Angle 1
Bus Voltage Meter VCA 46128 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Magnitude Angle 1
Bus Voltage Meter Primary VAB 46140 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Bus Voltage Meter Primary VBC 46152 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Bus Voltage Meter Primary VCA 46164 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IA 46176 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Generator Current Meter IB 46178 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Generator Current Meter IC 46180 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Generator Current Meter IAVG 46182 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Generator Current Meter IA 46184 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Primary 1
Generator Current Meter IB 46186 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Primary 1
Generator Current Meter IC 46188 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Primary 1
Generator Current Meter IAVG 46190 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Primary 1
Generator Current Meter IA 46192 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IB 46194 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IC 46196 Float 4 R Degree 0–360
Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IA 46198 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Magnitude Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IB 46210 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Magnitude Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IC 46222 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Magnitude Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IA 46234 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Primary Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IB 46246 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Primary Angle 1
Generator Current Meter IC 46258 String 24 R n/a 0–24
Primary Angle 1
Icc Current Meter IX 46270 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Magnitude 1
Icc Current Meter Primary 1 IX 46272 Float 4 R Amp 0–2000000000
Power Meter Total watts secondary 46274 Float 4 R Watt n/a
Power Meter Total watts primary 46276 Float 4 R Watt n/a
Power Meter Total vars secondary 46278 Float 4 R Var n/a
Power Meter Total vars primary 46280 Float 4 R var n/a
Power Meter Total S secondary 46282 Float 4 R VA n/a
Power Meter Total S primary 46284 Float 4 R VA n/a
Power Meter Total PF secondary 46286 Float 4 R PF -1 – 1

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-24 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Power Meter Total PF primary 46288 Float 4 R PF -1 – 1
Power Meter Positive watthour total 46290 Float 4 R Watthour 0.00E+00–
1.00E+12
Power Meter Positive varhour total 46292 Float 4 R Varhour 0.00E+00–
1.00E+12
Power Meter Negative watthour total 46294 Float 4 R Watthour -1.00E+12–
0.00E+00
Power Meter Negative varhour total 46296 Float 4 R Varhour -1.00E+12–
0.00E+00
Power Meter VA hour total 46298 Float 4 R VA hour 0.00E+00–
1.00E+12
Power Meter Scaled PF 46300 Float 4 R PF -1 – 1
Energy Meter Positive watthour total 46302 Float 4 RW Watthour 0.00E+00–
1.00E+12
Energy Meter Positive varhour total 46304 Float 4 RW Varhour 0.00E+00–
1.00E+12
Energy Meter Negative watthour total 46306 Float 4 RW Watthour -1.00E+12–
0.00E+00
Energy Meter Negative varhour total 46308 Float 4 RW Varhour -1.00E+12–
0.00E+00
Energy Meter VA hour total 46310 Float 4 RW Varhour 0.00E+00–
1.00E+12
Sync Meter 1 Slip Angle 46312 Float 4 R Degree -359.9 – 359.9
Sync Meter 1 Slip Frequency 46314 Float 4 R Hertz n/a
Sync Meter 1 Voltage Difference 46316 Float 4 R Volt n/a
Generator Frequency Frequency 46318 Float 4 R Hertz 10–180
Meter 1
Bus Frequency Meter 1 Frequency 46320 Float 4 R Hertz 10–180
Auxiliary Input Voltage 1 Value 46322 Float 4 R Volt -9999999 –
9999999
Auxiliary Input Current 1 Value 46324 Float 4 R Amp -9999999 –
9999999
Configurable Protection 1 Math result 46326 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Configurable Protection 2 Math result 46328 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Configurable Protection 3 Math result 46330 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Configurable Protection 4 Math result 46332 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Configurable Protection 5 Math result 46334 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Configurable Protection 6 Math result 46336 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Configurable Protection 7 Math result 46338 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Configurable Protection 8 Math result 46340 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 1 raw value 46342 Float 4 R MilliAmp n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 2 raw value 46344 Float 4 R MilliAmp n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 3 raw value 46346 Float 4 R MilliAmp n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 4 raw value 46348 Float 4 R MilliAmp n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 5 raw value 46350 Float 4 R MilliAmp n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 6 raw value 46352 Float 4 R MilliAmp n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 7 raw value 46354 Float 4 R MilliAmp n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 8 raw value 46356 Float 4 R MilliAmp n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 1 scaled value 46358 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 2 scaled value 46360 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 3 scaled value 46362 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 4 scaled value 46364 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 5 scaled value 46366 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 6 scaled value 46368 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 7 scaled value 46370 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog input 8 scaled value 46372 Float 4 R n/a n/a

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-25

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

AEM Metering RTD Input 1 Raw Value 46374 Float 4 R Ohm n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 2 Raw Value 46376 Float 4 R Ohm n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 3 Raw Value 46378 Float 4 R Ohm n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 4 Raw Value 46380 Float 4 R Ohm n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 5 Raw Value 46382 Float 4 R Ohm n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 6 Raw Value 46384 Float 4 R Ohm n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 7 Raw Value 46386 Float 4 R Ohm n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 8 Raw Value 46388 Float 4 R Ohm n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 1 Scaled Value 46390 Float 4 R Deg F -40000 – 9999999
AEM Metering RTD Input 2 Scaled Value 46392 Float 4 R Deg F -40000 – 9999999
AEM Metering RTD Input 3 Scaled Value 46394 Float 4 R Deg F -40000 – 9999999
AEM Metering RTD Input 4 Scaled Value 46396 Float 4 R Deg F -40000 – 9999999
AEM Metering RTD Input 5 Scaled Value 46398 Float 4 R Deg F -40000 – 9999999
AEM Metering RTD Input 6 Scaled Value 46400 Float 4 R Deg F -40000 – 9999999
AEM Metering RTD Input 7 Scaled Value 46402 Float 4 R Deg F -40000 – 9999999
AEM Metering RTD Input 8 Scaled Value 46404 Float 4 R Deg F -40000 – 9999999
AEM Metering Thermocouple Input 1 raw value 46406 Float 4 R Millivolt n/a
AEM Metering Thermocouple Input 2 raw value 46408 Float 4 R Millivolt n/a
AEM Metering Analog output 1 raw value 46410 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog output 2 raw value 46412 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog output 3 raw value 46414 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog output 4 raw value 46416 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog output 1 scaled value 46418 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog output 2 scaled value 46420 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog output 3 scaled value 46422 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Analog output 4 scaled value 46424 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AEM Metering Thermocouple Input 1 scaled 46426 Float 4 R Deg F n/a
value
AEM Metering Thermocouple Input 2 scaled 46428 Float 4 R Deg F n/a
value
AEM Metering RTD Input 1 Metric Value 46430 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 2 Metric Value 46432 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 3 Metric Value 46434 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 4 Metric Value 46436 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 5 Metric Value 46438 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 6 Metric Value 46440 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 7 Metric Value 46442 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
AEM Metering RTD Input 8 Metric Value 46444 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
AEM Metering Thermocouple Input 1 Metric 46446 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
Value
AEM Metering Thermocouple Input 2 Metric 46448 Float 4 R Deg C n/a
Value
Reserved 46450-
46528
Independent Meter PSS frequency rate of change 46530 Float 4 R Hz/second -15 – 15
Independent Meter PSS frequency rate of change pu 46532 Float 4 R PU/second -1.5 – 1.5
Independent Meter Field temperature 46534 Float 4 R Deg F -40 – 572
Independent Meter Inner Loop Reference 46536 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 - 10
Independent Meter Inner Loop Field Voltage 46538 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 – 10
Feedback
Independent Meter Inner Loop Error 46540 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 – 10
Independent Meter Inner Loop PID Output 46542 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 – 10
Independent Meter Inner Loop Output 46544 Float 4 R Per Unit -10 – 10

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-26 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Independent Meter Scaled Auxiliary Input Meter 46546 Float 4 R n/a -2000000 -
Value 2000000
Analog Output 1 Metering Raw 46548 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Analog Output 1 Metering Scaled 46550 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Analog Output 2 Metering Raw 46552 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Analog Output 2 Metering Scaled 46554 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Analog Output 3 Metering Raw 46556 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Analog Output 3 Metering Scaled 46558 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Analog Output 4 Metering Raw 46560 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Analog Output 4 Metering Scaled 46562 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Control Output Metering Raw 46564 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Control Output Metering Scaled 46566 Float 4 R n/a n/a

Limiters
Table 26-9. Limiter Group Parameters
Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range
OEL Primary Current Hi 46600 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Current Mid 46602 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Current Lo 46604 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Time Hi 46606 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 240
OEL Primary Time Mid 46608 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 240
OEL Primary Current Hi Off 46610 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Current Lo Off 46612 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Current Time Off 46614 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 240
OEL Primary Takeover Current Max Off 46616 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Takeover Current Min Off 46618 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Takeover Time Dial Off 46620 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1 – 20
OEL Primary Takeover Current Max On 46622 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Takeover Current Min On 46624 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Primary Takeover Time Dial On 46626 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1–20
OEL Primary Dvdt Enable 46628 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
OEL Primary Dvdt Ref 46630 Float 4 RW n/a -10 – 0
OEL Secondary Current Hi 46632 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Current Mid 46634 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Current Lo 46636 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Time Hi 46638 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 240
OEL Secondary Time Mid 46640 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 240
OEL Secondary Current Hi Off 46642 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Current Lo Off 46644 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Current Time Off 46646 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 240
OEL Secondary Takeover Current Max Off 46648 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Takeover Current Min Off 46650 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Takeover Time Dial Off 46652 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1–20
OEL Secondary Takeover Current Max On 46654 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Takeover Current Min On 46656 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12000
OEL Secondary Takeover Time Dial On 46658 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1–20

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-27

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

OEL Scale Enable 46660 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0
Auxiliary Input=1
AEM RTD 1=2
AEM RTD 2=3
AEM RTD 3=4
AEM RTD 4=5
AEM RTD 5=6
AEM RTD 6=7
AEM RTD 7=8
AEM RTD 8=9
OEL Scale Takeover Signal 1 46662 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
OEL Scale Takeover Signal 2 46664 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
OEL Scale Takeover Signal 3 46666 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
OEL Scale Takeover Scale 1 46668 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
OEL Scale Takeover Scale 2 46670 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
OEL Scale Takeover Scale 3 46672 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
OEL Scale Summing Signal 1 46674 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
OEL Scale Summing Signal 2 46676 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
OEL Scale Summing Signal 3 46678 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
OEL Scale Summing Scale 1 46680 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
OEL Scale Summing Scale 2 46682 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
OEL Scale Summing Scale 3 46684 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
UEL Primary Curve X1 46686 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve X2 46688 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve X3 46690 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve X4 46692 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve X5 46694 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve Y1 46696 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve Y2 46698 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve Y3 46700 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve Y4 46702 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Primary Curve Y5 46704 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Primary Power Filter TC 46706 Float 4 RW Second 0–20
UEL Primary Voltage Dependent Exponent 46708 Float 4 RW n/a 0–2
UEL Secondary Curve X1 46710 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve X2 46712 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve X3 46714 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve X4 46716 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve X5 46718 Float 4 RW kilowatt 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve Y1 46720 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve Y2 46722 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve Y3 46724 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve Y4 46726 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
UEL Secondary Curve Y5 46728 Float 4 RW kilovar 0 – 62
SCL Primary Reference Hi 46730 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 66000
SCL Primary Reference Lo 46732 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 66000
SCL Primary Time Hi 46734 Float 4 RW Second 0–240

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-28 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

SCL Primary No Response Time 46736 Float 4 RW Second 0–10
SCL Secondary Reference Hi 46738 Float 4 RW Amp 0–66000
SCL Secondary Reference Lo 46740 Float 4 RW Amp 0–66000
SCL Secondary Time Hi 46742 Float 4 RW Second 0–240
SCL Secondary No Response Time 46744 Float 4 RW Second 0–10
SCL Scale Enable 46746 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0
Auxiliary Input=1
AEM RTD 1=2
AEM RTD 2=3
AEM RTD 3=4
AEM RTD 4=5
AEM RTD 5=6
AEM RTD 6=7
AEM RTD 7=8
AEM RTD 8=9
SCL Scale Signal 1 46748 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
SCL Scale Signal 2 46750 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
SCL Scale Signal 3 46752 Float 4 RW Limiter -10 – 10
Scale
Volt
SCL Scale Point 1 46754 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
SCL Scale Point 2 46756 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
SCL Scale Point 3 46758 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
Var Limit Enable 46760 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Var Limit Primary Delay 46762 Float 4 RW Second 0–300
Var Limit Primary Setpoint 46764 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
Var Limit Secondary Delay 46766 Float 4 RW Second 0–300
Var Limit Secondary Setpoint 46768 Float 4 RW Percent 0–200
Var Limit Enable Status 46770 Uint32 4 R n/a Off=0 On=1
OEL Primary Takeover Reset Time 46772 Float 4 RW n/a 0.01–100
Coefficient Off
OEL Primary Takeover Reset Time 46774 Float 4 RW n/a 0.01–100
Coefficient On
OEL Secondary Takeover Reset Time 46776 Float 4 RW n/a 0.01–100
Coefficient Off
OEL Secondary Takeover Reset Time 46778 Float 4 RW n/a 0.01–100
Coefficient On
OEL Primary Takeover Reset Type Off 46780 Uint32 4 RW n/a Inverse=0
Integrating=1
Instantaneous=2
OEL Primary Takeover Reset Type On 46782 Uint32 4 RW n/a Inverse=0
Integrating=1
Instantaneous=2
OEL Secondary Takeover Reset Type Off 46784 Uint32 4 RW n/a Inverse=0
Integrating=1
Instantaneous=2
OEL Secondary Takeover Reset Type On 46786 Uint32 4 RW n/a Inverse=0
Integrating=1
Instantaneous=2

Setpoints
Table 26-10. Setpoint Group Parameters
Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range
Excitation Current Setpoint 46900 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12
Excitation Current Traverse Rate 46902 Float 4 RW Second 10 – 200
Excitation Current Pre-position Mode 1 46904 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Excitation Current Pre-position 1 46906 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-29

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Excitation Current Pre-position Mode 2 46908 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Excitation Current Pre-position 2 46910 Float 4 RW Amp 0 – 12
Excitation Current Minimum Setpoint 46912 Float 4 RW Percent 0–120
Limit
Excitation Current Maximum Setpoint 46914 Float 4 RW Percent 0–120
Limit
Generator Voltage Setpoint 46916 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator Voltage Traverse Rate 46918 Float 4 RW Second 10 – 200
Generator Voltage Pre-position Mode 1 46920 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator Voltage Pre-position 1 46922 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator Voltage Pre-position Mode 2 46924 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator Voltage Pre-position 2 46926 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator Voltage Minimum Setpoint 46928 Float 4 RW Percent 70 – 120
Limit
Generator Voltage Maximum Setpoint 46930 Float 4 RW Percent 70 – 120
Limit
Generator var Setpoint 46932 Float 4 RW kilovar The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator var Traverse Rate 46934 Float 4 RW Second 10 – 200
Generator var Pre-position Mode 1 46936 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator var Pre-position 1 46938 Float 4 RW kilovar The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator var Pre-position Mode 2 46940 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator var Pre-position 2 46942 Float 4 RW kilovar The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator var Minimum Setpoint Limit 46944 Float 4 RW Percent -100 – 100
Generator var Maximum Setpoint Limit 46946 Float 4 RW Percent -100 – 100
Generator PF Setpoint 46948 Float 4 RW Power Factor -2 – 2
Generator PF Traverse Rate 46950 Float 4 RW Second 10 – 200
Generator PF Pre-position Mode 1 46952 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator PF Pre-position 1 46954 Float 4 RW Power Factor -2 – 2
Generator PF Pre-position Mode 2 46956 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator PF Pre-position 2 46958 Float 4 RW Power Factor -2 – 2
Generator PF Minimum Setpoint Limit 46960 Float 4 RW Power Factor 0.5 – 1
Generator PF Maximum Setpoint Limit 46962 Float 4 RW Power Factor -1 – -0.5
Excitation Voltage Setpoint 46964 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Excitation Voltage Traverse Rate 46966 Float 4 RW Second 10 – 200
Excitation Voltage Pre-position Mode 1 46968 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Excitation Voltage Pre-position 1 46970 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Excitation Voltage Pre-position Mode 2 46972 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Excitation Voltage Pre-position 2 46974 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Excitation Voltage Minimum Setpoint 46976 Float 4 RW Percent 0 – 150
Limit
Excitation Voltage Maximum Setpoint 46978 Float 4 RW Percent 0 – 150
Limit

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-30 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Sc Set Option 46980 Int32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Sc Set Voltage Level 46982 Float 4 RW Percent 0 – 100
Sc Set Current Level 46984 Float 4 RW Percent 0 – 400
Sc Set Present Time 46986 Float 4 RW Second 0–1
Sc Set Ref Change 46988 Float 4 RW Percent 0 – 100
Sc Set Resp Change Level 46990 Float 4 RW Percent 0 – 50
Sc Set Clear Time 46992 Float 4 RW Second 0–1
Droop Value 46994 Float 4 RW Percent 0–30
L-Drop Value 46996 Float 4 RW Percent 0–30
Auxiliary Limit Enable 46998 Int32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Excitation Current Regulation Pre- 47000 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
position Mode 3
Excitation Current Regulation Pre- 47002 Float 4 RW Amp The range depends on the rated value
position 3 of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator Voltage Pre-position Mode 3 47004 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator Voltage Pre-position 3 47006 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator var Pre-position Mode 3 47008 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator var Pre-position 3 47010 Float 4 RW kilovar The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Generator PF Pre-position Mode 3 47012 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Generator PF Pre-position 3 47014 Float 4 RW Power Factor The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Excitation Voltage Pre-position Mode 3 47016 Uint32 4 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Excitation Voltage Pre-position 3 47018 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Active Excitation Current Regulation 47020 Float 4 RW Amp The range depends on the rated value
Setpoint of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Active Generator Voltage Setpoint 47022 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Active Generator var Setpoint 47024 Float 4 RW kilovar The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Active Generator PF Setpoint 47026 Float 4 RW Power Factor The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Active Excitation Voltage Setpoint 47028 Float 4 RW Volt The range depends on the rated value
of the machine and the minimum and
maximum setpoint limits.
Excitation Current Pre-Position Traverse 47030 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
1
Excitation Current Pre-Position Traverse 47032 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
2
Excitation Current Pre-Position Traverse 47034 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
3
Generator Voltage Pre-Position 47036 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Traverse 1
Generator Voltage Pre-Position 47038 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Traverse 2
Generator Voltage Pre-Position 47040 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Traverse 3
Generator var Pre-Position Traverse 1 47042 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Generator var Pre-Position Traverse 2 47044 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Generator var Pre-Position Traverse 3 47046 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-31

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Generator PF Pre-Position Traverse 1 47048 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Generator PF Pre-Position Traverse 2 47050 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Generator PF Pre-Position Traverse 3 47052 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Excitation Voltage Pre-Position 47054 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Traverse 1
Excitation Voltage Pre-Position 47056 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Traverse 2
Excitation Voltage Pre-Position 47058 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 720
Traverse 3

Global Settings
Table 26-11. Global Settings Group Parameters
Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range
System Configuration Operating Mode 47200 Int32 4 RW n/a Generator=0
Motor=1
Gen Current Configuration Rotation 47202 Uint32 4 RW n/a Forward=0
Reverse=1
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 1 Timeout Hours 47204 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 1 Timeout Minutes 47206 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 1 Timeout Seconds 47208 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 2 Timeout Hours 47210 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 2 Timeout Minutes 47212 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 2 Timeout Seconds 47214 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 3 Timeout Hours 47216 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 3 Timeout Minutes 47218 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 3 Timeout Seconds 47220 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 4 Timeout Hours 47222 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 4 Timeout Minutes 47224 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 4 Timeout Seconds 47226 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 5 Timeout Hours 47228 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 5 Timeout Minutes 47230 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 5 Timeout Seconds 47232 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 6 Timeout Hours 47234 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 6 Timeout Minutes 47236 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 6 Timeout Seconds 47238 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 7 Timeout Hours 47240 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 7 Timeout Minutes 47242 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 7 Timeout Seconds 47244 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 8 Timeout Hours 47246 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 8 Timeout Minutes 47248 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 8 Timeout Seconds 47250 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 9 Timeout Hours 47252 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 9 Timeout Minutes 47254 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 9 Timeout Seconds 47256 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 10 Timeout Hours 47258 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 10 Timeout Minutes 47260 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 10 Timeout Seconds 47262 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 11 Timeout Hours 47264 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 11 Timeout Minutes 47266 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 11 Timeout Seconds 47268 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 12 Timeout Hours 47270 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 12 Timeout Minutes 47272 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 12 Timeout Seconds 47274 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-32 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 13 Timeout Hours 47276 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 13 Timeout Minutes 47278 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 13 Timeout Seconds 47280 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 14 Timeout Hours 47282 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 14 Timeout Minutes 47284 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 14 Timeout Seconds 47286 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 15 Timeout Hours 47288 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 15 Timeout Minutes 47290 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 15 Timeout Seconds 47292 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 16 Timeout Hours 47294 Uint32 4 RW Hour 0 – 250
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 16 Timeout Minutes 47296 Uint32 4 RW Minute 0 – 59
PLC Timed Element Settings Timer 16 Timeout Seconds 47298 Uint32 4 RW Decisecond 0 – 599
PLC Timed Element Settings Counter 1 Output Timeout 47300 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1800
PLC Timed Element Settings Counter 2 Output Timeout 47302 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1800
PLC Timed Element Settings Counter 3 Output Timeout 47304 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1800
PLC Timed Element Settings Counter 4 Output Timeout 47306 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1800
PLC Timed Element Settings Counter 5 Output Timeout 47308 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1800
PLC Timed Element Settings Counter 6 Output Timeout 47310 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1800
PLC Timed Element Settings Counter 7 Output Timeout 47312 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1800
PLC Timed Element Settings Counter 8 Output Timeout 47314 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1800
DECS PSS PSS Enable 47316 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0
Enabled=1
DECS PSS PSS Enable Status 47318 Uint32 4 R n/a Off=0 On=1
DECS PSS PSS Rate of Change Enable 47320 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0
Enabled=1
DECS PSS PSS Rate of Change Threshold 47322 Float 4 RW Hz/Sec 0 – 10
DECS PSS PSS Rate of Change Time Delay 47324 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 20
DECS PSS PSS Rate of Change Block Time 47326 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 20
DECS PSS PSS Rate of Change Low Pass 47328 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 20
Filter Time Constant
DECS PSS PSS Rate of Change Washout 47330 Float 4 RW Second 0 – 20
Filter Time Constant
Synchronizer Sync Type 47332 Uint32 4 RW n/a Anticipatory=0
Phase Lock
Loop=1
Synchronizer Slip Frequency 47334 Float 4 RW Hertz 0.1 –0.5
Synchronizer Generator Frequency Greater 47336 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0
Than Bus Frequency Enabled=1
Synchronizer Breaker Closing Angle 47338 Float 4 RW Degree 3 – 20
Synchronizer Sync Activation Delay 47340 Float 4 RW Second 0.1 - 0.8
Synchronizer Generator Voltage Greater Than 47342 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0
Bus Voltage Enabled=1
Synchronizer Sync Fail Activation Delay 47344 Float 4 RW Second 0.1 – 600
Synchronizer Sync Speed Gain 47346 Float 4 RW n/a 0.001–1000
Synchronizer Sync Voltage Gain 47348 Float 4 RW n/a 0.001–1000
Synchronizer Voltage Window 47350 Float 4 RW Percent 2 – 15
Synchronizer Sys Option Input Auto Sync 47352 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0
Enabled Enabled=1
Synchronizer Max Slip Control Limit Hz 47354 Float 4 RW Hertz 0–2
Synchronizer Min Slip Control Limit Hz 47356 Float 4 RW Hertz 0–2
Synchronizer Angle Compensation 47358 Float 4 RW Degree 0 – 359.9
Network Load Share Load Share Enable 47360 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0
Enabled=1
Network Load Share Load Share Droop Percent 47362 Float 4 RW Percent 0–30
Network Load Share Load Share Gain 47364 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-33

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Reserved 47366 Float 4 RW n/a
Reserved 47368 Float 4 RW n/a
Reserved 47370
Network Load Share Ki Gain 47372 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
Network Load Share Max Vc 47374 Float 4 RW No Unit 0–1
Network Load Share Disable Time Delay 47376 Float 4 RW Second 1 – 3600

Relay Settings
Table 26-12. Relay Settings Group Parameters
Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range
System Nominal Frequency 47400 Uint32 4 RW n/a 50 Hz=50 60 Hz=60
Configuration
System DECS Auxiliary Summing Mode 47402 Uint32 4 RW n/a Voltage=0 Var=1
Configuration
System DECS Auxiliary Input Mode 47404 Uint32 4 RW n/a Voltage=0 Current=1
Configuration
System DECS Auxiliary Input Function 47406 Uint32 4 RW n/a DECS Input=0
Configuration PSS Test Input=1
Limiter Selection=2
No Control=4
System DECS Auxiliary Voltage Gain 47408 Float 4 RW n/a -99 – 99
Configuration
System DECS Auto Track Time Delay 47410 Float 4 RW Second 0–8
Configuration
System DECS Auto Track Traverse Rate 47412 Float 4 RW Second 1–80
Configuration
System DECS Null Balance Level 47414 Float 4 RW Percent 0–9999
Configuration
System DECS Auto Trans Time Delay 47416 Float 4 RW Second 0–8
Configuration
System DECS Auto Trans Traverse Rate 47418 Float 4 RW Second 1–80
Configuration
Gen Volt Ratio Primary 47420 Float 4 RW n/a 1–500000
Configuration
Gen Volt Ratio Secondary 47422 Float 4 RW n/a 1–600
Configuration
Gen Volt Rated Primary LL 47424 Float 4 RW Volt 1–500000
Configuration
Bus Volt Ratio Primary 47426 Float 4 RW n/a 1–500000
Configuration
Bus Volt Ratio Secondary 47428 Float 4 RW n/a 1–600
Configuration
Bus Volt Rated Primary LL 47430 Float 4 RW Volt 1–500000
Configuration
Gen Current Ratio Primary 47432 Float 4 RW n/a 1–99999
Configuration
Gen Current Ratio Secondary 47434 Int32 4 RW n/a 1=1 5=5
Configuration
Gen Current Rated Primary 47436 Float 4 R Amp 0–180000
Configuration
Modbus Auto Save 47438 Uint16 2 RW n/a Off=0 On=1
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 1 State 47439 Uint32 4 RW n/a Open=0 Closed=1
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 2 State 47441 Uint32 4 RW n/a Open=0 Closed=1
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 3 State 47443 Uint32 4 RW n/a Open=0 Closed=1
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 4 State 47445 Uint32 4 RW n/a Open=0 Closed=1
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 5 State 47447 Uint32 4 RW n/a Open=0 Closed=1
Virtual Switch Virtual Switch 6 State 47449 Uint32 4 RW n/a Open=0 Closed=1
DECS Control Start Stop Request 47451 Uint32 4 RW n/a Stop=0 =1 Start =2
DECS Control System Option Underfrequency Hz 47453 Float 4 RW Hertz 15 – 90

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-34 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

DECS Control System Input COM Port Manual Enabled 47455 Uint32 4 RW n/a Manual=1 Automatic=2
DECS Control System Input COM Port PF var Enabled 47457 Uint32 4 RW n/a Off=0 PF=1 Var=2
DECS Control System Input COM Port External Tracking 47459 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enabled
DECS Control System Input COM Port Pre-position 47461 Uint32 4 RW n/a NOT SET=0 SET=1
Enabled
DECS Control System Input COM Port Pre-position 47463 Uint32 4 RW n/a NOT SET=0 SET=1
Enabled 2
DECS Control System Input COM Port Raise Enabled 47465 Uint32 4 RW n/a NOT SET=0 Raise=1

DECS Control System Input COM Port Lower Enabled 47467 Uint32 4 RW n/a NOT SET=0 Lower=1

DECS Control System Option Input Voltage Match 47469 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enabled
DECS Control System Option Underfrequency Mode 47471 Uint32 4 RW n/a UF Limiter=0
V/Hz Limiter=1
DECS Control System Option Limiter Mode 47473 Uint32 4 RW n/a Off=0 UEL=1 OEL=2 UEL &
OEL=3 SCL=4 UEL &
SCL=5 OEL & SCL=6 UEL
& OEL & SCL=7
DECS Control System Option Voltage Match Band 47475 Float 4 RW Percent 0–20
DECS Control System Option Voltage Match Reference 47477 Float 4 RW Percent 0–700
DECS Control System Option Underfrequency Slope 47479 Float 4 RW n/a 0–3
DECS Control System Option PF to Droop kW Threshold 47481 Float 4 RW Percent 0–30
DECS Control Startup Primary Soft-start Bias 47483 Float 4 RW Percent 0–90
DECS Control Startup Primary Soft-start Time 47485 Float 4 RW Second 1–7200
DECS Control Startup Secondary Soft-start Bias 47487 Float 4 RW Percent 0–90
DECS Control Startup Secondary Soft-start Time 47489 Float 4 RW Second 1–7200

Protection Settings
Table 26-13. Protection Settings Group Parameters
Group Name Register Type Sz R/W Unit Range
Field Overvoltage Primary Mode 47600 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overvoltage Primary Pickup 47602 Float 4 RW V Disabled=0, 1–2400
Field Overvoltage Primary Time Delay 47604 Float 4 RW ms Instantaneous=0, 200–30000
Field Overvoltage Secondary Mode 47606 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overvoltage Secondary Pickup 47608 Float 4 RW V Disabled=0, 1–2400
Field Overvoltage Secondary Time Delay 47610 Float 4 RW ms Instantaneous=0, 200–30000
Field Overcurrent Primary Mode 47612 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overcurrent Primary Pickup 47614 Float 4 RW Amp Disabled=0, 0.1–20000
Field Overcurrent Primary Time Delay 47616 Float 4 RW ms Instantaneous=0, 200–30000
Field Overcurrent Primary Timing Mode 47618 Uint32 4 RW n/a Definite Timing=0 Inverse Timing=1
Field Overcurrent Primary Time Dial 47620 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1 – 20
Field Overcurrent Secondary Mode 47622 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overcurrent Secondary Pickup 47624 Float 4 RW Amp Disabled=0, 0.1–20000
Field Overcurrent Secondary Time Delay 47626 Float 4 RW ms Instantaneous=0, 200–30000
Field Overcurrent Secondary Timing Mode 47628 Uint32 4 RW n/a Definite Timing=0 Inverse Timing=1
Field Overcurrent Secondary Time Dial 47630 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1 – 20
Exciter Diode Exciter Open Diode Enable Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Monitor 47632
Exciter Diode Exciter Shorted Diode Enable Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Monitor 47634
Exciter Diode Exciter Diode Inhibit Threshold Float 4 RW % 0–100
Monitor 47636
Exciter Diode Exciter Open Diode Pickup Float 4 RW % 0–100
Monitor 47638

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-35

Group Name Register Type Sz R/W Unit Range

Exciter Diode Exciter Open Diode Time Delay Float 4 RW Sec 10–60
Monitor 47640
Exciter Diode Exciter Shorted Diode Pickup Float 4 RW % 0–100
Monitor 47642
Exciter Diode Exciter Shorted Diode Time Delay Float 4 RW Sec 5–30
Monitor 47644
Exciter Diode Exciter Pole Ratio Float 4 RW n/a Disabled=0, 1–10
Monitor 47646
Loss Of Sensing Mode 47648 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss Of Sensing Time Delay 47650 Float 4 RW Sec 0–30
Loss Of Sensing Voltage Balanced Level 47652 Float 4 RW % 0–100
Loss Of Sensing Voltage Unbalanced Level 47654 Float 4 RW % 0–100
25 Mode 47656 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
25 Voltage Monitor Mode 47658 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 DLDA=1 DLLA=2
DLDA_DLLA=3 LLDA=4
LLDA_DLDA=5 DLLA_LLDA=6
DLDA_DLLA_LLDA=7
25 Phase Angle 47660 Float 4 RW Deg 1–99
25 Slip Frequency 47662 Float 4 RW Hz 0.01–0.5
25 Voltage Magnitude Error Percent 47664 Float 4 RW % 0.1–50
25 Generator Frequency Greater Than 47666 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Bus Frequency
25 Dead Voltage 47668 Float 4 RW % Disabled=0, 10–90
25 Live Voltage 47670 Float 4 RW % Disabled=0, 10–90
25 Dropout Delay 47672 Float 4 RW ms 50–60000
25 Angle Compensation 47674 Float 4 RW Deg 0–359.9
25 VMM Dead Line, Dead Aux 47676 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
25 VMM Dead Line, Live Aux 47678 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
25 VMM Live Line, Dead Aux 47680 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
27P Primary Mode 47682 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
27P Primary Pickup 47684 Float 4 RW V Disabled=0, 1–600000
27P Primary Time Delay 47686 Float 4 RW ms 100–60000
27P Secondary Mode 47688 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
27P Secondary Pickup 47690 Float 4 RW V Disabled=0, 1 - 600000
27P Secondary Time Delay 47692 Float 4 RW ms 100–60000
59P Primary Mode 47694 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
59P Primary Pickup 47696 Float 4 RW V 0–600000
59P Primary Time Delay 47698 Float 4 RW ms 100–60000
59P Secondary Mode 47700 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
59P Secondary Pickup 47702 Float 4 RW V 0–600000
59P Secondary Time Delay 47704 Float 4 RW ms 100–60000
81O Primary Mode 47706 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Over=1
81O Primary Pickup 47708 Float 4 RW Hz Disabled=0, 15–70
81O Primary Time Delay 47710 Float 4 RW ms 100–300000
81O Secondary Mode 47712 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Over=1
81O Secondary Pickup 47714 Float 4 RW Hz Disabled=0, 15–70
81O Secondary Time Delay 47716 Float 4 RW ms 100–300000
81U Primary Mode 47718 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Under=2
81U Primary Pickup 47720 Float 4 RW Hz Disabled=0, 15–70
81U Primary Time Delay 47722 Float 4 RW ms 100–300000
81U Primary Voltage Inhibit 47724 Float 4 RW % Disabled=0, 5–100
81U Secondary Mode 47726 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Under=2
81U Secondary Pickup 47728 Float 4 RW Hz Disabled=0, 15–70
81U Secondary Time Delay 47730 Float 4 RW ms 100–300000

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-36 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Sz R/W Unit Range

81U Secondary Voltage Inhibit 47732 Float 4 RW % Disabled=0, 5–100
40Q Primary Mode 47734 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
40Q Primary Pickup 47736 Float 4 RW kvar 0 - 3000000
40Q Primary Time Delay 47738 Float 4 RW ms 0 - 300000
40Q Secondary Mode 47740 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
40Q Secondary Pickup 47742 Float 4 RW kvar 0 - 3000000
40Q Secondary Time Delay 47744 Float 4 RW ms 0 - 300000
32R Primary Mode 47746 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=4
32R Primary Pickup 47748 Float 4 RW kW 0 - 3000000
32R Primary Time Delay 47750 Float 4 RW ms 0 - 300000
32R Secondary Mode 47752 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=4
32R Secondary Pickup 47754 Float 4 RW kW 0 - 3000000
32R Secondary Time Delay 47756 Float 4 RW ms 0 - 300000
Configurable Parameter Selection 47758 Int32 4 RW n/a See Configurable Protection
Protection 1 Parameters at the end of this
section for a complete list.
Configurable Math Operator 47760 Int8 1 RW n/a None=0 +=1 –=2 *=3 /=4
Protection 1
Configurable Scale Factor 1 47761 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 1
Configurable Offset 1 47763 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 1
Configurable Scale Factor 2 47765 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 1
Configurable Offset 2 47767 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 1
Configurable Parameter Selection 47769 Int32 4 RW n/a See Configurable Protection
Protection 2 Parameters at the end of this
section for a complete list.
Configurable Math Operator 47771 Int8 1 RW n/a None=0 +=1 –=2 *=3 /=4
Protection 2
Configurable Scale Factor 1 47772 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 2
Configurable Offset 1 47774 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 2
Configurable Scale Factor 2 47776 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 2
Configurable Offset 2 47778 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 2
Configurable Parameter Selection 47780 Int32 4 RW n/a See Configurable Protection
Protection 3 Parameters at the end of this
section for a complete list.
Configurable Math Operator 47782 Int8 1 RW n/a None=0 +=1 –=2 *=3 /=4
Protection 3
Configurable Scale Factor 1 47783 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 3
Configurable Offset 1 47785 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 3
Configurable Scale Factor 2 47787 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 3
Configurable Offset 2 47789 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 3
Configurable Parameter Selection 47791 Int32 4 RW n/a See Configurable Protection
Protection 4 Parameters at the end of this
section for a complete list.
Configurable Math Operator 47793 Int8 1 RW n/a None=0 +=1 –=2 *=3 /=4
Protection 4
Configurable Scale Factor 1 47794 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 4
Configurable Offset 1 47796 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 4

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-37

Group Name Register Type Sz R/W Unit Range

Configurable Scale Factor 2 47798 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 4
Configurable Offset 2 47800 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 4
Configurable Parameter Selection 47802 Int32 4 RW n/a See Configurable Protection
Protection 5 Parameters at the end of this
section for a complete list.
Configurable Math Operator 47804 Int8 1 RW n/a None=0 +=1 –=2 *=3 /=4
Protection 5
Configurable Scale Factor 1 47805 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 5
Configurable Offset 1 47807 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 5
Configurable Scale Factor 2 47809 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 5
Configurable Offset 2 47811 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 5
Configurable Parameter Selection 47813 Int32 4 RW n/a See Configurable Protection
Protection 6 Parameters at the end of this
section for a complete list.
Configurable Math Operator 47815 Int8 1 RW n/a None=0 +=1 –=2 *=3 /=4
Protection 6
Configurable Scale Factor 1 47816 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 6
Configurable Offset 1 47818 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 6
Configurable Scale Factor 2 47820 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 6
Configurable Offset 2 47822 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 6
Configurable Parameter Selection 47824 Int32 4 RW n/a See Configurable Protection
Protection 7 Parameters at the end of this
section for a complete list.
Configurable Math Operator 47826 Int8 1 RW n/a None=0 +=1 –=2 *=3 /=4
Protection 7
Configurable Scale Factor 1 47827 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 7
Configurable Offset 1 47829 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 7
Configurable Scale Factor 2 47831 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 7
Configurable Offset 2 47833 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 7
Configurable Parameter Selection 47835 Int32 4 RW n/a See Configurable Protection
Protection 8 Parameters at the end of this
section for a complete list.
Configurable Math Operator 47837 Int8 1 RW n/a None=0 +=1 –=2 *=3 /=4
Protection 8
Configurable Scale Factor 1 47838 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 8
Configurable Offset 1 47840 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 8
Configurable Scale Factor 2 47842 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 8
Configurable Offset 2 47844 Float 4 RW n/a -999999 - 999999
Protection 8
24 Primary Mode 47846 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0,Enabled=1
24 Primary Definite Time Pickup 1 47848 Float 4 RW n/a Disabled=0, 0.5–6
24 Primary Definite Time Pickup 2 47850 Float 4 RW n/a Disabled=0, 0.5–6
24 Primary Definite Time Delay 1 47852 Float 4 RW ms 50–600000
24 Primary Definite Time Delay 2 47854 Float 4 RW ms 50–600000
24 Primary Inverse Time Pickup 47856 Float 4 RW n/a Disabled=0, 0.5–6

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-38 9597100990

Group Name Register Type Sz R/W Unit Range

24 Primary Time Dial Trip 47858 Float 4 RW n/a 0–9.9
24 Primary Time Dial Reset 47860 Float 4 RW n/a 0–9.9
24 Primary Curve Exponent 47862 Uint32 4 RW n/a 0.5=0,1=1,2=2
24 Secondary Mode 47864 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0,Enabled=1
24 Secondary Definite Time Pickup 1 47866 Float 4 RW n/a Disabled=0, 0.5–6
24 Secondary Definite Time Pickup 2 47868 Float 4 RW n/a Disabled=0, 0.5–6
24 Secondary Definite Time Delay 1 47870 Float 4 RW ms 50–600000
24 Secondary Definite Time Delay 2 47872 Float 4 RW ms 50–600000
24 Secondary Inverse Time Pickup 47874 Float 4 RW n/a Disabled=0, 0.5–6
24 Secondary Time Dial Trip 47876 Float 4 RW n/a 0–9.9
24 Secondary Time Dial Reset 47878 Float 4 RW n/a 0–9.9
24 Curve Exponent 47880 Uint32 4 RW n/a 0.5=0,1=1,2=2
Field Primary Mode 47882 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Overtemperature
Field Primary Pickup 47884 Float 4 RW Deg 0 - 572
Overtemperature F
Field Primary Time Delay 47886 Float 4 RW Ms 100 - 60000
Overtemperature
Field Secondary Mode 47888 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Overtemperature
Field Secondary Pickup 47890 Float 4 RW Deg 0 - 572
Overtemperature F
Field Secondary Time Delay 47892 Float 4 RW Ms 100 - 60000
Overtemperature
Loss of FIT Mode 47894 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss of FIT Time Delay 47896 Float 4 RW Ms 0 - 9900
81U-2 Primary Mode 47898 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Under=2
81U-2 Primary Pickup 47900 Float 4 RW Hz Disabled=0; 15 - 70
81U-2 Primary Time Delay 47902 Float 4 RW Ms 100 - 300000
81U-2 Primary Voltage Inhibit 47904 Float 4 RW % Disabled=0; 5 – 100
81U-2 Secondary Mode 47906 Uint32 4 RW n/a Disabled=0 Under=2
81U-2 Secondary Pickup 47908 Float 4 RW Hz Disabled=0; 15 - 70
81U-2 Secondary Time Delay 47910 Float 4 RW Ms 100 - 300000
81U-2 Secondary Voltage Inhibit 47912 Float 4 RW % Disabled=0; 5 - 100

Gains Settings
Table 26-14. Gains Settings Group Parameters
Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range
Primary Gain Option 48200 Uint32 4 RW n/a T'do=1.0 Te=0.17=1 T'do=1.5 Te=0.25=2 T'do=2.0
Te=0.33=3 T'do=2.5 Te=0.42=4 T'do=3.0 Te=0.50=5
T'do=3.5 Te=0.58=6 T'do=4.0 Te=0.67=7 T'do=4.5
Te=0.75=8 T'do=5.0 Te=0.83=9 T'do=5.5 Te=0.92=10
T'do=6.0 Te=1.00=11 T'do=6.5 Te=1.08=12 T'do=7.0
Te=1.17=13 T'do=7.5 Te=1.25=14 T'do=8.0 Te=1.33=15
T'do=8.5 Te=1.42=16 T'do=9.0 Te=1.50=17 T'do=9.5
Te=1.58=18 T'do=10.0 Te=1.67=19 T'do=10.5 Te=1.75=20
Custom=21
Secondary Gain Option 48202 Uint32 4 RW n/a T'do=1.0 Te=0.17=1 T'do=1.5 Te=0.25=2 T'do=2.0
Te=0.33=3 T'do=2.5 Te=0.42=4 T'do=3.0 Te=0.50=5
T'do=3.5 Te=0.58=6 T'do=4.0 Te=0.67=7 T'do=4.5
Te=0.75=8 T'do=5.0 Te=0.83=9 T'do=5.5 Te=0.92=10
T'do=6.0 Te=1.00=11 T'do=6.5 Te=1.08=12 T'do=7.0
Te=1.17=13 T'do=7.5 Te=1.25=14 T'do=8.0 Te=1.33=15
T'do=8.5 Te=1.42=16 T'do=9.0 Te=1.50=17 T'do=9.5
Te=1.58=18 T'do=10.0 Te=1.67=19 T'do=10.5 Te=1.75=20
Custom=21
AVR Kp Primary 48204 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
AVR Ki Primary 48206 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
AVR Kd Primary 48208 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-39

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

AVR Td Primary 48210 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1
FCR Kp 48212 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
FCR Ki 48214 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
FCR Kd 48216 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
FCR Td 48218 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1
FVR Kp 48220 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
FVR Ki 48222 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
FVR Kd 48224 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
FVR Td 48226 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1
PF Ki 48228 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
PF Kg 48230 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
Var Ki 48232 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
Var Kg 48234 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
OEL Ki 48236 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
OEL Kg 48238 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
UEL Ki 48240 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
UEL Kg 48242 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
SCL Ki 48244 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
SCL Kg 48246 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
Vm Kg 48248 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
Inner Loop Kp 48250 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
Inner Loop Ki 48252 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
AVR Kp Secondary 48254 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
AVR Ki Secondary 48256 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
AVR Kd Secondary 48258 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
AVR Td Secondary 48260 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1
Var Limit Ki 48262 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
Var Limit Kg 48264 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1000
AVR Primary Ka 48266 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1
AVR Secondary Ka 48268 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1
FCR Ka 48270 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1
FVR Ka 48272 Float 4 RW n/a 0–1

Legacy Modbus
Table 26-15. Legacy Modbus Parameters
Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range
Model Information Character 1 40001 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Model Information Character 2 40002 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Model Information Character 3 40003 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Model Information Character 4 40004 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Model Information Character 5 40005 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Model Information Character 6 40006 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Model Information Character 7 40007 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Model Information Character 8 40008 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Model Information Character 9 40009 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Program Version Character 1 40010 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Program Version Character 2 40011 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Program Version Character 3 40012 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Program Version Character 4 40013 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Program Version Character 5 40014 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Program Version Character 6 40015 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-40 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Application Program Version Character 7 40016 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Program Version Character 8 40017 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 1 40018 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 2 40019 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 3 40020 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 4 40021 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 5 40022 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 6 40023 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 7 40024 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 8 40025 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Application Version Date Character 9 40026 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Reserved 8 bit: 1-17 40027 - Uint8 1 R n/a 0–255
40043
Boot Program Version Character 1 40044 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Boot Program Version Character 2 40045 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Boot Program Version Character 3 40046 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Boot Program Version Character 4 40047 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Boot Program Version Character 5 40048 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Boot Program Version Character 6 40049 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Boot Program Version Character 7 40050 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Boot Program Version Character 8 40051 Uint8 1 R n/a n/a
Reserved 8 bit: 18-29 40052 - Uint8 1 R n/a 0–255
40063
Reserved 1 40064 C1 filler 274 R n/a n/a
Leading Lagging Indicator 40201 Uint16 2 R n/a Leading=0 Lagging=1
Motoring Generating Indicator 40202 Uint16 2 R n/a Motoring=0 Generating=1
Status of Front Panel LEDs 40203 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Contact Input States 40204 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Voltage Matching Status Indicator 40205 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Active Setpoint Adjustment Range 40206 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Annunciation Status Bit Flags 1 40207 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Annunciation Status Bit Flags 2 40208 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Protection Status Bit Flags 1 40209 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Protection Status Bit Flags 2 40210 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Relay Output States 40211 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Unused Registers 1 40212 U1 filler 78 R n/a n/a
RMS Generator Volts Phase A to B 40251 Float 4 R n/a n/a
RMS Generator Volts Phase B to C 40253 Float 4 R n/a n/a
RMS Generator Volts Phase C to A 40255 Float 4 R n/a n/a
RMS Bus Voltage in Volts 40257 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Generator Current Ia in Amps 40259 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Generator Current Ib in Amps 40261 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Generator Current Ic in Amps 40263 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Average RMS L-L Volts 40265 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Average Generator Phase Current 40267 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Field Voltage in Volts 40269 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Field Current in Amps 40271 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Auxiliary Input in Volts 40273 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Magnitude of A-B Voltage Fundamental 40275 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Phasor
Magnitude of B-C Voltage Fundamental 40277 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Phasor

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-41

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Magnitude of C-A Voltage Fundamental 40279 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Phasor
Magnitude of Line A Current 40281 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Fundamental Phasor
Magnitude of Line B Current 40283 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Fundamental Phasor
Magnitude of Line C Current 40285 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Fundamental Phasor
Current Input for Load Compensation 40287 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Angle Between Vab and Vca 40289 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Angle Between Vbc and Vca 40291 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Angle Between Ia and Vca 40293 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Angle Between Ib and Vca 40295 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Angle Between Ic and Vca 40297 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Angle Between Iaux and Vca 40299 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gen Real Power in kW 40301 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gen Reactive Power in kvar 40303 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gen Apparent Power in kVA 40305 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Power Factor 40307 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gen Positive Sequence Voltage 40309 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gen Negative Sequence Voltage 40311 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gen Positive Sequence Current 40313 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gen Negative Sequence Current 40315 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gen Frequency in Hertz 40317 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Bus Frequency in Hertz 40319 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Null Balance in Percent 40321 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Active Controller Output 40323 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Error Signal to Autotracking Loop 40325 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Rotor Temperature 40327 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Shorted Diode Harmonic Current 40329 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Open Diode Harmonic Current 40331 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Var/PF Controller Output in Volts 40333 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PSS Terminal Frequency Deviation 40335 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PSS Compensated Frequency Deviation 40337 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PSS Washed Out Speed Deviation 40339 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PSS Washed Out Power Deviation 40341 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PSS Mechanical Power Filter Output 40343 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PSS Signal Before Phase Lead-Lag 40345 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Blocks
PSS Signal After Phase Lead-Lag Blocks 40347 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PSS Signal After Terminal Voltage 40349 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Limiter
Final PSS Output 40351 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Reserved 2 40353 C2 96 R n/a n/a
Filler
Sensing Mode 40401 Uint16 2 RW n/a ABC=0 ACB=1
Auxiliary Input Summing Mode 40402 Uint16 2 RW n/a Voltage=0 var=1
Power Output Mode 40403 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Gen Field Type 40404 Uint16 2 RW n/a Exciter Field=0 Main Field=1
Voltage Sensing HW Gain Control 40405 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Auxiliary Input Mode 40406 Uint16 2 RW n/a Voltage=0 Current=1
Rotor Temperature Mode 40407 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Number of CTs 40408 Uint16 2 RW n/a n/a
Selected CTs 40409 Uint16 2 RW n/a n/a

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-42 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Motor/Gen Mode 40410 Uint16 2 R n/a Generator=0 Motor=1
Auxiliary Input Function 40411 Uint16 2 RW n/a DECS Input=0 PSS Test Input=1
Limiter Selection=2 No Control=3
Unused Registers 2 40412 U2 78 R n/a n/a
Filler
Gen Rated Frequency 40451 Float 4 RW n/a 50.0 - 60.0
Gen PT Primary Voltage Rating 40453 Float 4 RW n/a 1 - 500000
Gen PT Secondary Voltage Rating 40455 Float 4 RW n/a 1 - 600
Gen CT Primary Current Rating 40457 Float 4 RW n/a 1 - 99999
Gen CT Secondary Current Rating 40459 Float 4 RW n/a 1.0 - 5.0
Field Current Shunt Rating 40461 Float 4 RW Amp 1 - 10000
Field Voltage Isolation Module Input 40463 Float 4 RW n/a 63 - 625
Bus Sensing PT Primary Rating 40465 Float 4 RW n/a 1 - 500000
Bus Sensing PT Secondary Rating 40467 Float 4 RW n/a 1 - 600
Maximum Field Flash Time 40469 Float 4 RW n/a 1 - 50
Field Flash Dropout Level 40471 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 100
Gen Rated Voltage 40473 Float 4 RW Volt 1 - 500000
Gen Rated kVA 40475 Float 4 RW KiloVA 1 - 2000000
Gen Rated Field Voltage 40477 Float 4 RW Volt 1 - 1000
Gen Rated Field Current 40479 Float 4 RW Amp 0.1 - 10000
Nominal Bus Voltage 40481 Float 4 RW Volt 1 - 500000
Auxiliary Input Gain for AVR Mode 40483 Float 4 RW n/a -99 - 99
Time Delay Before Autotracking 40485 Float 4 RW Second 0-8
Traverse Rate of Autotracking 40487 Float 4 RW Second 1 - 80
Reserved 3 40489 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Gain for Cross Current Compensation 40491 Float 4 RW Percent -30 - 30
External Tracking Time Delay 40493 Float 4 RW Second 0-8
External Tracking Traverse Rate 40495 Float 4 RW Second 1 - 80
Auxiliary Input Gain for FCR Mode 40497 Float 4 RW n/a -99 - 99
Auxiliary Input Gain for VAR Mode 40499 Float 4 RW n/a -99 - 99
Auxiliary Input Gain for PF Mode 40501 Float 4 RW n/a -99 - 99
Exciter Field Resistance 40503 Float 4 RW

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-43

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

AutoTrack Status 40614 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Pre-position Enable Status 40615 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Autotransfer Status 40616 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Load Compensation Mode Status 40617 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Alarm Reset Enable 40618 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss-of-Sensing Detection Enable 40619 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss-of-Sensing Triggered Transfer-to- 40620 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
FCR-mode Enable
External Tracking Enabled 40621 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Under Frequency or V/Hz Mode Enable 40622 Uint16 2 RW n/a UF Limiter=0 V/Hz Limiter=1
Reserved 5 40623 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Reserved 6 40625 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Reserved 7 40627 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Reserved 8 40629 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Droop Enabled 40631 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
L Drop Enabled 40632 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
CC Enabled 40633 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
OEL Style Mode 40634 Uint16 2 R n/a No Change=0 Change State=1
Autotransfer Enable Status 40635 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
OEL Style Virtual Toggle 40636 Uint16 2 RW n/a No Change=0 Change State=1
Pre-position 2 Enable Status 40637 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
UEL Style Mode 40638 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
OEL Option Mode 40639 Uint16 2 R n/a Offline=0 Online=1
Pre-position Selection 40640 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
UEL Style Enabled 40641 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Volt Match Mode 40642 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
OEL Enabled 40643 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
UEL Enabled 40644 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
SCL Enabled 40645 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Internal Tracking Mode 40646 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
External Tracking Mode 40647 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Voltage Matching Mode 40648 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Unused Registers 3 40649 U3 52 R n/a n/a
Filler
Var Limiter Enable 40675 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Unused Registers 4 40676 U4 50 R n/a n/a
Filler
FCR Pre-Position Mode 40701 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
AVR Pre-Position Mode 40702 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Var Pre-Position Mode 40703 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
PF Pre-Position Mode 40704 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
FCR Pre-Position 2 Mode 40705 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
AVR Pre-Position 2 Mode 40706 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Var Pre-Position 2 Mode 40707 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
PF Pre-Position 2 Mode 40708 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
FVR Pre-Position Mode 40709 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
FVR Pre-Position 2 Mode 40710 Uint16 2 RW n/a Maintain=0 Release=1
Unused Registers 5 40711 U5 80 R n/a n/a
Filler
FCR Mode Setpoint 40751 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12
AVR Mode Setpoint 40753 Float 4 RW Volt 84 - 144
Var Mode Setpoint in kvar 40755 Float 4 RW kvar 0-0
PF Mode Setpoint 40757 Float 4 RW PF -2 - 2

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-44 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Droop Setting in Percent 40759 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 30
FCR Minimum Setpoint 40761 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AVR Minimum Setpoint 40763 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Var Minimum Setpoint 40765 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PF Minimum Setpoint 40767 Float 4 R n/a n/a
FCR Maximum Setpoint 40769 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AVR Maximum Setpoint 40771 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Var Maximum Setpoint 40773 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PF Maximum Setpoint 40775 Float 4 R n/a n/a
FCR Mode Traverse Rate 40777 Float 4 RW Second 10 - 200
AVR Mode Traverse Rate 40779 Float 4 RW Second 10 - 200
Var Mode Traverse Rate 40781 Float 4 RW Second 10 - 200
PF Mode Traverse Rate 40783 Float 4 RW Second 10 - 200
FCR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 40785 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12
AVR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 40787 Float 4 RW Volt 84 - 144
Var Mode Setpoint Pre-Position in kvar 40789 Float 4 RW kvar 0-0
PF Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 40791 Float 4 RW PF -2 - 2
FCR Mode Setpoint Step Size 40793 Float 4 R n/a n/a
AVR Mode Setpoint Step Size 40795 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Var Mode Setpoint Step Size 40797 Float 4 R n/a n/a
PF Mode Setpoint Step Size 40799 Float 4 R n/a n/a
FCR Mode Setpoint Adjustable Minimum 40801 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 120
AVR Mode Setpoint Adjustable Minimum 40803 Float 4 RW Percent 70 - 120
Var Mode Setpoint Adjustable Minimum 40805 Float 4 RW Percent -100 - 100
PF Mode Setpoint Adjustable Minimum 40807 Float 4 RW PF 0.5 - 1
FCR Mode Setpoint Adjustable Maximum 40809 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 120
AVR Mode Setpoint Adjustable Maximum 40811 Float 4 RW Percent 70 - 120
Var Mode Setpoint Adjustable Maximum 40813 Float 4 RW Percent -100 - 100
PF Mode Setpoint Adjustable Maximum 40815 Float 4 RW PF -1 - -0.5
Minimum Value for FCR Adjustable 40817 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Minimum
Minimum Value for AVR Adjustable 40819 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Minimum
Minimum Value for Var Adjustable 40821 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Minimum
Minimum Value for PF Adjustable 40823 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Minimum
Maximum Value for FCR Adjustable 40825 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Maximum
Maximum Value for AVR Adjustable 40827 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Maximum
Maximum Value for Var Adjustable 40829 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Maximum
Maximum Value for PF Adjustable 40831 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Maximum
Step Size for FCR Adjustable Maximum 40833 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Step Size for AVR Adjustable Maximum 40835 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Step Size for Var Adjustable Maximum 40837 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Step Size for PF Adjustable Maximum 40839 Float 4 R n/a n/a
FCR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 2 40841 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12
AVR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 2 40843 Float 4 RW Volt 84 - 144
Var Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 2 40845 Float 4 RW kvar 0-0
PF Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 2 40847 Float 4 RW PF -2 - 2
Line Drop Compensation Setpoint 40849 Float 4 RW n/a n/a

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-45

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

FVR Mode Setpoint 40851 Float 4 RW Volt 0 - 75
FVR Minimum Setpoint 40853 Float 4 R n/a n/a
FVR Maximum Setpoint 40855 Float 4 R n/a n/a
FVR Mode Traverse Rate 40857 Float 4 RW Second 10 - 200
FVR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 40859 Float 4 RW Volt 0 - 75
FVR Mode Setpoint Step Size 40861 Float 4 R n/a n/a
FVR Mode Setpoint Adjustable Minimum 40863 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 150
FVR Mode Setpoint Adjustable Maximum 40865 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 150
Minimum Value for FVR Adjustable 40867 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Minimum
Maximum Value for FVR Adjustable 40869 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Maximum
Step Size for FVR Adjustable Maximum 40871 Float 4 R n/a n/a
FVR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position 2 40873 Float 4 RW Volt 0 - 75
Reserved 9 40875 C5 50 R n/a n/a
Filler
Exc Cur Preposition 1Traverse Rate 40900 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Exc Cur Preposition 2Traverse Rate 40902 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Gen Volt Preposition 1Traverse Rate 40904 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Gen Volt Preposition 2Traverse Rate 40906 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Gen Var Preposition 1Traverse Rate 40908 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Gen Var Preposition 2Traverse Rate 40910 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Gen PF Preposition 1Traverse Rate 40912 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Gen PF Preposition 2Traverse Rate 40914 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Exc Volt Preposition 1Traverse Rate 40916 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Exc Volt Preposition 2Traverse Rate 40918 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 720
Unused Registers 6 40920 U6 462 R n/a n/a
Filler
Setting Group Indication, Soft Start 41151 Uint16 2 R n/a Primary=1 Secondary=2
PSS Power Level Enable 41152 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Unused Registers 7 41153 U7 36 R n/a n/a
Filler
Soft Start Threshold 41171 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 90
Soft Start Duration 41173 Float 4 RW Second 1 - 7200
Underfrequency Corner Frequency 41175 Float 4 RW Hertz 15 - 90
Volts per Hz High Setting 41177 Float 4 RW n/a 0-3
Volts per Hz Low Setting 41179 Float 4 RW n/a 0-3
Volts per Hz Time Setting 41181 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 10
Width of Voltage Matching Window 41183 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 20
Voltage Matching Reference 41185 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 700
Fine Voltage Adjust Band 41187 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 30
Time Required for Loss of Sensing 41189 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 30
Loss of Sensing Level Under Balanced 41191 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 100
Conditions
Loss of Sensing Level Under 41193 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 100
Unbalanced Conditions
Reserved 10 41195 Float 4 R n/a 0 - 10000
Slope of Underfrequency Curve 41197 Float 4 RW n/a 0-3
Reserved 11 41199 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 10000
Reserved 12 41201 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 10000
PF Active Power Level 41203 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 30
Unused Registers 8 41205 U8 132 R n/a n/a
Filler
Soft Start Threshold Secondary 41271 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 90

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-46 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Soft Start Duration Secondary 41273 Float 4 RW Second 1 - 7200
Reserved 13 41275 C6 152 R n/a n/a
Filler
Active OEL Limiter Setting Group 41351 Uint16 2 R n/a Primary=1 Secondary=2
OEL dvdt Enable 41352 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Setting Group Selection for Var Limiter 41353 Uint16 2 R n/a Primary=1 Secondary=2
Unused Registers 9 41354 U9 14 R n/a n/a
Filler
On-line High OEL Level 41361 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Time Allowed for On-line High OEL Level 41363 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 240
On-line Medium OEL Level 41365 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Time Allowed for On-line Medium OEL 41367 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 240
Level
On-line Low OEL Level 41369 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Off-line High OEL Level 41371 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Off-line Low OEL Level 41373 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Time Allowed for Off-line High OEL 41375 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 240
Takeover OEL Offline High Limit Level 41377 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Takeover OEL Offline Low Limit Level 41379 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Takeover OEL Offline Time Dial 41381 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1 - 20
Takeover OEL Online High Limit Level 41383 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Takeover OEL Online Low Limit Level 41385 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Takeover OEL Online Time Dial 41387 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1 - 20
Unused Registers 10 41389 U10 44 R n/a n/a
Filler
Active UEL Limiter Setting Group 41411 Uint16 2 R n/a Primary=1 Secondary=2
Unused Registers 11 41412 U11 18 R n/a n/a
Filler
First UEL Point kW Value 41421 Float 4 RW KW 0 - 62
Second UEL Point kW Value 41423 Float 4 RW KW 0 - 62
Third UEL Point kW Value 41425 Float 4 RW KW 0 - 62
Fourth UEL Point kW Value 41427 Float 4 RW KW 0 - 62
Fifth UEL Point kW Value 41429 Float 4 RW KW 0 - 62
First UEL Point kvar Value 41431 Float 4 RW kvar 0 - 62
Second UEL Point kvar Value 41433 Float 4 RW kvar 0 - 62
Third UEL Point kvar Value 41435 Float 4 RW kvar 0 - 62
Fourth UEL Point kvar Value 41437 Float 4 RW kvar 0 - 62
Fifth UEL Point kvar Value 41439 Float 4 RW kvar 0 - 62
Primary UEL Bias 41441 Float 4 RW Var 0 - 99
Real Power Filter Time Constant 41443 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 20
Real Power Exponent 41445 Float 4 RW n/a 0-2
Unused Registers 12 41447 U12 48 R n/a n/a
Filler
Active SCL Limiter Setting Group 41471 Uint16 2 R n/a Primary=1 Secondary=2
Unused Registers 13 41472 U13 18 R n/a n/a
Filler
SCL High Limit Level 41481 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 66000
Time Allowed at SCL High Limit Level 41483 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 240
Reserved 14 41485 Float 4 R n/a 0 - 10000
Reserved 15 41487 Float 4 R n/a 0 - 10000
SCL Low Limit Level 41489 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 66000
Primary SCL No Response Time 41491 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 10
Unused Registers 14 41493 U14 184 R n/a n/a
Filler

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-47

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

OEL dvdt Setting 41585 Float 4 RW n/a -10 - 0
Var Limiter Setpoint for Primary Selection 41587 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 200
Var Limiter Initial Delay for Primary 41589 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 300
Selection
Unused Registers 15 41591 U15 260 R n/a n/a
Filler
On-line High OEL Level Secondary 41721 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Time Allowed for On-line High OEL Level 41723 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 240
Secondary
On-line Medium OEL Level Secondary 41725 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Time Allowed for On-line Medium OEL 41727 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 240
Level Secondary
On-line Low OEL Level Secondary 41729 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Off-line High OEL Level Secondary 41731 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Off-line Low OEL Level Secondary 41733 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Time Allowed for Off-line High OEL 41735 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 240
Secondary
Takeover OEL Offline High Limit Level 41737 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Secondary
Takeover OEL Offline Low Limit Level 41739 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Secondary
Takeover OEL Offline Time Dial 41741 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1 - 20
Secondary
Takeover OEL Online High Limit Level 41743 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Secondary
Takeover OEL Online Low Limit Level 41745 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 12000
Secondary
Takeover OEL Online Time Dial 41747 Float 4 RW n/a 0.1 - 20
Secondary
Unused Registers 16 41749 U16 64 R n/a n/a
Filler
First UEL Point kW Value Secondary 41781 Float 4 RW KW 0 - 62
Second UEL Point kW Value Secondary 41783 Float 4 RW Kilowatt 0 - 62
Third UEL Point kW Value Secondary 41785 Float 4 RW Kilowatt 0 - 62
Fourth UEL Point kW Value Secondary 41787 Float 4 RW Kilowatt 0 - 62
Fifth UEL Point kW Value Secondary 41789 Float 4 RW Kilowatt 0 - 62
First UEL Point kvar Value Secondary 41791 Float 4 RW Kilovar 0 - 62
Second UEL Point kvar Value Secondary 41793 Float 4 RW Kilovar 0 - 62
Third UEL Point kvar Value Secondary 41795 Float 4 RW Kilovar 0 - 62
Fourth UEL Point kvar Value Secondary 41797 Float 4 RW Kilovar 0 - 62
Fifth UEL Point kvar Value Secondary 41799 Float 4 RW Kilovar 0 - 62
Secondary UEL Bias 41801 Float 4 RW Var 0 - 99
Unused Registers 17 41803 U17 76 R n/a n/a
Filler
SCL High Limit Level Secondary 41841 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 66000
Time Allowed at SCL High Limit Level 41843 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 240
Secondary
Reserved 16 41845 Float 4 R n/a 0 - 10000
Reserved 17 41847 Float 4 R n/a 0 - 10000
SCL Low Limit Level Secondary 41849 Float 4 RW Amp 0 - 66000
Secondary SCL No Response Time 41851 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 10
Var Limiter Setpoint for Secondary 41853 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 200
Selection
Var Limiter Initial Delay for Secondary 41855 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 300
Selection
Reserved 18 41857 C7 1238 R n/a n/a
Filler

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-48 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Active Gain Setting Group 42476 Uint16 2 R n/a Primary=1 Secondary=2
Unused Registers 18 42477 U18 48 R n/a n/a
Filler
Index into Table of Gain Constants 42501 Float 4 RW n/a 1 - 21
Primary AVR Mode Proportional Gain 42503 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Primary AVR Mode Integral Gain 42505 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Primary AVR Mode Derivative Gain 42507 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
OEL Proportional Gain - Kp 42509 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
OEL Integral Gain - Ki 42511 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
PF Mode Integral Gain - Ki 42513 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Var Mode Integral Gain - Ki 42515 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
FCR Mode Loop Gain - Kg 42517 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Primary AVR Mode Loop Gain - Kg 42519 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Var Mode Loop Gain - Kg 42521 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
PF Mode Loop Gain - Kg 42523 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
OEL Loop Gain - Kg 42525 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
UEL Loop Gain - Kg 42527 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Voltage Matching Loop Gain - Kg 42529 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Voltage Matching Proportional Gain - Kp 42531 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Voltage Matching Integral Gain - Ki 42533 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Reserved 19 42535 Float 4 R n/a 0 - 10000
Reserved 20 42537 Float 4 R n/a 0 - 10000
Reserved 21 42539 Float 4 R n/a 0 - 10000
UEL Proportional Gain - Kp 42541 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
UEL Integral Gain - Ki 42543 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Primary AVR Mode Derivative Time 42545 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Constant - Td
SCL Loop Gain - Kg 42547 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
SCL Proportional Gain - Kp 42549 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
SCL Integral Gain - Ki 42551 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Primary FCR Mode Proportional Gain 42553 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Primary FCR Mode Integral Gain 42555 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Primary FCR Mode Derivative Gain 42557 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Primary FCR Mode Derivative Time 42559 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Constant - Td
FVR Mode Proportional Gain 42561 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
FVR Mode Integral Gain 42563 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
FVR Mode Derivative Gain 42565 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
FVR Mode Derivative Time Constant - Td 42567 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
FVR Mode Loop Gain - Kg 42569 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Unused Registers 19 42571 U19 76 R n/a n/a
Filler
Loop Gain for Var Limiter - Kg 42609 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Integral Gain for Var Limiter - Ki 42611 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Unused Registers 20 42613 U20 126 R n/a n/a
Filler

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-49

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Secondary Gain Option Index 42676 Uint32 4 RW n/a T'do=1.0 Te=0.17=1 T'do=1.5
Te=0.25=2 T'do=2.0 Te=0.33=3
T'do=2.5 Te=0.42=4 T'do=3.0
Te=0.50=5 T'do=3.5 Te=0.58=6
T'do=4.0 Te=0.67=7 T'do=4.5
Te=0.75=8 T'do=5.0 Te=0.83=9
T'do=5.5 Te=0.92=10 T'do=6.0
Te=1.00=11 T'do=6.5 Te=1.08=12
T'do=7.0 Te=1.17=13 T'do=7.5
Te=1.25=14 T'do=8.0 Te=1.33=15
T'do=8.5 Te=1.42=16 T'do=9.0
Te=1.50=17 T'do=9.5 Te=1.58=18
T'do=10.0 Te=1.67=19 T'do=10.5
Te=1.75=20 Custom=21
Secondary AVR Mode Proportional Gain 42678 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
- Kp
Secondary AVR Mode Integral Gain - Ki 42680 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Secondary AVR Mode Derivative Gain - 42682 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Kd
Secondary AVR Mode Loop Gain - Kg 42684 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 1000
Secondary AVR Derivative Time 42686 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Constant - Td
Reserved 22 42688 C8 626 R n/a n/a
Filler
Field Overvoltage Alarm Enable 43001 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overcurrent Alarm Enable 43002 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Stator Undervoltage Alarm Enable 43003 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Stator Overvoltage Alarm Enable 43004 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Over Temperature Alarm Enable 43005 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss of Field Alarm Enable 43006 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss of Field Isolation Transducer Alarm 43007 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enable
Control Power Low Alarm Enable 43008 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Protection 24 Volts per Hz Mode 43009 Uint16 2 RW n/a n/a
Reserved 23 43010 Uint16 2 R n/a 0 - 65535
Reserved 24 43011 Uint16 2 R n/a 0 - 65535
Reserved 25 43012 Uint16 2 R n/a 0 - 65535
Protection 24 Inverse Time Curve 43013 Uint16 2 RW n/a 0.5=0 1=1 2=2
Exponent
Unused Registers 21 43014 U21 22 R n/a n/a
Filler
Active Protection Setting Group 43025 Uint16 2 R n/a Primary=1 Secondary=2
Field Overvoltage Level 43026 Float 4 RW Volt 0;1 - 2400
Field Overcurrent Base Level 43028 Float 4 RW Amp 0.1 – 20000
Stator Undervoltage Level 43030 Float 4 RW Volt 0;1 - 600000
Stator Overvoltage Level 43032 Float 4 RW Volt 0 – 600000
Field Overvoltage Delay 43034 Float 4 RW Second 0;0.2 - 30.0
Field Overcurrent Delay 43036 Float 4 RW Second 0;0.2 - 30.0
Stator Undervoltage Delay 43038 Float 4 RW Second 0.1 - 60.0
Stator Overvoltage Delay 43040 Float 4 RW Second 0.1 - 60.0
Field Over Temperature Level 43042 Float 4 RW Deg F 0 - 572
Field Over Temperature Time Delay 43044 Float 4 RW Millisecond 100 - 60000
Loss of Field Pickup Level 43046 Float 4 RW KiloVAr 0 - 3000000
Loss of Field Time Delay 43048 Float 4 RW Second 0;0 - 300.0
Loss of Field Isolation Transducer Level 43050 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Loss of Field Isolation Transducer Time 43052 Float 4 RW n/a n/a
Delay
Control Power Low Level 43054 Float 4 R n/a n/a
Control Power Low Time Delay 43056 Float 4 R n/a n/a

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-50 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Protection 24 Inverse Time Pickup 43058 Float 4 RW n/a n/a
Setpoint
Protection 24 Inverse Time Pickup Time 43060 Float 4 RW n/a n/a
Dial
Protection 24 Reset Time Dial 43062 Float 4 RW n/a n/a
Protection 24 Definite Time Pickup 1 43064 Float 4 RW n/a n/a
Protection 24 Definite Time Delay 1 43066 Float 4 RW n/a n/a
Protection 24 Definite Time Pickup 2 43068 Float 4 RW n/a n/a
Protection 24 Definite Time Delay 2 43070 Float 4 RW n/a n/a
Reserved 26 43072 C9 608 R n/a n/a
Filler
Reserved 27 43376 Uint16 2 R n/a 0 - 65535
Reserved 28 43377 Uint16 2 R n/a 0 - 65535
Exciter Open Diode Protection Enable 43378 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Exciter Shorted Diode Protection Enable 43379 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Unused Registers 22 43380 U22 42 R n/a n/a
Filler
Exciter Open Diode Ripple Pickup Level 43401 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 100
Exciter Shorted Diode Ripple Pickup 43403 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 100
Level
EDM Protection Disable Level 43405 Float 4 RW Percent 0 - 100
Exciter Open Diode Time Delay 43407 Float 4 RW Second 10 - 60
Exciter Shorted Diode Time Delay 43409 Float 4 RW Second 5 - 30
Pole Ratio 43411 Float 4 RW n/a 0;1 - 10
Reserved 29 43413 C10 226 R n/a n/a
Filler
Output for Relay 1 43526 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Unused Registers 23 43527 U23 98 R n/a n/a
Filler
Output for Relay 2 43576 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Unused Registers 23-2 43577 U23 98 R n/a n/a
Filler
Output for Relay 3 43626 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Unused Registers 23-3 43627 U23 98 R n/a n/a
Filler
Output for Relay 4 43676 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Unused Registers 23-4 43677 U23 98 R n/a n/a
Filler
Output for Relay 5 43726 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Unused Registers 23-5 43727 U23 98 R n/a n/a
Filler
Output for Relay 6 43776 Uint16 2 R n/a n/a
Reserved 30 43777 C11 698 R n/a n/a
Filler
RS232 Baud Rate 44126 Uint16 2 RW n/a 4800 Baud=4800 9600 Baud=9600
19200 Baud=19200 38400
Baud=38400 57600 Baud=57600
115200 Baud=115200
Reserved 31 44127 Uint16 2 RW n/a 0 - 65535
RS485 Baud Rate 44128 Uint16 2 RW n/a 1200 Baud=1200 2400 Baud=2400
4800 Baud=4800 9600 Baud=9600
19200 Baud=19200 38400
Baud=38400 57600 Baud=57600
115200 Baud=115200
RS485 Parity 44129 Uint16 2 RW n/a 69 - 79
RS485 Stop Bits 44130 Uint16 2 RW n/a 1 Stop Bit=1 2 Stop Bits=2
DECS-250 Polling Address 44131 Uint16 2 RW n/a 1 - 247
Modbus Response Time Delay 44132 Uint16 2 RW Millisecond 10 - 10000

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-51

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

System Clock Month 44133 Uint16 2 RW n/a 1 - 12
System Clock Day 44134 Uint16 2 RW n/a 1 - 31
System Clock Year 44135 Uint16 2 RW n/a 2000 - 2099
System Clock Daylight Savings Time 44136 Uint16 2 RW n/a On=0 Off=1
System Clock Hour 44137 Uint16 2 RW n/a 0 - 23
System Clock Minute 44138 Uint16 2 RW n/a 0 - 59
System Clock Second 44139 Uint16 2 RW n/a 0 - 59
System Clock Twelve Hour Mode 44140 Uint16 2 RW n/a 12 Hour Mode=0 24 Hour Mode=1
System Clock AM PM 44141 Uint16 2 RW n/a AM=0 PM=1
Reserved 32 44142 C12 118 R n/a n/a
Filler
Reserved 33 44201 C13 100 R n/a n/a
Filler
PSS Enable 44251 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Active PSS Setting Group 44252 Uint16 2 R n/a Primary=1 Secondary=2
PSS RoC Enable 44253 Uint16 2 R n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Block PSS RoC mode 44254 Uint16 2 R n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Unused Registers 24 44255 U24 10 R n/a n/a
Filler
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch0 44260 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch1 44261 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch2 44262 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch3 44263 Uint16 2 RW n/a Frequency=0 Der. Speed=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch4 44264 Uint16 2 RW n/a Power=0 Der. Freq/Speed=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch5 44265 Uint16 2 RW n/a Exclude=0 Include=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch6 44266 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch7 44267 Uint16 2 RW n/a Off=0 On=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch8 44268 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Switch9 44269 Uint16 2 RW n/a Exclude=0 Include=1
Power System Stabilizer Primary 44270 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Switch10
Unused Registers 25 44271 U25 60 R n/a n/a
Filler
Power System Stabilizer Primary Tw1 44301 Float 4 RW Second 1 - 20
Power System Stabilizer Primary Tw2 44303 Float 4 RW Second 1 - 20
Power System Stabilizer Primary H 44305 Float 4 RW n/a 0.01 - 25
Power System Stabilizer Primary Tlpf1 44307 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 20
(time constant, low-pass filter)
Power System Stabilizer Primary T1 44309 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Primary T2 44311 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Primary T3 44313 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Primary T4 44315 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Primary T5 44317 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Primary T6 44319 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Primary T7 44321 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Primary T8 44323 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Primary 44325 Float 4 RW Second 0.02 - 5
EtLmtTlpf (time constant, low pass filter)
Power System Stabilizer Primary 44327 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 10
EtLmtVref
Power System Stabilizer Primary Zn1 44329 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Zd1 44331 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Wn1 44333 Float 4 RW n/a 10 - 150
Power System Stabilizer Primary Zn2 44335 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-52 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Power System Stabilizer Primary Zd2 44337 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power System Stabilizer Primary Wn2 44339 Float 4 RW n/a 10 - 150
Power System Stabilizer Primary LmtVhi 44341 Float 4 RW n/a 0.01 - 0.04
Power System Stabilizer Primary LmtVlo 44343 Float 4 RW n/a -0.04 - -0.01
Power System Stabilizer Primary 44345 Float 4 RW n/a 0-2
LmtTDelay
Power System Stabilizer Primary 44347 Float 4 RW n/a 5 - 30
Tw5Normal
Power System Stabilizer Primary 44349 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Tw5Limit
Power System Stabilizer Primary Ks 44351 Float 4 RW n/a -100 - 100
Power System Stabilizer Primary Limit 44353 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 0.5
Plus
Power System Stabilizer Primary Limit 44355 Float 4 RW n/a -0.5 - 0
Minus
Power System Stabilizer Primary Xq 44357 Float 4 RW n/a 0-5
Power System Stabilizer Primary Output 44359 Float 4 RW n/a -3 - 3
Scale
Power System Stabilizer Primary Power 44361 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
On Threshold
Power System Stabilizer Primary Power 44363 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Hysteresis
Power System Stabilizer Primary Power 44365 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
On Threshold Inst
Power System Stabilizer Primary Power 44367 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Hysteresis Inst
Unused Registers 26 44369 U26 52 R n/a n/a
Filler
Power System Stabilizer Primary Power 44395 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Level Percentage
Power System Stabilizer Primary Power 44397 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Level Hysteresis
Unused Registers 27 44399 U27 40 R n/a n/a
Filler
Power System Stabilizer Rate of Change 44419 Float 4 RW Hertz Per 0 - 10
Threshold Second
Power System Stabilizer Rate of Change 44421 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 20
Time Delay
Power System Stabilizer Rate of Change 44423 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 20
Block Time
Power System Stabilizer Rate of Change 44425 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 20
Low Pass Filter Time Constant
Power System Stabilizer Rate of Change 44427 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 20
Washout Filter Time Constant
Power System Stabilizer Frequency Rate 44429 Float 4 R Hertz Per -15 - 15
of Change Second
Unused Registers 28 44431 U28 158 R n/a n/a
Filler
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44510 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Switch0
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44511 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Switch1
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44512 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Switch2
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44513 Uint16 2 RW n/a Frequency=0 Der. Speed=1
Switch3
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44514 Uint16 2 RW n/a Power=0 Der. Freq/Speed=1
Switch4
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44515 Uint16 2 RW n/a Exclude=0 Include=1
Switch5
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44516 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Switch6

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 26-53

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44517 Uint16 2 RW n/a Off=0 On=1
Switch7
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44518 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Switch8
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44519 Uint16 2 RW n/a Exclude=0 Include=1
Switch9
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44520 Uint16 2 RW n/a Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Switch10
Unused Registers 25-2 44521 U25 60 R n/a n/a
Filler
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Tw1 44551 Float 4 RW Second 1 - 20
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Tw2 44553 Float 4 RW Second 1 - 20
Power System Stabilizer Secondary H 44555 Float 4 RW n/a 0.01 - 25
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44557 Float 4 RW Second 0 - 20
Tlpf1 (time constant, low-pass filter)
Power System Stabilizer Secondary T1 44559 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Secondary T2 44561 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Secondary T3 44563 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Secondary T4 44565 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Secondary T5 44567 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Secondary T6 44569 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Secondary T7 44571 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Secondary T8 44573 Float 4 RW Second 0.001 - 6
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44575 Float 4 RW Second 0.02 - 5
EtLmtTlpf (time constant, low-pass filter)
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44577 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 10
EtLmtVref
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Zn1 44579 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Zd1 44581 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Wn1 44583 Float 4 RW n/a 10 - 150
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Zn2 44585 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Zd2 44587 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Wn2 44589 Float 4 RW n/a 10 - 150
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Lmt 44591 Float 4 RW n/a 0.01 - 0.04
Vhi
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Lmt 44593 Float 4 RW n/a -0.04 - -0.01
Vlo
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Lmt 44595 Float 4 RW n/a 0-2
T Delay
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Tw5 44597 Float 4 RW n/a 5 - 30
Normal
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Tw5 44599 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Limit
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Ks 44601 Float 4 RW n/a -100 - 100
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Limit 44603 Float 4 RW n/a 0 - 0.5
Plus
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Limit 44605 Float 4 RW n/a -0.5 - 0
Minus
Power System Stabilizer Secondary Xq 44607 Float 4 RW n/a 0-5
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44609 Float 4 RW n/a -3 - 3
Output Scale
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44611 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power On Threshold
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44613 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power Hysteresis
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44615 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power On Threshold Inst
Power System Stabilizer Secondary 44617 Float 4 RW n/a 0-1
Power Hysteresis Inst

DECS-450 Modbus® Communication

26-54 9597100990

Name Register Type Bytes R/W Unit Range

Reserved 34 44619 C14 760 R n/a n/a
Filler

Configurable Protection Parameters

All selectable parameters available to configurable protection elements are listed below.

Gen VAB=0 Neg I=27

Gen VBC=1 Pos V=28
Gen VCA=2 Pos I=29
Gen V Average=3 PSS Output=30
Bus Frequency=4 Analog Input 1=31
Bus VAB=5 Analog Input 2=32
Bus VBC=6 Analog Input 3=33
Bus VCA=7 Analog Input 4=34
Gen Frequency=8 Analog Input 5=35
Gen Power Factor=9 Analog Input 6=36
kWh=10 Analog Input 7=37
kvarh=11 Analog Input 8=38
Gen IA=12 RTD Input 1=39
Gen IB=13 RTD Input 2=40
Gen IC=14 RTD Input 3=41
Gen I Average=15 RTD Input 4=42
kW Total=16 RTD Input 5=43
KVA Total=17 RTD Input 6=44
Kvar Total=18 RTD Input 7=45
EDM Ripple=19 RTD Input 8=46
Field Voltage=20 Thermocouple 1=47
Field Current=21 Thermocouple 2=48
Aux Input Voltage=22 Network Load Share Error Percent=50
Aux Input Current (mA)=23 Gen Scaled PF=51
Setpoint Position=24 Control Output Per Unit=52
Tracking Error=25 Field Temperature=53
Neg V=26

Modbus® Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-1

27 • PROFIBUS Communication
On units equipped with the PROFIBUS communication protocol (style XX1XXXX), the DECS-450 sends
and receives PROFIBUS data through a DB-9 port located on the rear panel.

Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices. Nonvolatile
memory is used to store information (such as settings) that needs to be
preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise restarted.
Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a physical limit on the
number of times they can be erased and written. In this product, the limit is
100,000 erase/write cycles. During product application, consideration should
be given to communications, logic, and other factors that may cause
frequent/repeated writes of settings or other information that is retained by the
product. Applications that result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce
the useable product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.

Refer to the Communication chapter for PROFIBUS communication settings in BESTCOMSPlus® and the
Terminals and Connectors chapter for wiring.
The DECS-450 utilizes PROFIBUS DP (Decentralized Peripherals) to operate sensors and actuators via
a centralized controller in production (factory) automation applications.
Per IEC 61158, PROFIBUS, consists of digitized signals transmitted over a simple, two-wire bus. It is
intended to replace the industry-standard, 4 to 20 mA signal used in the transmission of system
parameters. PROFIBUS expands the amount of information shared by system devices and makes the
exchange of data faster and more efficient.

Data Types
Float/UINT32
Parameters listed in Table 27-6 as Float or UINT32 types are “Input 2 word” (4 byte) parameters. The
Network Byte Order setting allows the byte order of these parameters to be set to MSB first or LSB first.
This setting can be found by using the following navigation paths.
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, Profibus Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, Profibus Setup

UINT8
Parameters listed in Table 27-6 as UINT8 types are bit-packed binary data. This allows transmission of up
to eight single-bit parameters in each byte of data. When configuring an instance of UINT8 type
parameters, the data type is “Input 1 byte” and the size is determined by the number of parameters in the
instance divided by eight, rounding up to the next integer. Table 27-1 illustrates the sizes of the UINT8
cyclic data instances.
Table 27-1. Instance Data Size Calculation
Number of Parameters Number of Parameters
Instance Number Total Data Size
in the Instance Divided by Eight
6 5 0.625 1 byte
7 7 0.875 1 byte
8 5 0.625 1 byte

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-2 9597100990

Number of Parameters Number of Parameters

Instance Number Total Data Size
in the Instance Divided by Eight
9 6 0.75 1 byte
10 16 2 2 bytes
11 12 1.5 2 bytes
12 8 1 1 byte
Within these instances, the data is packed in the order listed in Table 27-6. The first item is the lowest bit
of the first byte. If there are unused bits, they are filled with a value of zero. Parameters of UINT8 type are
not affected by the DECS-450 Network Byte Order setting. The examples, below, show the bit packing
order for instances 8 (Controller Status Cyclic) and 11 (Local Contact Outputs Cyclic).

Example 1: Bit Packing Order for Instance 8

The total data size of Instance 8 is one byte. Table 27-2 shows the parameters of instance 8 as they
appear in Table 27-6. The first parameter in instance 8, with key name DECSCONTROL IN AVR MODE,
is represented by the lowest bit in the byte (bit 0). Bit 1 represents the next parameter with key name
DECSCONTROL IN FCR MODE and so on. The three highest bits in this instance are unused and thus
always return a value of zero.
Table 27-2. Instance 8 Parameters
Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Range
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in AVR mode Not in AVR mode=0, In AVR mode=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in FCR mode Not in FCR mode=0, In FCR mode=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in FVR mode Not in FVR mode=0, In FVR mode=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in PF mode Not in PF mode=0, In PF mode=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in VAR mode Not in var mode=0, In var mode=1

Table 27-3 shows the bit number of each parameter in instance 8 and an example packet returned from a
DECS-450. Reading a value of 0x02 (0000 0010) for instance 8 indicates that the device is operating in
FCR mode.
Table 27-3. Instance 8 Bit Order
Packet Returned from
Instance Number Bit Number Key Name
DECS-450
8 0 DECS control in AVR mode 0
1 DECS control in FCR mode 1
2 DECS control in FVR mode 0
3 DECS control in PF mode 0
4 DECS control in VAR mode 0
5 0 (unused) 0
6 0 (unused) 0
7 0 (unused) 0

Example 2: Bit Packing Order for Instance 11

The total size of Instance 11 is two bytes. Table 27-4 shows the parameters of instance 11 as they
appear in Table 27-6. The first parameter in instance 11, with key name CONTACTOUTPUTS
WATCHDOGOUTPUT, is represented by the lowest bit in the first byte (bit 0). The ninth parameter, with
key name CONTACTOUTPUTS OUTPUT8, is represented by the lowest bit in the second byte (bit 0).
The four highest bits in the second byte are unused and thus always return a value of zero.
Table 27-4. Instance 11 Parameters
Inst.
Instance Name Type RW Key Name Range
#
Contact outputs
Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R
Watchdog output Open=0, Closed=1

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-3

Inst.
Instance Name Type RW Key Name Range
#

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 1 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 2 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 3 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 4 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 5 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 6 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 7 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 8 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 9 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 10 Open=0, Closed=1

Local Contact Outputs Cyclic 11 UINT8 R Contact outputs output 11 Open=0, Closed=1

Table 27-5 shows the bit number of each parameter in instance 11 and an example packet returned from
a DECS-450. Reading a value of 0xA4 06 (1010 0100 0000 0110) for instance 11 indicates that contact
outputs 2, 5, 7, 9, and 10 are closed. The first byte is 1010 0100 and the second is 0000 0110.
Table 27-5. Instance 11 Bit Order
Instance Packet Returned from
Byte Number Bit Number Key Name
Number DECS-450
11 1 0 Contact outputs watchdog 0
1 Contact outputs output 1 0
2 Contact outputs output 2 1
3 Contact outputs output 3 0
4 Contact outputs output 4 0
5 Contact outputs output 5 1
6 Contact outputs output 6 0
7 Contact outputs output 7 1
2 0 Contact outputs output 8 0
1 Contact outputs output 9 1
2 Contact outputs output 10 1
3 Contact outputs output 11 0
4 0 (unused) 0
5 0 (unused) 0
6 0 (unused) 0
7 0 (unused) 0

Setup
The following steps are provided to assist in setting up the DECS-450 as a slave on a PROFIBUS
network. Please refer to the documentation included with your PLC configuration software for installation
and operation instructions.

1. Download the DECS-450 GSD file from the Basler website: www.basler.com
2. Using PLC configuration software, import the GSD file. This allows the DECS-450 to be included in
the bus configuration as a slave.
3. Assign a unique PROFIBUS address to the DECS-450. This allows the master to exchange data with
the DECS-450.
DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication
27-4 9597100990

4. Select modules from the GSD file to be part of the data exchange. Selecting the cyclic parameters is
recommended. The cyclic parameters are comprised of the first 12 instances in the PROFIBUS
parameters table (Table 27-6). Instances 1 through 5 consist of 26 float types. Instances 6 through 12
consist of 9 UINT8 types.
5. Set each selected module to an address in the master's memory bank.
6. Compile and download the configuration to the master before going online.

When the PROFIBUS network is initialized, the master connects to each slave checking for address
mismatches and sending configuration data. The configuration data is sent so that the master and slave
agree on the data exchange to occur. Then, the master begins polling each slave in a cyclic order.

Note
It is not possible to write a portion of an instance by specifying a length
smaller than the size of the instance. To modify a single parameter,
read the entire instance, update the desired parameter, and write the
entire instance back to the device.

PROFIBUS Parameters
PROFIBUS parameters are listed in Table 27-6. Instances with names ending in “cyclic” are automatically
transmitted at a periodic rate. All other instances are acyclic and transmitted only when requested by the
PLC.
Table 27-6. PROFIBUS Parameters
Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R VAB GG V 0 - 2000000000
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R VBC GG V 0 - 2000000000
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R VCA GG V 0 - 2000000000
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R IA GG Amp 0 - 2000000000
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R IB GG Amp 0 - 2000000000
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R IC GG Amp 0 - 2000000000
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R Frequency GG Hz 10 - 180
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R Total Watts AVG GG Watt -3.00E+14 - 3.00E+14
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R Total VARS AVG GG Var -3.00E+14 - 3.00E+14
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R Total S GG VA -3.00E+14 - 3.00E+14
Gen Metering Cyclic 1 Float R Total PF GG PF -1 - 1
Bus Metering Cyclic 2 Float R VAB GG V 0 - 2000000000
Bus Metering Cyclic 2 Float R VBC GG V 0 - 2000000000
Bus Metering Cyclic 2 Float R VCA GG V 0 - 2000000000
Bus Metering Cyclic 2 Float R Frequency GG Hz 10 - 180
Field Metering Cyclic 3 Float R VX GG V -1000 - 1000
Field Metering Cyclic 3 Float R IX GG Amp 0 - 2000000000
Field Metering Cyclic 3 Float R Field Temperature GG Deg F -40 – 572
Setpoint Metering Cyclic 4 Float R Gen Voltage Setpoint GG V 84 - 144
Setpoint Metering Cyclic 4 Float R Excitation Current Setpoint Amp 0 - 12
GG
Setpoint Metering Cyclic 4 Float R Excitation Voltage Setpoint V 0 - 75
GG
Setpoint Metering Cyclic 4 Float R Gen Var Setpoint GG kvar n/a
Setpoint Metering Cyclic 4 Float R Gen Pf Setpoint GG PF n/a
Synchronizer Metering 5 Float R Slip Angle GG Deg -359.9 - 359.9
Cyclic

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-5

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Synchronizer Metering 5 Float R Slip Frequency GG Hz n/a
Cyclic
Synchronizer Metering 5 Float R Voltage Diff GG V n/a
Cyclic
Limiter Status Cyclic 6 UINT8 R Alarms OEL ALM No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
Limiter Status Cyclic 6 UINT8 R Alarms UEL ALM No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
Limiter Status Cyclic 6 UINT8 R Alarms SCL ALM No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
Limiter Status Cyclic 6 UINT8 R Alarms VAR No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
Limiter Active
Limiter Status Cyclic 6 UINT8 R Alarms No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
Underfrequency V/Hz
ALM
HMI Indicators Cyclic 7 UINT8 R DECS control No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
DECS null balance
HMI Indicators Cyclic 7 UINT8 R DECS PSS meter No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
DECS PSS active
HMI Indicators Cyclic 7 UINT8 R DECS regulator meter No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
DECS
Internal tracking active
HMI Indicators Cyclic 7 UINT8 R DECS control DECS No Unit Active setpoint is not at a
preposition pre-position value=0, Active
setpoint is at a pre-position
value=1
HMI Indicators Cyclic 7 UINT8 R DECS regulator meter No Unit Active setpoint is not at
setpoint minimum value=0, Active
At lower limit setpoint is at minimum
value=1
HMI Indicators Cyclic 7 UINT8 R DECS regulator meter No Unit Active setpoint is not at
setpoint maximum value=0, Active
At upper limit setpoint is at maximum
value=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in AVR mode No Unit Not in AVR mode=0, In AVR
mode=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in FCR mode No Unit Not in FCR mode=0, In FCR
mode=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in FVR mode No Unit Not in FVR mode=0, In FVR
mode=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in PF mode No Unit Not in PF mode=0, In PF
mode=1
Controller Status Cyclic 8 UINT8 R DECS control in var mode No Unit Not in var mode=0, In var
mode=1
System Status Cyclic 9 UINT8 R DECS control DECS start No Unit Stopped=0, Started=1
stop
System Status Cyclic 9 UINT8 R Alarms if limit No Unit No field short circuit
condition=0, Field short
circuit condition=1
System Status Cyclic 9 UINT8 R DECS control DECS No Unit Not in soft start=0, In soft
Soft start active start=1
System Status Cyclic 9 UINT8 R Alarm report alarm output No Unit No active alarms=0, Active
alarms=1
System Status Cyclic 9 UINT8 R DECS control DECS pf var No Unit PF/var not enabled via
Enable 52 j k PLC=0, PF/var enabled via
PLC=1
System Status Cyclic 9 UINT8 R DECS control DECS parallel No Unit Parallel not enabled via
Enable 52 l m PLC=0, Parallel enabled via
PLC=1
System Status Cyclic 9 UINT8 R More alarms: bridge No Unit Not Active=0, Active=1
overtemperature alarm
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact inputs start input No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact inputs stop input No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 1 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 2 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 3 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-6 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 4 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 5 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 6 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 7 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 8 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 9 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 10 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 11 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 12 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 13 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Inputs Cyclic 10 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 14 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic Watchdog Output
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 1 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 2 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 3 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 4 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 5 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 6 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 7 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 8 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 9 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 10 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Local Contact Outputs 11 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 11 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Cyclic
Settings Group Indication 12 UINT8 R DECS control DECS soft No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Cyclic start Secondary settings active=1
Select secondary settings
Settings Group Indication 12 UINT8 R DECS control DECS PSS No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Cyclic select Secondary settings active=1
Secondary settings
Settings Group Indication 12 UINT8 R DECS control DECS OEL No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Cyclic select Secondary settings active=1
Secondary settings
Settings Group Indication 12 UINT8 R DECS control DECS UEL No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Cyclic select Secondary settings active=1
Secondary settings
Settings Group Indication 12 UINT8 R DECS control DECS SCL No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Cyclic select Secondary settings active=1
Secondary settings
Settings Group Indication 12 UINT8 R DECS control DECS protect No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Cyclic Select secondary settings Secondary settings active=1
Settings Group Indication 12 UINT8 R DECS control DECS PID No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Cyclic Select secondary settings Secondary settings active=1
Settings Group Indication 12 UINT8 R DECS control DECS var No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Cyclic limiter Secondary settings active=1
Select secondary settings
Gen Metering 16 Float R VAB GG (Gen Voltage V 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)
Gen Metering 16 Float R VBC GG (Gen Voltage V 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-7

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Gen Metering 16 Float R VCA GG (Gen Voltage V 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)
Gen Metering 16 Float R VAB GG (Gen Voltage Deg 0 - 360
Angle)
Gen Metering 16 Float R VBC GG (Gen Voltage Deg 0 - 360
Angle)
Gen Metering 16 Float R VCA GG (Gen Voltage Deg 0 - 360
Angle)
Gen Metering 16 Float R IA GG (Gen Current Amp 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)
Gen Metering 16 Float R IB GG (Gen Current Amp 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)
Gen Metering 16 Float R IC GG (Gen Current Amp 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)
Gen Metering 16 Float R IA GG (Gen Current Angle) Deg 0 - 360
Gen Metering 16 Float R IB GG (Gen Current Angle) Deg 0 - 360
Gen Metering 16 Float R IC GG (Gen Current Angle) Deg 0 - 360
Gen Metering 16 Float R IAVG GG Amp 0 - 2000000000
Gen Metering 16 Float R Frequency GG Hz 10 - 180
Gen Metering Per Unit 17 Float R Vab per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Gen Metering Per Unit 17 Float R Vbc per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Gen Metering Per Unit 17 Float R Vca per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Gen Metering Per Unit 17 Float R Vavg per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Gen Metering Per Unit 17 Float R Ia per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Gen Metering Per Unit 17 Float R Ib per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Gen Metering Per Unit 17 Float R Ic per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Gen Metering Per Unit 17 Float R Iavg per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Power Metering 18 Float R Total Watts Primary GG Watt n/a
Power Metering 18 Float R Total VARS Primary GG var n/a
Power Metering 18 Float R Total S Primary GG VA n/a
Power Metering 18 Float R Total PF GG PF -1 - 1
Power Metering 18 Float R POS Watthour Total GG watthour 0.00E+00 - 1.00E+12
Power Metering 18 Float R POS varhour Total GG varhour 0.00E+00 - 1.00E+12
Power Metering 18 Float R NEG Watthour Total GG watthour -1.00E+12 - 0.00E+00
Power Metering 18 Float R NEG varhour Total GG varhour -1.00E+12 - 0.00E+00
Power Metering Per Unit 19 Float R kW per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Power Metering Per Unit 19 Float R kVA per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Power Metering Per Unit 19 Float R kvar per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Bus Metering 20 Float R VAB GG (Bus Voltage V 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)
Bus Metering 20 Float R VBC GG (Bus Voltage V 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)
Bus Metering 20 Float R VCA GG (Bus Voltage V 0 - 2000000000
Magnitude)
Bus Metering 20 Float R VAB GG (Bus Voltage Deg 0 - 360
Angle)
Bus Metering 20 Float R VBC GG (Bus Voltage Deg 0 - 360
Angle)
Bus Metering 20 Float R VCA GG (Bus Voltage Deg 0 - 360
Angle)
Bus Metering 20 Float R Frequency GG Hz 10 - 180
Bus Metering Per Unit 21 Float R Bus Vab per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Bus Metering Per Unit 21 Float R Bus Vbc per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Bus Metering Per Unit 21 Float R Bus Vca per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
Bus Metering Per Unit 21 Float R Bus Vavg per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-8 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Field Metering 22 Float R VX GG V -1000 - 1000
Field Metering 22 Float R IX GG Amp 0 - 2000000000
Field Metering 22 Float R EDM Ripple Percent GG % n/a
Field Metering 22 Float R Field Temperature GG Deg F -40 - 572
PSS Metering 23 Float R V1 GG V 0 - 2000000000
PSS Metering 23 Float R V2 GG V 0 - 2000000000
PSS Metering 23 Float R I1 GG Amp 0 - 2000000000
PSS Metering 23 Float R I2 GG Amp 0 - 2000000000
PSS Metering 23 Float R Term Frequency DEV GG Percent n/a
PSS Metering 23 Float R Comp Frequency DEV GG Percent n/a
PSS Metering 23 Float R PSS Output GG No Unit n/a
PSS Metering 23 Float R PSS Frequency Rate of Hz/s -15 - 15
Change GG
PSS Metering Per Unit 24 Float R Pos Seq V per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
PSS Metering Per Unit 24 Float R Neq Seq V per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
PSS Metering Per Unit 24 Float R Pos Seq I per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
PSS Metering Per Unit 24 Float R Neq Seq I per unit GG Per Unit -10 - 10
PSS Metering Per Unit 24 Float R PSS Frequency Rate of PU/s -1.5 – 1.5
Change per unit GG
Synchronization 25 Float R Slip Angle GG Deg -359.9 - 359.9
Synchronization 25 Float R Slip Frequency GG Hz n/a
Synchronization 25 Float R Voltage Diff GG V n/a
Aux Input Metering 26 Float R Value GG (Aux Input V -9999999 - 9999999
Voltage)
Aux Input Metering 26 Float R Value GG (Aux Input Amp -9999999 - 9999999
Current)
Tracking 27 Float R Tracking Error GG % n/a
Tracking Status 28 UINT8 R DECS Regulator Meter No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
DECS
Internal Tracking Active
Tracking Status 28 UINT8 R DECS Regulator Meter No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
DECS
External Tracking Active
Tracking Status 28 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS Null No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
Balance
Control Panel Setpoint 29 Float R Gen Voltage Setpoint GG V 84 - 144
Metering
Control Panel Setpoint 29 Float R Excitation Current Setpoint Amp 0 - 12
Metering GG
Control Panel Setpoint 29 Float R Excitation Voltage Setpoint V 0 - 75
Metering GG
Control Panel Setpoint 29 Float R Gen Var Setpoint GG Kvar n/a
Metering
Control Panel Setpoint 29 Float R Gen Pf Setpoint GG PF n/a
Metering
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS Start No Unit Stopped=0, Started=1
Stop
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS is in No Unit Not in automatic=0, In
Automatic Mode automatic=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS is in No Unit Not in manual=0, In
Manual Mode manual=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS FCR No Unit FCR not active=0, FCR
Controller Active active=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS FVR No Unit FVR not active=0, FVR
Controller Active active=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS VAR No Unit VAR not active=0, VAR
Controller Active active=1

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-9

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS PF No Unit PF not active=0, PF
Controller Active active=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS No Unit Active setpoint is not at pre-
Preposition 1 Active position 1 value=0, Active
setpoint is at pre-position 1
value=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS No Unit Active setpoint is not at pre-
Preposition 2 Active position 2 value=0, Active
setpoint is at pre-position 2
value=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS No Unit Active setpoint is not at pre-
Preposition 3 Active position 3 value=0, Active
setpoint is at pre-position 3
value=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R Virtual Switch 1 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R Virtual Switch 2 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R Virtual Switch 3 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R Virtual Switch 4 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R Virtual Switch 5 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R Virtual Switch 6 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R Alarm Report Alarm Output No Unit No active alarms=0, Active
alarms=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS PSS Meter DECS No Unit PSS not active=0, PSS
PSS Active active=1
Control Panel Status 30 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
Null Balance
System Status 31 UINT8 R Alarms OEL ALM No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R Alarms UEL ALM No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R Alarms SCL ALM No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R Alarms VAR LIMITER No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
ACTIVE
System Status 31 UINT8 R Alarms VOLTAGE No Unit Not active=0, Active=1
MATCHING ACTIVE
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Soft Start Select Secondary settings active=1
Secondary Settings
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS CONTROL DECS No Unit Primary settings active=0,
PSS Secondary settings active=1
Select Secondary Settings
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS OEL No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Select Secondary Settings Secondary settings active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS UEL No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Select Secondary Settings Secondary settings active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS SCL No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Select Secondary Settings Secondary settings active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Protect Secondary settings active=1
Select Secondary Settings
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS PID No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Select Secondary Settings Secondary settings active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS VAR No Unit Primary settings active=0,
Limiter Select Secondary settings active=1
Secondary Settings
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS No Unit Active setpoint is not at a
Preposition pre-position value=0, Active
setpoint is at a pre-position
value=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS VAR No Unit VAR not active=0, VAR
Controller Active active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS PF No Unit PF not active=0, PF
Controller Active active=1

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-10 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS Auto No Unit Auto mode not enabled via
Mode Enable PLC=0, Auto mode enabled
via PLC=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS No Unit Manual mode not enabled
Manual via PLC=0, Manual mode
Mode Enable enabled via PLC=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS FVR No Unit FVR not active=0, FVR
Controller Active active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS FCR No Unit FCR not active=0, FCR
Controller Active active=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS Field No Unit Field flashing not in
Flashing in Progress progress=0, Field flashing in
progress=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS IS in No Unit Not in manual=0, In
Manual Mode manual=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS is in No Unit Not in automatic=0, In
Automatic Mode automatic=1
System Status 31 UINT8 R DECS Control DECS PSS No Unit PSS not disabled via
Output Disable PLC=0, PSS disabled via
PLC=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Start Input No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Stop Input No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 1 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 2 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 3 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 4 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 5 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 6 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 7 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 8 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 9 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 10 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 11 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 12 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 13 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Input Status 32 UINT8 R Contact Inputs Input 14 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 1 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 2 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 3 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 4 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 5 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 6 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 7 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 8 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 9 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Input Status 33 UINT8 R CEM Input 10 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 1 Raw Value V or mA 0 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 2 Raw Value V or mA 0 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 3 Raw Value V or mA 0 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 4 Raw Value V or mA 0 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 5 Raw Value V or mA 0 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA
GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-11

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 6 Raw Value V or mA 0 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 7 Raw Value V or mA 0 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 8 Raw Value V or mA 0 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 1 Scaled Value No Unit n/a
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 2 Scaled Value No Unit n/a
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 3 Scaled Value No Unit n/a
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 4 Scaled Value No Unit n/a
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 5 Scaled Value No Unit n/a
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 6 Scaled Value No Unit n/a
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 7 Scaled Value No Unit n/a
GG
AEM Analog Input Meter 34 Float R Analog Input 8 Scaled Value No Unit n/a
GG
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Config AEM Input 1 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Config AEM Input 2 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Config AEM Input 3 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Config AEM Input 4 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Config AEM Input 5 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Config AEM Input 6 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Config AEM Input 7 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Config AEM Input 8 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 1 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 1 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 1 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 1 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 2 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 2 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 2 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 2 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 3 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 3 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 3 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 3 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-12 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 4 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 4 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 4 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 4 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 5 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 5 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 5 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 5 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 6 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 6 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 6 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 6 Thresh No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 7 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 7 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 7 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 7 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 8 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 8 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 8 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM Analog Input Status 35 UINT8 R AEM Protection 8 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped-0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 1 Raw Value GG Ohm n/a
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 2 Raw Value GG Ohm n/a
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 3 Raw Value GG Ohm n/a
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 4 Raw Value GG Ohm n/a
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 5 Raw Value GG Ohm n/a
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 6 Raw Value GG Ohm n/a
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 7 Raw Value GG Ohm n/a
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 8 Raw Value GG Ohm n/a
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 1 Scaled Value Deg F -40000 - 9999999
GG
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 2 Scaled Value Deg F -40000 - 9999999
GG
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 3 Scaled Value Deg F -40000 - 9999999
GG
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 4 Scaled Value Deg F -40000 - 9999999
GG
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 5 Scaled Value Deg F -40000 - 9999999
GG
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 6 Scaled Value Deg F -40000 - 9999999
GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-13

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 7 Scaled Value Deg F -40000 - 9999999
GG
AEM RTD Input Meter 36 Float R RTD Input 8 Scaled Value Deg F -40000 - 9999999
GG
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R AEM Config RTD Input 1 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R AEM Config RTD Input 2 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R AEM Config RTD Input 3 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R AEM Config RTD Input 4 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R AEM Config RTD Input 5 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R AEM Config RTD Input 6 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R AEM Config RTD Input 7 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R AEM Config RTD Input 8 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 1 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 1 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 1 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 1 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 2 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 2 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 2 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 2 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 3 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 3 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 3 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 3 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 4 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 4 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 4 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 4 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 5 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 5 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 5 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 5 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 6 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-14 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 6 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 6 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 6 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 7 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 7 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 7 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 7 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 8 Thresh 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 8 Thresh 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 8 Thresh 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM RTD Input Status 37 UINT8 R RTD Protection 8 Thresh 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Trip
AEM TC Input Meter 38 Float R Thermocouple Input 1 Raw mV n/a
Value GG
AEM TC Input Meter 38 Float R Thermocouple Input 2 Raw mV n/a
Value GG
AEM TC Input Meter 38 Float R Thermocouple Input 1 Deg F n/a
Scaled Value GG
AEM TC Input Meter 38 Float R Thermocouple Input 2 Deg F n/a
Scaled Value GG
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R AEM Config Thermocouple No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
1 of range=1
Out of Range
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R AEM Config Thermocouple No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
2 of range=1
Out of Range
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R Thermocouple Protection 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Thresh 1 Trip
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R Thermocouple Protection 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Thresh 2 Trip
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R Thermocouple Protection 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Thresh 3 Trip
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R Thermocouple Protection 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Thresh 4 Trip
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R Thermocouple Protection 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Thresh 1 Trip
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R Thermocouple Protection 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Thresh 2 Trip
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R Thermocouple Protection 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Thresh 3 Trip
AEM TC Input Status 39 UINT8 R Thermocouple Protection 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Thresh 4 Trip
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Watchdog Output
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 1 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 2 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 3 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 4 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 5 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 6 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 7 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-15

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 8 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 9 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 10 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
Contact Output Status 40 UINT8 R Contact Outputs Output 11 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 1 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 2 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 3 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 4 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 5 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 6 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 7 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 8 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 9 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 10 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 11 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 12 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 13 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 14 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 15 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 16 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 17 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 18 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 19 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 20 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 21 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 22 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 23 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
CEM Output Status 41 UINT8 R CEM Output 24 No Unit Open=0, Closed=1
AEM Analog Output Meter 42 Float R Analog Output 1 Raw Value V or mA 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Output Meter 42 Float R Analog Output 2 Raw Value V or mA 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Output Meter 42 Float R Analog Output 3 Raw Value V or mA 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Output Meter 42 Float R Analog Output 4 Raw Value V or mA 0 – 10 V or 4 – 20 mA
GG
AEM Analog Output Meter 42 Float R Analog Output 1 Scaled No Unit n/a
Value GG
AEM Analog Output Meter 42 Float R Analog Output 2 Scaled No Unit n/a
Value GG
AEM Analog Output Meter 42 Float R Analog Output 3 Scaled No Unit n/a
Value GG
AEM Analog Output Meter 42 Float R Analog Output 4 Scaled No Unit n/a
Value GG
AEM Analog Output Status 43 UINT8 R Remote Analog Output 1 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Output Status 43 UINT8 R Remote Analog Output 2 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Output Status 43 UINT8 R Remote Analog Output 3 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
AEM Analog Output Status 43 UINT8 R Remote Analog Output 4 No Unit Value in range=0, Value out
Out of Range of range=1
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 1 Trip

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-16 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 2 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 3 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 1 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 4 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 1 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 2 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 3 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 2 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 4 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 1 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 2 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 3 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 3 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 4 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 1 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 2 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 3 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 4 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 4 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 5 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 1 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 5 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 2 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 5 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 3 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 5 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 4 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 6 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 1 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 6 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 2 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 6 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 3 Trip

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-17

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 6 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 4 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 7 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 1 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 7 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 2 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 7 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 3 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 7 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 4 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 8 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 1 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 8 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 2 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 8 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 3 Trip
Configurable Protection 44 UINT8 R Configurable Protection 8 No Unit Not tripped=0, Tripped=1
Status Configurable Protection
Threshold 4 Trip
Real Time Clock 45 String R Date GG No Unit 0 – 16 characters
Real Time Clock 45 String R Time GG No Unit 0 – 16 characters
Front Panel Settings 46 UINT32 R LCD Contrast GG % 0 - 100
Front Panel Settings 46 UINT32 R LCD Invert Display GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Front Panel Settings 46 UINT32 R LCD Sleep Mode GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Front Panel Settings 46 UINT32 R LCD Backlight Timeout GG Sec 1 - 120
Front Panel Settings 46 UINT32 R LCD Language Selection No Unit English=0 Chinese=1
GG Russian=2 French=3
Spanish=4 German=5
Portuguese=6
Front Panel Settings 46 UINT32 R Enable Scroll GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Front Panel Settings 46 UINT32 R Scroll Time Delay GG Sec 1 - 600
DECS-450 Device Info App 47 String R External Version GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Version
DECS-450 Device Info Boot 48 String R External Boot No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Version Version GG
DECS-450 Device Info App 49 String R App Build Date GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Build Date
DECS-450 Device Info 50 String R Serial Number GG No Unit 0 - 32 characters
Serial
DECS-450 Device Info App 51 String R Firmware Part No Unit 0 - 64 characters
Part Number Number GG
DECS-450 Device Info 52 String R Model Number GG No Unit 0 - 64 characters
Model
AEM Device Info App 53 String R App Version Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Version
AEM Device Info Boot 54 String R Boot Version Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Version
AEM Device Info Build Date 55 String R App Build Date GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
AEM Device Info Serial 56 String R Serial Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
AEM Device Info App Part 57 String R App Part Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Number
AEM Device Info Model 58 String R Model Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
CEM Device Info App 59 String R App Version Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Version

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-18 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

CEM Device Info Boot 60 String R Boot Version Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Version
CEM Device Info App Build 61 String R App Build Date GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Date
CEM Device Info Serial 62 String R Serial Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
CEM Device Info App Part 63 String R App Part Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
Number
CEM Device Info Model 64 String R Model Number GG No Unit 0 - 25 characters
System Parameter 65 UINT32 R/W Nominal Frequency GG No Unit 50 Hz=50 60 Hz=60
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Rated Primary LL GG V 1 – 500000
(Gen Voltage Config)
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Rated Primary LL GG V 1 - 500000
(Bus Voltage Config)
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Rated PF GG PF 0.5 – -0.5
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Rated KVA GG KVA 1 – 2000000
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Rated Field Volt V 1 – 1000
Full Load GG
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Rated Field Volt V 1 – 1000
No Load GG
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Rated Field Current Amp 0.1 – 10000
Full Load GG
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Rated Field Current Amp 0.1 – 10000
No Load GG
System Parameter 66 Float R/W Exciter Pole Ratio GG No Unit 1 – 10
AVR Setpoints 67 UINT32 R/W Gen Voltage Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode 1 GG
AVR Setpoints 67 UINT32 R/W Gen Voltage Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode 2 GG
AVR Setpoints 67 UINT32 R/W Gen Voltage Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode 3 GG
AVR Setpoints 68 Float R/W Gen Voltage Sec 10 - 200
Traverse Rate GG
AVR Setpoints 68 Float R/W Gen Voltage Setpoint GG V 84 - 144
AVR Setpoints 68 Float R/W Gen Voltage Min Setpoint % 70 - 120
Limit GG
AVR Setpoints 68 Float R/W Gen Voltage Max Setpoint % 70 - 120
Limit GG
AVR Setpoints 68 Float R/W Gen Voltage V 84 - 144
Preposition1 GG
AVR Setpoints 68 Float R/W Gen Voltage V 84 - 144
Preposition2 GG
AVR Setpoints 68 Float R/W Gen Voltage V 84 - 144
Preposition3 GG
FCR Setpoints 69 UINT32 R/W Excitation Current No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Preposition
Mode 1 GG
FCR Setpoints 69 UINT32 R/W Excitation Current No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Preposition
Mode 2 GG
FCR Setpoints 69 UINT32 R/W Excitation Current No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Preposition
Mode 3 GG
FCR Setpoints 70 Float R/W Excitation Current Sec 10 - 200
Traverse Rate GG
FCR Setpoints 70 Float R/W Excitation Current Setpoint Amp 0 - 12
GG
FCR Setpoints 70 Float R/W Excitation Current Min % 0 - 120
Setpoint
Limit GG
FCR Setpoints 70 Float R/W Excitation Current Max % 0 - 120
Setpoint
Limit GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-19

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

FCR Setpoints 70 Float R/W Excitation Current Amp 0 - 12
Preposition 1 GG
FCR Setpoints 70 Float R/W Excitation Current Amp 0 - 12
Preposition 2 GG
FCR Setpoints 70 Float R/W Excitation Current Amp 0 - 12
Preposition 3 GG
FVR Setpoints 71 UINT32 R/W Excitation Voltage No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Preposition
Mode 1 GG
FVR Setpoints 71 UINT32 R/W Excitation Voltage No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Preposition
Mode 2 GG
FVR Setpoints 71 UINT32 R/W Excitation Voltage No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Preposition
Mode 3 GG
FVR Setpoints 72 Float R/W Excitation Voltage Traverse Sec 10 - 200
Rate GG
FVR Setpoints 72 Float R/W Excitation Voltage Setpoint V 0 - 75
GG
FVR Setpoints 72 Float R/W Excitation Voltage Min % 0 - 150
Setpoint
Limit GG
FVR Setpoints 72 Float R/W Excitation Voltage Max % 0 - 150
Setpoint
Limit GG
FVR Setpoints 72 Float R/W Excitation Voltage V 0 - 75
Preposition 1 GG
FVR Setpoints 72 Float R/W Excitation Voltage V 0 - 75
Preposition 2 GG
FVR Setpoints 72 Float R/W Excitation Voltage V 0 - 75
Preposition 3 GG
VAR Setpoints 73 UINT32 R/W Gen Var Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode1 GG
VAR Setpoints 73 UINT32 R/W Gen Var Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode2 GG
VAR Setpoints 73 UINT32 R/W Gen Var Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode 3 GG
VAR Setpoints 74 Float R/W Sys Option Fine Adjust % 0 - 30
Band GG
VAR Setpoints 74 Float R/W Gen Var Traverse Sec 10 - 200
Rate GG
VAR Setpoints 74 Float R/W Gen Var Setpoint GG Per Unit 0 - 1.001
VAR Setpoints 74 Float R/W Gen Var Min Setpoint % -100 - 100
Limit GG
VAR Setpoints 74 Float R/W Gen Var Max Setpoint % -100 - 100
Limit GG
VAR Setpoints 74 Float R/W Gen var Per Unit 0 - 1.001
Preposition 1 GG
VAR Setpoints 74 Float R/W Gen var Per Unit 0 - 1.001
Preposition 2 GG
VAR Setpoints 74 Float R/W Gen var Per Unit 0 - 1.001
Preposition 3 GG
PF Setpoints 75 UINT32 R/W Gen PF Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode 1 GG
PF Setpoints 75 UINT32 R/W Gen PF Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode 2 GG
PF Setpoints 75 UINT32 R/W Gen PF Preposition No Unit Maintain=0 Release=1
Mode 3 GG
PF Setpoints 76 Float R/W Gen PF Traverse Rate GG Sec 10 - 200
PF Setpoints 76 Float R/W Gen PF Setpoint GG PF 0.5 – -0.5
PF Setpoints 76 Float R/W Gen PF Min Setpoint PF 0.5 – 1
Limit GG

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-20 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

PF Setpoints 76 Float R/W Gen Pf Max Setpoint PF -1 - -0.5
Limit GG
PF Setpoints 76 Float R/W Gen PF Preposition 1 GG PF 0.5 – -0.5
PF Setpoints 76 Float R/W Gen PF preposition 2 GG PF 0.5 – -0.5
PF Setpoints 76 Float R/W Gen PF Preposition 3 GG PF 0.5 – -0.5
Aux Input Settings 77 UINT32 R/W DECS Aux Input No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Mode GG
Aux Input Settings 77 UINT32 R/W DECS Aux Summing No Unit Voltage=0 Var=1
Mode GG
Aux Input Settings 77 UINT32 R/W DECS Aux Input No Unit DECS Input=0 PSS Test
Function GG Input=1 Limiter Selection=2
No Control=4
Aux Input Settings 78 Float R/W DECS Aux Voltage Gain GG No Unit -99 - 99
Aux Input Settings 78 Float R/W DECS Aux FCR Gain GG No Unit -99 - 99
Aux Input Settings 78 Float R/W DECS Aux FVR Gain GG No Unit -99 - 99
Aux Input Settings 78 Float R/W DECS Aux var Gain GG No Unit -99 - 99
Aux Input Settings 78 Float R/W DECS Aux PF Gain GG No Unit -99 - 99
Parallel/Line Drop 79 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Input Droop No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enabled GG
Parallel/Line Drop 79 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Input L Drop No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enabled GG
Parallel/Line Drop 79 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Input CC No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enabled GG
Parallel/Line Drop 80 Float R/W Droop Value GG % 0 - 30
Parallel/Line Drop 80 Float R/W L Drop Value GG % 0 - 30
Parallel/Line Drop 80 Float R/W DECS Aux Amp % -30 - 30
Gain GG
Load Share 81 UINT32 R/W LS Enable GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Load Share 82 Float R/W LS Droop Percent GG % 0 - 30
Load Share 82 Float R/W LS Gain GG No Unit 0 - 1000
Load Share 82 Float R/W Washout Filter No Unit 0-1
Time Constant GG
Load Share 82 Float R/W Washout Filter No Unit 0 - 1000
Gain GG
Load Share 82 Float R/W Disable Time Delay GG Sec 1 – 3600
Load Share 82 Float R/W Reserved GG No Unit 0 - 1000
Load Share 82 Float R/W LS Ki Gain GG No Unit 0 - 1000
Load Share 82 Float R/W LS Max Vc GG No Unit 0-1
Auto Tracking 83 UINT32 R/W Sys Input Comport Int No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Track Enabled GG
Auto Tracking 83 UINT32 R/W Sys Input Comport Ext No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Track Enabled GG
Auto Tracking 84 Float R/W DECS Auto Track Sec 0-8
T Delay GG
Auto Tracking 84 Float R/W DECS Auto Track Sec 1 - 80
T Rate GG
Auto Tracking 84 Float R/W DECS Auto Trans Sec 0-8
T Delay GG
Auto Tracking 84 Float R/W DECS Auto Trans Sec 1 - 80
T Rate GG
Startup 86 Float R/W Startup Primary Soft % 0 - 90
Start Bias GG
Startup 86 Float R/W Startup Primary Soft Sec 1 - 7200
Start Time GG
Startup 86 Float R/W Startup Sec Soft % 0 - 90
Start Bias GG
Startup 86 Float R/W Startup Sec Soft Sec 1 - 7200
Start Time GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-21

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Startup 86 Float R/W DECS Field Flash No Unit 0 - 100
Level GG
Startup 86 Float R/W DECS Field Flash No Unit 1 - 50
Time GG
AVR Gains 87 UINT32 R/W Primary Gain No Unit TpdoEQ1pt0 TeEQ0pt17=1
Option GG TpdoEQ1pt5 TeEQ0pt25=2
TpdoEQ2pt0 TeEQ0pt33=3
TpdoEQ2pt5 TeEQ0pt42=4
TpdoEQ3pt0 TeEQ0pt50=5
TpdoEQ3pt5 TeEQ0pt58=6
TpdoEQ4pt0 TeEQ0pt67=7
TpdoEQ4pt5 TeEQ0pt75=8
TpdoEQ5pt0 TeEQ0pt83=9
TpdoEQ5pt5
TeEQ0pt92=10
TpdoEQ6pt0
TeEQ1pt00=11
TpdoEQ6pt5
TeEQ1pt08=12
TpdoEQ7pt0
TeEQ1pt17=13
TpdoEQ7pt5
TeEQ1pt25=14
TpdoEQ8pt0
TeEQ1pt33=15
TpdoEQ8pt5
TeEQ1pt42=16
TpdoEQ9pt0
TeEQ1pt50=17
TpdoEQ9pt5
TeEQ1pt58=18
TpdoEQ10pt0
TeEQ1pt67=19
TpdoEQ10pt5
TeEQ1pt75=20 Custom=21
AVR Gains 87 UINT32 R/W Secondary Gain No Unit TpdoEQ1pt0 TeEQ0pt17=1
Option GG TpdoEQ1pt5 TeEQ0pt25=2
TpdoEQ2pt0 TeEQ0pt33=3
TpdoEQ2pt5 TeEQ0pt42=4
TpdoEQ3pt0 TeEQ0pt50=5
TpdoEQ3pt5 TeEQ0pt58=6
TpdoEQ4pt0 TeEQ0pt67=7
TpdoEQ4pt5 TeEQ0pt75=8
TpdoEQ5pt0 TeEQ0pt83=9
TpdoEQ5pt5
TeEQ0pt92=10
TpdoEQ6pt0
TeEQ1pt00=11
TpdoEQ6pt5
TeEQ1pt08=12
TpdoEQ7pt0
TeEQ1pt17=13
TpdoEQ7pt5
TeEQ1pt25=14
TpdoEQ8pt0
TeEQ1pt33=15
TpdoEQ8pt5
TeEQ1pt42=16
TpdoEQ9pt0
TeEQ1pt50=17
TpdoEQ9pt5
TeEQ1pt58=18
TpdoEQ10pt0
TeEQ1pt67=19
TpdoEQ10pt5
TeEQ1pt75=20 Custom=21
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Kp Primary GG No Unit 0 - 1000
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Ki Primary GG No Unit 0 - 1000
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Kd Primary GG No Unit 0 - 1000
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Td Primary GG No Unit 0-1
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Kg Primary GG No Unit 0 - 1000
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Kp Sec GG No Unit 0 - 1000
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Ki Sec GG No Unit 0 - 1000
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Kd Sec GG No Unit 0 - 1000

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-22 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Td Sec GG No Unit 0-1
AVR Gains 88 Float R/W AVR Kg Sec GG No Unit 0 - 1000
FCR Gains 90 Float R/W FCR Kp GG No Unit 0 - 1000
FCR Gains 90 Float R/W FCR Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
FCR Gains 90 Float R/W FCR Kd GG No Unit 0 - 1000
FCR Gains 90 Float R/W FCR Td GG No Unit 0-1
FCR Gains 90 Float R/W FCR Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
FVR Gains 92 Float R/W FVR Kp GG No Unit 0 - 1000
FVR Gains 92 Float R/W FVR Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
FVR Gains 92 Float R/W FVR Kd GG No Unit 0 - 1000
FVR Gains 92 Float R/W FVR Td GG No Unit 0-1
FVR Gains 92 Float R/W FVR Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
VAR Gains 94 Float R/W Var Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
VAR Gains 94 Float R/W Var Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
PF Gains 96 Float R/W PF Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
PF Gains 96 Float R/W PF Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
OEL Gains 98 Float R/W OEL Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
OEL Gains 98 Float R/W OEL Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
UEL Gains 100 Float R/W UEL Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
UEL Gains 100 Float R/W UEL Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
SCL Gains 102 Float R/W SCL Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
SCL Gains 102 Float R/W SCL Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
VAR Limiter Gains 104 Float R/W Var Limit Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
VAR Limiter Gains 104 Float R/W Var Limit Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
Voltage Match Gains 106 Float R/W Vm Ki GG No Unit 0 - 1000
Voltage Match Gains 106 Float R/W Vm Kg GG No Unit 0 - 1000
OEL Configure 107 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Input No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
OEL Enabled GG
OEL Configure 107 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Input OEL No Unit Summing=0 Takeover=1
Style Enabled GG
OEL Configure 107 UINT32 R/W OEL Pri Dvdt Enable GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
OEL Configure 108 Float R/W OEL Pri Dvdt Ref GG No Unit -10 - 0
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Pri Cur Hi GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Pri Cur Mid GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Pri Cur Lo GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Pri Time Hi GG Sec 0 – 240
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Pri Time Mid GG Sec 0 – 240
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Pri Cur Hi Off GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Pri Cur Lo Off GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Pri Cur Time Off GG Sec 0 – 240
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Sec Cur Hi GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Sec Cur Mid GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Sec Cur Lo GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Sec Time Hi GG Sec 0 – 240
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Sec Time Mid GG Sec 0 – 240
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Sec Cur Hi Off GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Sec Cur Lo Off GG Amp 0 - 12000
OEL Summing Point 110 Float R/W OEL Sec Cur Time Off GG Sec 0 – 240
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Pri Takeover Amp 0 – 12000
Cur Max Off GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Pri Takeover Amp 0 – 12000
Cur Min Off GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-23

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Pri Takeover No Unit 0.1 – 20
Time Dial Off GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Pri Takeover Amp 0 – 12000
Cur Max On GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Pri Takeover Amp 0 – 12000
Cur Min On GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Pri Takeover No Unit 0.1 – 20
Time Dial On GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Sec Takeover Amp 0 – 12000
Cur Max Off GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Sec Takeover Amp 0 – 12000
Cur Min Off GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Sec Takeover No Unit 0.1 – 20
Time Dial Off GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Sec Takeover Amp 0 – 12000
Cur Max On GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Sec Takeover Amp 0 – 12000
Cur Min On GG
OEL Takeover 112 Float R/W OEL Sec Takeover No Unit 0.1 - 20
Time Dial On GG
UEL Configure 113 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Input No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
UEL Enabled GG
UEL Configure 114 Float R/W UEL Pri Pow Filter TC GG Sec 0 - 20
UEL Configure 114 Float R/W UEL Pri Volt Dep No Unit 0-2
Exponent GG
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve X1 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve X2 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve X3 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve X4 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve X5 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve Y1 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve Y2 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve Y3 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve Y4 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Primary 116 Float R/W UEL Pri Curve Y5 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve X1 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve X2 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve X3 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve X4 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve X5 GG KW 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve Y1 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve Y2 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve Y3 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve Y4 GG kvar 0 - 62
UEL Curve Float Secondary 118 Float R/W UEL Sec Curve Y5 GG kvar 0 - 62
SCL Settings 119 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Input SCL No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enabled GG
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Pri Ref Hi GG Amp 0 - 66000
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Pri Ref Lo GG Amp 0 - 66000
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Pri Time Hi GG Sec 0 – 240
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Pri No Response Sec 0 - 10
Time GG
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Sec Ref Hi GG Amp 0 - 66000
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Sec Ref Lo GG Amp 0 - 66000
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Sec Time Hi GG Sec 0 - 240

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-24 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Sec No Response Sec 0 - 10
Time GG
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Scale Signal 2_GG Limiter Scale -10 - 10
Voltage
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Scale Signal 3_GG Limiter Scale -10 - 10
Voltage
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Scale Point 1_GG Percent 0 - 200
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Scale Point 2_GG Percent 0 - 200
SCL Settings 120 Float R/W SCL Scale Point 3_GG Percent 0 - 200
VAR Limiter Settings 121 UINT32 R/W Var Limit Enable GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
VAR Limiter Settings 122 Float R/W Var Limit Pri Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
VAR Limiter Settings 122 Float R/W Var Limit Pri % 0 - 200
Setpoint GG
VAR Limiter Settings 122 Float R/W Var Limit Sec Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
VAR Limiter Settings 122 Float R/W Var Limit Sec % 0 - 200
Setpoint GG
OEL Scaling 123 UINT32 R/W OEL Scale Enable GG No Unit DISABLED=0
Auxiliary Input=1
AEM RTD 1=2
AEM RTD 2=3
AEM RTD 3=4
AEM RTD 4=5
AEM RTD 5=6
AEM RTD 6=7
AEM RTD 7=8
AEM RTD 8=9
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Summing V -10 - 10
Signal1 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Summing V -10 - 10
Signal2 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Summing V -10 - 10
Signal3 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Summing % 0 - 200
Scale1 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Summing % 0 - 200
Scale2 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Summing % 0 - 200
Scale3 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Takeover V -10 - 10
Signal1 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Takeover V -10 - 10
Signal2 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Takeover V -10 - 10
Signal3 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Takeover % 0 - 200
Scale1 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Takeover % 0 - 200
Scale2 GG
OEL Scaling 124 Float R/W OEL Scale Takeover % 0 - 200
Scale3 GG
SCL Scaling 125 UINT32 R/W SCL Scale Enable GG No Unit DISABLED=0
Auxiliary Input=1
AEM RTD 1=2
AEM RTD 2=3
AEM RTD 3=4
AEM RTD 4=5
AEM RTD 5=6
AEM RTD 6=7
AEM RTD 7=8
AEM RTD 8=9
SCL Scaling 126 Float R/W SCL Scale Signal 1 GG V -10 - 10
SCL Scaling 126 Float R/W SCL Scale Signal 2 GG V -10 - 10
SCL Scaling 126 Float R/W SCL Scale Signal 3 GG V -10 - 10
SCL Scaling 126 Float R/W SCL Scale Point 1 GG % 0 - 200

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-25

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

SCL Scaling 126 Float R/W SCL Scale Point 2 GG % 0 - 200
SCL Scaling 126 Float R/W SCL Scale Point 3 GG % 0 - 200
Underfrequency/Volts per 127 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Under Freq No Unit UF Limiter=0 V2H Limiter=1
hertz Mode GG
Underfrequency /Volts per 128 Float R/W Sys Option Under Freq Hz 15 - 90
Hertz Hz GG
Underfrequency /Volts per 128 Float R/W Sys Option Under Freq No Unit 0-3
Hertz Slope GG
Underfrequency /Volts per 128 Float R/W Sys Option Voltage Per Hz No Unit 0-3
Hertz Slope Hi GG
Underfrequency /Volts per 128 Float R/W Sys Option Voltage Per Hz No Unit 0-3
Hertz Slope Lo GG
Underfrequency /Volts per 128 Float R/W Sys Option Voltage Per Hz Sec 0 - 10
Hertz Slope Time GG
PSS Configure 129 UINT32 R/W Sys Option PSS No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Power Level
Enable GG
PSS Configure 130 Float R/W PSS Primary Power Level No Unit 0-1
Percentage GG
PSS Configure 130 Float R/W PSS Primary Power Level No Unit 0-1
Hysteresis GG
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Enable GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 10 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 11 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 3 GG No Unit Frequency=0 Der. Speed=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 4 GG No Unit Power=0 Der.
Freq/Speed=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 0 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 1 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 5 GG No Unit Exclude=0 Include=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 9 GG No Unit Exclude=0 Include=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 6 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 8 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 7 GG No Unit OFF=0 ON=1
PSS Control Primary 131 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Switch 2 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Primary 132 Float R/W PSS Primary Power On No Unit 0-1
Threshold GG
PSS Control Primary 132 Float R/W PSS Primary Power No Unit 0-1
Hysteresis GG
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 10 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 11 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 3 GG No Unit Frequency=0 Der. Speed=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 4 GG No Unit Power=0 Der.
Freq/Speed=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 0 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 1 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 5 GG No Unit Exclude=0 Include=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 9 GG No Unit Exclude=0 Include=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 6 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 8 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 7 GG No Unit OFF=0 ON=1
PSS Control Secondary 133 UINT32 R/W PSS Sec Switch 2 GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
PSS Control Secondary 134 Float R/W PSS Sec Power On No Unit 0-1
Threshold GG
PSS Control Secondary 134 Float R/W PSS Sec Power No Unit 0-1
Hysteresis GG

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-26 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

PSS Filter Parameter 135 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Ramp Flt M No Unit 1-5
Primary Int GG
PSS Filter Parameter 135 UINT32 R/W PSS Primary Ramp Flt N No Unit 0-1
Primary Int GG
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary Time Constant Sec 0 - 20
Primary Float Low Pass Filter 1 GG
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary Time Constant Sec 0.01 - 20
Primary Float Low Pass Filter 2 GG
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary Time Constant Sec 0.05 - 0.2
Primary Float Low Pass Filter 3 GG
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary Tr GG Sec 0.01 - 1
Primary Float
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary Tw 1 GG Sec 1 - 20
Primary Float
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary Tw 2 GG Sec 1 - 20
Primary Float
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary Tw 3 GG Sec 1 - 20
Primary Float
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary Tw 4 GG Sec 1 - 20
Primary Float
PSS Filter Parameter 136 Float R/W PSS Primary H GG No Unit 0.01 - 25
Primary Float
PSS Parameter Primary 138 Float R/W PSS Primary Zn 1 GG No Unit 0-1
Float
PSS Parameter Primary 138 Float R/W PSS Primary Zn 2 GG No Unit 0-1
Float
PSS Parameter Primary 138 Float R/W PSS Primary Zd 1 GG No Unit 0-1
Float
PSS Parameter Primary 138 Float R/W PSS Primary Zd 2 GG No Unit 0-1
Float
PSS Parameter Primary 138 Float R/W PSS Primary Wn 1 GG No Unit 10 - 150
Float
PSS Parameter Primary 138 Float R/W PSS Primary Wn 2 GG No Unit 10 - 150
Float
PSS Parameter Primary 138 Float R/W PSS Primary Xq GG No Unit 0-5
Float
PSS Parameter Primary 138 Float R/W PSS Primary Kpe GG No Unit 0-2
Float
PSS Parameter Primary 140 Float R/W PSS Primary T1 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Primary 140 Float R/W PSS Primary T2 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Primary 140 Float R/W PSS Primary T3 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Primary 140 Float R/W PSS Primary T4 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Primary 140 Float R/W PSS Primary T5 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Primary 140 Float R/W PSS Primary T6 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Primary 140 Float R/W PSS Primary T7 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Primary 140 Float R/W PSS Primary T8 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 141 UINT32 R/W PSS Secondary Ramp Flt M No Unit 1-5
Filters Int GG
PSS Parameter Secondary 141 UINT32 R/W PSS Secondary Ramp Flt N No Unit 0-1
Filters Int GG
PSS Parameter Secondary 142 Float R/W PSS Secondary Time Sec 0 - 20
Filters Float Constant Low Pass Filter 1
GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-27

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

PSS Parameter Secondary 142 Float R/W PSS Secondary Time Sec 0.01 – 20
Filters Float Constant Low Pass Filter 2
GG
PSS Parameter Secondary 142 Float R/W PSS Secondary Time Sec 0.05 - 0.2
Filters Float Constant Low Pass Filter 3
GG
PSS Parameter Secondary 142 Float R/W PSS Secondary Tr GG Sec 0.01 - 1
Filters Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 142 Float R/W PSS Secondary Tw1 GG Sec 1 - 20
Filters Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 142 Float R/W PSS Secondary Tw2 GG Sec 1 - 20
Filters Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 142 Float R/W PSS Secondary Tw3 GG Sec 1 - 20
Filters Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 142 Float R/W PSS Secondary Tw4 GG Sec 1 - 20
Filters Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 144 Float R/W PSS Secondary Zn1 GG No Unit 0-1
Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 144 Float R/W PSS Secondary Zn2 GG No Unit 0-1
Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 144 Float R/W PSS Secondary Zd1 GG No Unit 0-1
Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 144 Float R/W PSS Secondary Zd2 GG No Unit 0-1
Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 144 Float R/W PSS Secondary Wn1 GG No Unit 10 - 150
Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 144 Float R/W PSS Secondary Wn2 GG No Unit 10 - 150
Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 144 Float R/W PSS Secondary Xq GG No Unit 0-5
Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 144 Float R/W PSS Secondary Kpe GG No Unit 0-2
Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 146 Float R/W PSS Secondary T1 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 146 Float R/W PSS Secondary T2 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 146 Float R/W PSS Secondary T3 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 146 Float R/W PSS Secondary T4 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 146 Float R/W PSS Secondary T5 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 146 Float R/W PSS Secondary T6 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 146 Float R/W PSS Secondary T7 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Parameter Secondary 146 Float R/W PSS Secondary T8 GG Sec 0.001 - 6
Phase Comp Float
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Limit Plus GG No Unit 0 - 0.5
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Limit Minus No Unit -0.5 - 0
GG
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Ks GG No Unit -100 - 100
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Et Lmt Time Sec 0.02 - 5
Constant Low Pass Filter
GG
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Et Lmt Vref No Unit 0 - 10
GG
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Tw5 Normal No Unit 5 - 30
GG
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Tw5 Limit GG No Unit 0-1
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Lmt Vhi GG No Unit 0.01 - 0.04
PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Lmt Vlo GG No Unit -0.04 - -0.01

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-28 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

PSS Output Limiter Primary 148 Float R/W PSS Primary Lmt T Delay No Unit 0-2
GG
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Limit Plus No Unit 0 - 0.5
Secondary GG
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Limit Minus No Unit -0.5 - 0
Secondary GG
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Ks GG No Unit -100 - 100
Secondary
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Et Lmt Time Sec 0.02 - 5
Secondary Constant Low Pass Filter
GG
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Et Lmt Vref No Unit 0 - 10
Secondary GG
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Tw5 Normal No Unit 5 - 30
Secondary GG
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Tw5 Limit No Unit 0-1
Secondary GG
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Lmt Vhi GG No Unit 0.01 - 0.04
Secondary
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Lmt Vlo GG No Unit -0.04 - -0.01
Secondary
PSS Output Limiter 150 Float R/W PSS Secondary Lmt T Delay No Unit 0-2
Secondary GG
Synchronizer 151 UINT32 R/W Sync Type GG No Unit Anticipatory=0 Phase Lock
Loop=1
Synchronizer 151 UINT32 R/W Fgen GT Fbus GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Synchronizer 151 UINT32 R/W Vgen GT Vbus GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Synchronizer 152 Float R/W Slip Frequency GG Hz 0.1 - 0.5
Synchronizer 152 Float R/W Voltage Window GG % 2 - 15
Synchronizer 152 Float R/W Breaker Closing Deg 3 - 20
Angle GG
Synchronizer 152 Float R/W Sync Activation Sec 0.1 - 0.8
Delay GG
Synchronizer 152 Float R/W Sync Fail Activation Sec 0.1 - 600
Delay GG
Synchronizer 152 Float R/W Sync Speed Gain GG No Unit 0.001 - 1000
Synchronizer 152 Float R/W Sync Voltage Gain GG No Unit 0.001 - 1000
Voltage Matching 153 UINT32 R/W Sys Option Input Volt No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Match Enabled GG
Voltage Matching 154 Float R/W Sys Option Voltage Match % 0 - 20
Band GG
Voltage Matching 154 Float R/W Sys Option Voltage Match % 0 - 700
Ref GG
Breaker Hardware 155 UINT32 R/W Gen Breaker GG No Unit Not Configured=0
Configured=1
Breaker Hardware 155 UINT32 R/W Gen Contact Type GG No Unit Pulse=0 Continuous=1
Breaker Hardware 155 UINT32 R/W Dead Bus Close No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enable GG
Breaker Hardware 155 UINT32 R/W Dead Gen Close No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Enable GG
Breaker Hardware 156 Float R/W Breaker Close Sec 0.1 - 600
Wait Time GG
Breaker Hardware 156 Float R/W Gen Open Pulse Sec 0.01 - 5
Time GG
Breaker Hardware 156 Float R/W Gen Close Pulse Sec 0.01 - 5
Time GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Dead Gen V 0 - 600000
(Gen Sensing) Threshold GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Dead Gen Sec 0.1 - 600
(Gen Sensing) Time Delay GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-29

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Over V 10 - 600000
(Gen Sensing) Voltage Pickup GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Over V 10 - 600000
(Gen Sensing) Voltage Dropout GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Under V 10 - 600000
(Gen Sensing) Voltage Pickup GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Under V 10 - 600000
(Gen Sensing) Voltage Dropout GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Hz 15 - 64
(Gen Sensing) Over Frequency
Pickup GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Hz 15 - 64
(Gen Sensing) Over Frequency
Dropout GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Hz 15 - 64
(Gen Sensing) Under Frequency
Pickup GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Hz 15 – 64
(Gen Sensing) Under Frequency
Dropout GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Activation Sec 0.1 - 600
(Gen Sensing) Delay GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Failed Activation Sec 0.1 - 600
(Gen Sensing) Delay GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Low Line No Unit 0.001 - 3
(Gen Sensing) Scale Factor GG
Bus Condition Detection 158 Float R/W Gen Stable Alternate No Unit 0.001 - 100
(Gen Sensing) Frequency
Scale Factor GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Dead Bus V 0 - 600000
(Bus Sensing) Threshold GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Dead Bus Sec 0.1 - 600
(Bus Sensing) Time Delay GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus S table V 10 - 600000
(Bus Sensing) Over Voltage
Pickup GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable V 10 - 600000
(Bus Sensing) Over Voltage
Dropout GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable V 10 - 600000
(Bus Sensing) Under Voltage
Pickup GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable V 10 - 600000
(Bus Sensing) Under Voltage
Dropout GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable Hz 15 - 64
(Bus Sensing) Over Frequency
Pickup GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable Hz 15 - 64
(Bus Sensing) Over Frequency
Dropout GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable Hz 15 - 64
(Bus Sensing) Under Frequency
Pickup GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable Hz 15 - 64
(Bus Sensing) Under Frequency
Dropout GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable Activation Sec 0.1 - 600
(Bus Sensing) Delay GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Failed Activation Sec 0.1 - 600
(Bus Sensing) Delay GG
Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable Low Line No Unit 0.001 - 3
(Bus Sensing) Scale Factor GG

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-30 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Bus Condition Detection 160 Float R/W Bus Stable Alternate No Unit 0.001 - 100
(Bus Sensing) Frequency Scale
Factor GG
Governor Bias Control 161 UINT32 R/W Control Contact No Unit Continuous=0 Fixed=1
Type GG Proportional=2
Governor Bias Control 162 Float R/W Correction Pulse Sec 0 - 99.9
Width GG
Governor Bias Control 162 Float R/W Correction Pulse Sec 0 - 99.9
Interval GG
Gen Undervoltage 163 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Gen Undervoltage 163 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Gen Undervoltage 164 Float R/W Pickup PP V 1 - 600000
Gen Undervoltage 164 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 100 - 60000
Gen Undervoltage 164 Float R/W Pickup PS V 1 - 600000
Gen Undervoltage 164 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 100 - 60000
Gen Overvoltage 165 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Gen Overvoltage 165 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Gen Overvoltage 166 Float R/W Pickup PP V 0 - 600000
Gen Overvoltage 166 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 100 - 60000
Gen Overvoltage 166 Float R/W Pickup PS V 0 - 600000
Gen Overvoltage 166 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 100 - 60000
Loss of Sensing 167 UINT32 R/W Mode GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss of Sensing 167 UINT32 R/W Sys Option No Sense To No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Manual Mode GG
Loss of Sensing 168 Float R/W Time Delay GG Sec 0 - 30
Loss of Sensing 168 Float R/W Voltage Balanced % 0 - 100
Level GG
Loss of Sensing 168 Float R/W Voltage Unbalanced Level % 0 - 100
GG
81O 169 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
81O 169 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
81O 170 Float R/W Pickup PP Hz 15 - 70
81O 170 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 100 - 300000
81O 170 Float R/W Pickup PS Hz 15 - 70
81O 170 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 100 - 300000
81O 170 Float R/W Voltage Inhibit PP % 5 – 100
81O 170 Float R/W Voltage Inhibit PS % 5 – 100
81U-1 171 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Under=2
81U-1 171 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Under=2
81U-1 172 Float R/W Pickup PP Hz 15 - 70
81U-1 172 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 100 - 300000
81U-1 172 Float R/W Voltage Inhibit PP % 5 - 100
81U-1 172 Float R/W Pickup PS Hz 15 - 70
81U-1 172 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 100 - 300000
81U-1 172 Float R/W Voltage Inhibit PS % 5 – 100
81U-2 173 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Under=2
81U-2 173 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Under=2
81U-2 174 Float R/W Pickup PP Hz 15 - 70
81U-2 174 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 100 - 300000
81U-2 174 Float R/W Voltage Inhibit PP % 5 - 100
81U-2 174 Float R/W Pickup PS Hz 15 - 70
81U-2 174 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 100 - 300000
81U-2 174 Float R/W Voltage Inhibit PS % 5 – 100

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-31

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Reverse Power 175 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=4
Reverse Power 175 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=4
Reverse Power 176 Float R/W Pickup PP kW 0 – 3000000
Reverse Power 176 Float R/W Pickup PS kW 0 – 3000000
Reverse Power 176 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 0 – 300000
Reverse Power 176 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 0 – 300000
Loss of Excitation 177 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss of Excitation 177 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Loss of Excitation 178 Float R/W Pickup PP Kvar 0 – 3000000
Loss of Excitation 178 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 0 – 300000
Loss of Excitation 178 Float R/W Pickup PS Kvar 0 – 3000000
Loss of Excitation 178 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 0 – 300000
Field Overvoltage 179 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overvoltage 179 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overvoltage 180 Float R/W Pickup PP V 1 – 2400
Field Overvoltage 180 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 200 - 30000
Field Overvoltage 180 Float R/W Pickup PS V 1 – 2400
Field Overvoltage 180 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 200 – 30000
Field Overcurrent 181 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overcurrent 181 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overcurrent 182 Float R/W Pickup PP Amp 0 – 12000
Field Overcurrent 182 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 5000 – 60000
Field Overcurrent 182 Float R/W Pickup PS Amp 0 – 12000
Field Overcurrent 182 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 5000 – 60000
Field Overtemperature 183 UINT32 R/W Mode PP No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overtemperature 183 UINT32 R/W Mode PS No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Field Overtemperature 184 Float R/W Pickup PP Deg F 0 – 572
Field Overtemperature 184 Float R/W Time Delay PP ms 100 – 60000
Field Overtemperature 184 Float R/W Pickup PS Deg F 0 – 572
Field Overtemperature 184 Float R/W Time Delay PS ms 100 - 60000
Exciter Diode Monitor 185 UINT32 R/W Exciter Open No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Diode Enable GG
Exciter Diode Monitor 185 UINT32 R/W Exciter Shorted No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Diode Enable GG
Exciter Diode Monitor 186 Float R/W Exciter Diode Inhibit % 0 - 100
Threshold GG
Exciter Diode Monitor 186 Float R/W Exciter Open % 0 - 100
Diode Pickup GG
Exciter Diode Monitor 186 Float R/W Exciter Open Diode Sec 10 - 60
Time Delay GG
Exciter Diode Monitor 186 Float R/W Exciter Shorted % 0 - 100
Diode Pickup GG
Exciter Diode Monitor 186 Float R/W Exciter Shorted Diode Sec 5 - 30
Time Delay GG
Exciter Diode Monitor 186 Float R/W Exciter Pole Ratio GG No Unit 1 - 10
Sync Check 187 UINT32 R/W Mode GG No Unit Disabled=0 Enabled=1
Sync Check 188 Float R/W Phase Angle GG Deg 1 - 99
Sync Check 188 Float R/W Slip Frequency GG Hz 0.01 - 0.5
Sync Check 188 Float R/W Voltage Magnitude Error % 0.1 - 50
Percent GG
Configurable Protection 1 189 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Configurable Protection 1 189 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit NO=0 YES=1

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-32 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Configurable Protection 1 189 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 1 189 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 1 189 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 1 189 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 1 190 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 2 191 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Configurable Protection 2 191 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit NO=0 YES=1
Configurable Protection 2 191 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 2 191 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 2 191 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 2 191 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Threshold1Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 2 192 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 3 193 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Configurable Protection 3 193 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Configurable Protection 3 193 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 3 193 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 3 193 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-33

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Configurable Protection 3 193 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 3 194 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 4 195 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Configurable Protection 4 195 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Configurable Protection 4 195 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 4 195 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 4 195 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 4 195 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 4 196 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 5 197 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Configurable Protection 5 197 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Configurable Protection 5 197 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 5 197 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 5 197 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 5 197 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-34 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 5 198 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 6 199 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Configurable Protection 6 199 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Configurable Protection 6 199 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 6 199 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 6 199 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 6 199 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 6 200 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 7 201 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Configurable Protection 7 201 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Configurable Protection 7 201 UINT32 R/W Threshold1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 7 201 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 7 201 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 7 201 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-35

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Configurable Protection 7 202 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 8 203 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Configurable Protection 8 203 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Configurable Protection 8 203 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 8 203 UINT32 R/W Threshold Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 8 203 UINT32 R/W Threshold Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 8 203 UINT32 R/W Threshold Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -999999 - 999999
Configurable Protection 8 204 Float R/W Threshold Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 1 205 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit NO=0 YES=1
Remote Analog In 1 205 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 1 205 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 1 205 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 1 205 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 1 205 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-36 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote Analog In 1 206 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 2 207 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote Analog In 2 207 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 2 207 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 2 207 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 2 207 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 2 207 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 2 208 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 3 209 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote Analog In 3 209 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 3 209 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 3 209 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 3 209 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 3 209 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -9999 - 9999

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-37

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 3 210 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 4 211 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote Analog In 4 211 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 4 211 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 4 211 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 4 211 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 4 211 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 4 212 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 5 213 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote Analog In 5 213 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 5 213 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 5 213 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 5 213 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 5 213 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-38 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Threshold4 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 5 214 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 6 215 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote Analog In 6 215 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 6 215 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 6 215 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 6 215 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 6 215 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 6 216 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 7 217 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote Analog In 7 217 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 7 217 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 7 217 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 7 217 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 7 217 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-39

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 7 218 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 8 219 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote Analog In 8 219 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 8 219 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 8 219 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 8 219 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote Analog In 8 219 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -9999 - 9999
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog In 8 220 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote RTD In 1 221 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit 10 Ohm Cu=0 100 Ohm
Pt=1
Remote RTD In 1 221 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote RTD In 1 221 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 1 221 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 1 221 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 1 221 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-40 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 1 222 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 2 223 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit 10 Ohm Cu=0 100 Ohm
Pt=1
Remote RTD In 2 223 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote RTD In 2 223 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 2 223 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 2 223 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 2 223 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 2 224 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 3 225 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit 10 Ohm Cu=0 100 Ohm
Pt=1
Remote RTD In 3 225 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote RTD In 3 225 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 3 225 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 3 225 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 3 225 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-41

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 3 226 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 4 227 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit 10 Ohm Cu=0 100 Ohm
Pt=1
Remote RTD In 4 227 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote RTD In 4 227 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 4 227 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 4 227 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 4 227 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 4 228 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 5 229 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit 10 Ohm Cu=0 100 Ohm
Pt=1
Remote RTD In 5 229 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote RTD In 5 229 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 5 229 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 5 229 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 5 229 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-42 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 5 230 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 6 231 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit 10 Ohm Cu=0 100 Ohm
Pt=1
Remote RTD In 6 231 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote RTD In 6 231 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 6 231 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 6 231 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 6 231 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Cal Off set GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 6 232 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 7 233 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit 10 Ohm Cu=0 100 Ohm
Pt=1
Remote RTD In 7 233 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote RTD In 7 233 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 7 233 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 7 233 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 7 233 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 7 234 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 8 235 UINT32 R/W Type GG No Unit 10 Ohm Cu=0 100 Ohm
Pt=1
Remote RTD In 8 235 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-43

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote RTD In 8 235 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 8 235 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 8 235 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 8 235 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F -58 - 482
Remote RTD In 8 236 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote TC In 1 237 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote TC In 1 237 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote TC In 1 237 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote TC In 1 237 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote TC In 1 237 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F 32 - 2507
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F 32 - 2507
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F 32 - 2507
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F 32 - 2507
Remote TC In 1 238 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote TC In 2 239 UINT32 R/W Stop Mode Inhibit GG No Unit No=0 Yes=1
Remote TC In 2 239 UINT32 R/W Threshold 1 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote TC In 2 239 UINT32 R/W Threshold 2 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote TC In 2 239 UINT32 R/W Threshold 3 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote TC In 2 239 UINT32 R/W Threshold 4 Type GG No Unit Disabled=0 Over=1
Under=2
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Cal Offset GG Deg F -99999 - 99999
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Hysteresis GG % 0 - 100

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-44 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Arming Delay GG Sec 0 - 300
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Threshold 1 Pickup GG Deg F 32 - 2507
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Threshold 1 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Threshold 2 Pickup GG Deg F 32 - 2507
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Threshold 2 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Threshold 3 Pickup GG Deg F 32 - 2507
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Threshold 3 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Threshold 4 Pickup GG Deg F 32 - 2507
Remote TC In 2 240 Float R/W Threshold 4 Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog Out 1 241 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Remote Analog Out 1 241 UINT32 R/W Output Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog Out 1 242 Float R/W Out of Range Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog Out 1 242 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -99999 - 99999
Remote Analog Out 1 242 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -99999 - 99999
Remote Analog Out 1 242 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog Out 1 242 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog Out 1 242 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog Out 1 242 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog Out 2 243 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Remote Analog Out 2 243 UINT32 R/W Output Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog Out 2 244 Float R/W Out of Range Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog Out 2 244 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -99999 - 99999
Remote Analog Out 2 244 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -99999 - 99999
Remote Analog Out 2 244 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog Out 2 244 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog Out 2 244 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog Out 2 244 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog Out 3 245 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Remote Analog Out 3 245 UINT32 R/W Output Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog Out 3 246 Float R/W Out of Range Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog Out 3 246 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -99999 - 99999
Remote Analog Out 3 246 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -99999 - 99999
Remote Analog Out 3 246 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog Out 3 246 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog Out 3 246 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog Out 3 246 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 – 10
Remote Analog Out 4 247 UINT32 R/W Parameter Selection GG No Unit See Parameter Selection at
the end of this section for a
complete list.
Remote Analog Out 4 247 UINT32 R/W Output Type GG No Unit Voltage=0 Current=1
Remote Analog Out 4 248 Float R/W Out of Range Sec 0 - 300
Activation Delay GG
Remote Analog Out 4 248 Float R/W Parameter Min GG No Unit -99999 - 99999

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-45

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Remote Analog Out 4 248 Float R/W Parameter Max GG No Unit -99999 - 99999
Remote Analog Out 4 248 Float R/W Current Min GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog Out 4 248 Float R/W Current Max GG mA 4 - 20
Remote Analog Out 4 248 Float R/W Voltage Min GG V 0 - 10
Remote Analog Out 4 248 Float R/W Voltage Max GG V 0 - 10
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 1 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 2 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 3 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 4 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 5 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 6 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 7 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 8 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 9 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 10 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 11 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 12 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 13 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 14 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 15 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
User Programmable Alarms 250 Float R/W Programmable Alarm 16 Sec 0 - 300
Delay GG
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 1 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 2 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 3 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 4 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 5 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 6 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 7 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 8 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 9 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 10 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 11 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 12 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 13 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 14 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 15 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 251 UINT32 R/W Timer 16 Timeout Hours GG Hour 0 – 250
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 1 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 2 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-46 9597100990

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 3 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 4 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 5 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 6 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 7 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 8 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 9 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 10 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 11 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 12 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 13 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 14 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 15 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 252 UINT32 R/W Timer 16 Timeout Minutes Minute 0 – 59
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 1 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 2 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 3 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 4 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 5 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 6 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 7 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 8 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 9 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 10 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 11 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 12 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 13 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 14 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 15 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Timers 253 UINT32 R/W Timer 16 Timeout Seconds Decisecond 0 – 599
GG
Logic Counters 255 Float R/W Counter 1 Output No Unit 0 - 1800
Timeout GG

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 27-47

Instance Name Inst. # Type RW Key Name Unit Range

Logic Counters 255 Float R/W Counter 2 Output No Unit 0 - 1800
Timeout GG
Logic Counters 255 Float R/W Counter 3 Output No Unit 0 - 1800
Timeout GG
Logic Counters 255 Float R/W Counter 4 Output No Unit 0 - 1800
Timeout GG
Logic Counters 255 Float R/W Counter 5 Output No Unit 0 - 1800
Timeout GG
Logic Counters 255 Float R/W Counter 6 Output No Unit 0 - 1800
Timeout GG
Logic Counters 255 Float R/W Counter 7 Output No Unit 0 - 1800
Timeout GG
Logic Counters 255 Float R/W Counter 8 Output No Unit 0 - 1800
Timeout GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R RTD Input 1 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R RTD Input 2 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R RTD Input 3 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R RTD Input 4 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R RTD Input 5 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R RTD Input 6 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R RTD Input 7 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R RTD Input 8 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R Thermocouple Input 1 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
AEM RTD TC Metric Meter 256 Float R Thermocouple Input 2 Deg C n/a
Metric Value GG
Active Setpoint Meter 257 Float R Active Generator Voltage V n/a
Setpoint
Active Setpoint Meter 257 Float R Active Excitation Current Amp n/a
Setpoint
Active Setpoint Meter 257 Float R Active Excitation Voltage V n/a
Setpoint
Active Setpoint Meter 257 Float R Active Generator Var kvar n/a
Setpoint
Active Setpoint Meter 257 Float R Active Generator PF PF n/a
Setpoint

DECS-450 PROFIBUS Communication

27-48 9597100990

Parameter Selection
Generator VAB=0 Negative Sequence Current=27
Generator VBC=1 Positive Sequence Voltage=28
Generator VCA=2 Positive Sequence Current=29
Generator V Average=3 PSS Output=30
Bus Frequency=4 Analog Input 1=31
Bus VAB=5 Analog Input 2=32
Bus VBC=6 Analog Input 3=33
Bus VCA=7 Analog Input 4=34
Generator Frequency=8 Analog Input 5=35
Generator Power Factor=9 Analog Input 6=36
KWH=10 Analog Input 7=37
KVARH=11 Analog Input 8=38
Generator IA=12 RTD Input 1=39
Generator IB=13 RTD Input 2=40
Generator IC=14 RTD Input 3=41
Generator I Average=15 RTD Input 4=42
kW Total=16 RTD Input 5=43
kVA Total=17 RTD Input 6=44
kvar Total=18 RTD Input 7=45
Exciter Diode Monitor Ripple=19 RTD Input 8=46
Exciter Field Voltage=20 Thermocouple 1=47
Exciter Field Current=21 Thermocouple 2=48
Auxiliary Input Voltage=22 Power Input=49
Auxiliary Input Current (mA)=23 Network Load Share Error Percent=50
Setpoint Position=24 Generator Scaled Power Factor=51
Tracking Error=25 Control Output Per Unit=52
Negative Sequence Voltage=26 Field Temperature=53

PROFIBUS Communication DECS-450

9597100990 28-1

28 • Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Warning!
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To
reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other
than that specified in the operating instructions unless you are
qualified to do so.
Before performing any maintenance procedures, remove the
DECS-450 from service. Refer to the appropriate site schematics to
ensure that all steps have been taken to properly and completely de-
energize the DECS-450.

Storage
If the unit is not to be installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and
dust-free environment. The temperature of the storage environment must be within the range of –40 to
85°C (–40 to 185°F).

Preventive Maintenance
Connections
Periodically check the connections of the DECS-450 to ensure they are clean and tight and remove any
accumulation of dust.

Electrolytic Capacitors
The DECS-450 contains long-life aluminum electrolytic capacitors. For a DECS-450 kept in storage as a
spare, the life of these capacitors can be maximized by energizing the device for 30 minutes once per
year. Apply DECS-450 control power as indicated by the device style number. For this maintenance
procedure, it is recommended that the applied voltage not exceed the nominal value.
• Style XLXXXXX: 24/48 Vdc (16 to 60 Vdc)
• Style XCXXXXX: 120 Vac (82 to 132 Vac at 50/60 Hz) or 125 Vdc (90 to 150 Vdc)

Cleaning the Front Panel

Only a soft cloth and water-based solutions should be used to clean the front panel. Do not use solvents.

Backup Battery Replacement

An internal battery maintains real-time clock information when DECS-450 control power is removed or
lost. The 3-volt, lithium, backup battery is secured in a tray located in the left side panel. The backup
battery has a life expectancy of approximately five years depending on conditions. After this time, you
should contact Basler Electric to order a new battery, Basler Electric P/N 38526.

DECS-450 Maintenance
28-2 9597100990

Warning!
Only qualified personnel should replace the backup battery.
To avoid risk of electric shock, the DECS-450 must be powered down when
removing or installing the battery.
Do not short-circuit the battery, reverse the battery polarity, or attempt to
recharge the battery as personal injury or equipment damage may result.

1. Obtain a replacement battery (Murata CR2032X, Murata CR2032W, Panasonic CR2032A, Rayovac
BR2032-BA, Basler Electric 38526, or equivalent).
2. Remove the DECS-450 from service by observing all applicable safety and shutdown procedures.
3. Locate the battery access slot. Using a small, pointed, non-conductive tool, remove the battery tray
from the access slot. Real-time clock information will be lost when the battery is removed.
4. Note the orientation (polarity) of the battery in the tray or refer to the battery polarity label (Figure 28-1)
on the DECS-450 side panel. The new battery must be installed with the same orientation.

Figure 28-1. Shock Hazard and Battery Polarity Label

5. Remove the battery from the tray and dispose of properly or recycle.

Note
The battery should be disposed of properly. Consult your local health, solid
waste disposal, or recycling agency for battery disposal guidelines.

6. Place the new battery into the battery tray. Ensure that the polarity of the installed battery is correct (+
to + and – to –).
7. Slide the battery tray into battery access slot until fully seated.
8. Place the DECS-450 back in service by observing all applicable safety and startup procedures.
9. Set the DECS-450’s real-time clock.

Troubleshooting
The following troubleshooting procedures assume the excitation system components are properly
matched, fully operational, and correctly connected. If you do not obtain the results that you expect from
the DECS-450, first check the programmable settings for the appropriate function.

The DECS-450 Appears to be Inoperative

If the DECS-450 does not power up (no backlighting on front panel display), ensure that the control power
applied to the unit is at the correct level (ac terminals: L and N, dc terminals: BATT+ and BATT–). If dc
control power is used, verify that the polarity is correct. Units with style number XLXXXXX have an input
voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number XCXXXXX have an input voltage range of 90 to
150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz).

Maintenance DECS-450
9597100990 28-3

Note
When ac and dc control power is used, an isolation transformer must
be connected between the ac voltage source and the ac control power
terminals of the DECS-450.

Display is Blank or Frozen

If the front panel display (LCD) is blank or frozen (does not scroll), remove control power for about 60
seconds and then reapply control power. If the problem occurred during software uploading, repeat the
upload procedures as described in the associated instructions.

Generator Voltage Does Not Build

Check the DECS-450 settings for the following system configurations:
a. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
b. Generator PT secondary voltage
c. Analog control output signal type
Check the DECS-450 soft start settings:
d. Maximum field flash dropout time
e. Field flash dropout level
f. Generator soft start bias
g. Generator soft start time
Check the external field flashing components:
h. Field flashing contactor
i. Field flashing power source fuses
j. Field flashing current limiting resistor values
If the generator voltage still does not build, increase the soft start setting values in paragraphs d through f,
and decrease the setting for paragraph g.
Temporarily turn off the overexcitation limiter.

Generator Voltage Builds but DECS-450 Fails To Flash

Check the DECS-450 settings for the following system configurations:
a. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
b. Generator PT secondary voltage
c. Analog control output signal type
Check the DECS-450 soft start settings:
d. Maximum field flash dropout time
e. Field flash dropout level
f. Generator soft start bias
g. Generator soft start time
If the generator voltage still does not build, increase the soft start setting values in steps d through f, and
decrease the setting for paragraph g.
Temporarily turn off the overexcitation limiter.
Check the exciter power circuitry: rectifier bridge, firing circuit, and power input transformer.
If the problem persists, contact Basler Electric.

Field Voltage or Current Reading Does Not Change

Check the status of the Loss of Field Isolation Transducer alarm and ensure it is enabled.
Check the connections and polarity between the Field Isolation Transducer and the DECS-450.

DECS-450 Maintenance
28-4 9597100990

Check the connections and polarity between the Field Isolation Transducer and shunt (field current
sensing) and between the Field Isolation Transducer and the output of the exciter (field voltage sensing).

Low Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-450 settings and system parameters:
a. AVR voltage setpoint
b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
c. Generator PT secondary voltage
d. Overexcitation limiter (not activated)
e. Accessory inputs (should be zero)
f. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)
g. Underfrequency or V/Hz limiters (not activated)
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

High Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-450 settings and system parameters:
a. AVR voltage setpoint
b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
c. Generator PT secondary voltage
d. Accessory inputs (should be zero)
e. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

Generator Voltage Unstable (Hunting)

Switch into FCR operation mode. If the generator voltage becomes stable, check AVR gains.
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

Poor Voltage Regulation

Poor voltage regulation may result from insufficient Ka loop gain. Increase the AVR loop gain accordingly.

No Buildup in FCR Mode

Low Ka loop gain may hinder buildup when operating in FCR mode.

No Control Signal at Firing Circuit Input

Ensure that the Control Output Disable logic element is not inhibiting the control output.
Check the control signal setting and output of the DECS-450. Depending on the signal selected, the
DECS-450 produces a 0 to 10 Vdc, 4 to 20 mAdc, or –10 to +10 Vdc control signal.

Limiters Do Not Limit at the Desired Level

Insufficient Kg loop gain for the limiters may hinder limiter operation. Increase the limiter loop gain
accordingly.

Poor Reactive Control

Poor reactive control may result if the AVR droop setting is too low. Adjust the AVR droop accordingly.

Protection or Limiter Annunciation

If a protection function or limiting function is annunciated, check the associated setting values.
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.

Maintenance DECS-450
9597100990 28-5

Meter Readings Incorrect

If PF, var, or watt readings are significantly different from the expected readings for a known load, verify
proper PT and CT connections and phase relationship.

No Communication
If communication with the DECS-450 cannot be initiated, check the connections at the communication
ports, the baud rate, and supporting software.

Real-Time Clock Information Lost After Loss of Control Power

A loss of real-time clock information indicates a depleted backup battery. See Backup Battery
Replacement, above, for the battery replacement procedure.

The DECS-450 Reboots Frequently

Check the status of the Control Power Input Failure alarm.
If a single DECS-450 control power source is used and the power source is supplying less than the
minimum required voltage or is fluctuating below the minimum required voltage, the DECS-450 will
reboot. Increase the control power source voltage so that it is within the specified operating range. Units
with style number XLXXXXX have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number
XCXXXXX have an input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz).

USB Drivers Failed to Install Automatically

Perform the following steps to manually install the DECS-450 USB drivers.
1. In the Windows Device Manager, under Other Devices, right-click on DECS-450 and select
Properties. The Properties window appears. (If the DECS-450 is displayed as an “Unknown Device”,
restart the PC and repeat this step.)
2. In the Properties window, click the Update Driver button on the Driver tab.
3. Select “Browse my computer for driver software”.
4. Click Browse and navigate to the following directory: C:\Program Files\Basler Electric\USB Device
Drivers\USBIO
5. Click Next to install the drivers.

Support
Contact the Basler Electric Technical Services Department at +1 (618) 654-2341 for troubleshooting
support or to receive a return authorization number.

DECS-450 Maintenance
28-6 9597100990

Maintenance DECS-450
9597100990 29-1

29 • Specifications
DECS-450 electrical and physical characteristics are listed in the following paragraphs.

Control Power
Two control power inputs enable continued operation if one of the two inputs is lost. The control power
voltage rating is determined by the device style number.

AC Input (Style XCXXXXX only)

Nominal ............................................ 120 Vac
Range ............................................... 82 to 132 Vac
Frequency ........................................ 50/60 Hz
Burden .............................................. 50 VA
Terminals.......................................... L, N

DC Input (Style XCXXXXX, XLXXXXX)

Nominal
Style XCXXXXX ......................... 125 Vdc
Style XLXXXXX ......................... 24/48 Vdc
Range
Style XCXXXXX ......................... 90 to 150 Vdc
Style XLXXXXX ......................... 16 to 60 Vdc
Burden .............................................. 35 W
Terminals.......................................... BATT+, BATT–

Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing

Nominal Input ................................... 100/200 Vac (50 Hz), 120/240 Vac (60 Hz)
Type ................................................. 1-phase or 3-phase–3-wire
Burden .............................................. <1 VA per phase

Terminals
Generator Voltage Sensing .............. E1, E2, E3
Bus Voltage Sensing ........................ B1, B2, B3

50/60 Hz Sensing Voltage Nominal Input Range

90 to 264 Vac

Generator Current Sensing

Configuration .................................... 4 inputs: A-, B-, C-phase, and cross-current compensation CT input
Type ................................................. 1-phase, 1-phase with cross-current compensation, 3-phase,
3-phase with cross-current compensation
Range ............................................... 1 Aac or 5 Aac nominal
Frequency ........................................ 50/60 Hz
Burden
1 Aac Sensing............................ <1 VA
5 Aac Sensing............................ <1 VA

Terminals
A-Phase............................................ CTA (terminals 75 and 76)
B-Phase............................................ CTB (terminals 77 and 78)
C-Phase ........................................... CTC (terminals 79 and 80)
Cross-Current Compensation .......... CCCT (terminals 81 and 82)

DECS-450 Specifications
29-2 9597100990

Field Voltage and Current Sensing

The DECS-450 receives field voltage and current signals from the Field Isolation Transducer (supplied).
The Field Isolation Transducer transmits field voltage and current signals through a dedicated cable
terminated at the DECS-450 rear panel Field Isolation Transducer connector. See Field Isolation
Transducer.

Field Isolation Transducer

Electrical Specifications
Operating Power .............................. +5 Vdc, ±12 Vdc from DECS-450
Sensing Ranges
Field Voltage .............................. ±300% of the five nominal ranges: 63 Vdc, 125 Vdc, 250 Vdc,
375 Vdc, and 625 Vdc
Field Current .............................. 0 to 300% of the two nominal shunt ranges: 50 mVdc and 100 mVdc
Signal Output
Field Voltage .............................. 0.9 to 9.1 Vdc (5.0 Vdc = zero field voltage)
Field Current .............................. 2.0 to 9.5 Vdc (2.0 Vdc = zero field current)

Physical Specifications
Temperature
Operating ................................... –40 to 60 °C (–40 to 140°F)
Storage ...................................... –40 to 85°C (–40 to 185°F)
Weight .............................................. 680 g (1.5 lb)
Size .................................................. Refer to the Mounting section for Field Isolation Transducer
dimensions.

Accessory Inputs
Current Input
Range ............................................... 4 to 20 mAdc
Burden .............................................. Approximately 500 Ω
Terminals.......................................... I+, I–

Voltage Input
Range ............................................... –10 to +10 Vdc
Burden .............................................. >20 kΩ
Terminals.......................................... V+, V–

Metering Accuracy
Generator and Bus Voltage.............. ±1% of rated over nominal range
The greater of ±0.5% of reading or ±0.1% of full range at 25°C
Generator and Bus Frequency ......... ±0.1 Hz over range
Generator Line Current .................... ±1% of rated over nominal range
Power Quantities .............................. ±1% of rated
Power Factor .................................... ±0.02
Field Current and Voltage ................ ±2% of nominal range
Accessory Input ................................ ±1% of range
The greater of ±0.5% of reading or ±0.1% of full range at 25°C

Control Output
Range ............................................... 0 to 10 Vdc, –10 to +10 Vdc, or 4 to 20 mAdc
Terminals.......................................... CTRL+, CTRL–
Specifications DECS-450
9597100990 29-3

Meter Driver Outputs

Range ............................................... 0 to 10 Vdc, –10 to +10 Vdc, or 4 to 20 mAdc
Terminals.......................................... M1+, M1–, M2+, M2–, M3+, M3–, M4+, M4–

Contact Inputs
Type ................................................. Dry contact, accept PLC open-collector outputs
Interrogation Voltage ........................ 12 Vdc

Terminals
Start .................................................. START, COM
Stop .................................................. STOP, COM
Programmable Input 1...................... IN 1, COM
Programmable Input 2...................... IN 2, COM
Programmable Input 3...................... IN 3, COM
Programmable Input 4...................... IN 4, COM
Programmable Input 5...................... IN 5, COM
Programmable Input 6...................... IN 6, COM
Programmable Input 7...................... IN 7, COM
Programmable Input 8...................... IN 8, COM
Programmable Input 9...................... IN 9, COM
Programmable Input 10.................... IN 10, COM
Programmable Input 11.................... IN 11, COM
Programmable Input 12.................... IN 12, COM
Programmable Input 13.................... IN 13, COM
Programmable Input 14.................... IN 14, COM

Communication Ports
Controller Area Network (CAN)
Type ................................................. SAE J1939 message protocol
Interface ........................................... Spring (style XXXXXXS) or compression (style XXXXXXC) type
terminals
Location ............................................ Rear panel
Terminals.......................................... CAN 1 H, L, SH
CAN 2 H, L, SH
Differential Bus Voltage.................... 1.5 to 3 Vdc
Maximum Voltage ............................ –32 to +32 Vdc
Communication Rate........................ 250 kb/s

Ethernet, Copper (style XXXXXTX)

Type ................................................. 100BASE-TX
Interface ........................................... RJ45 jack
Location ............................................ Rear panel

Ethernet, Fiber Optic (style XXXXXFX)

Type ................................................. 100BASE-FX, multimode
Interface ........................................... ST type connectors for RX and TX BNC style male connectors
Maximum Length (Full-Duplex) ........ 6,562 ft. (2,000 m)
Location ............................................ Rear panel

PROFIBUS
Type ................................................. PROFIBUS DP (Decentralized Peripherals)
Interface ........................................... DB-9 connector
Location ............................................ Rear panel

DECS-450 Specifications
29-4 9597100990

RS-232
Type ................................................. RS-232 (for external autotracking)
Interface ........................................... DB-9 connector
Location ............................................ Rear panel

RS-485
Type ................................................. RS-485, half duplex
Interface ........................................... Spring (style XXXXXXS) or compression (style XXXXXXC) type
terminals
Location ............................................ Rear panel
Terminals.......................................... RS-485 A, B, C

Universal Serial Bus (USB)

Interface ........................................... USB type B port
Location ............................................ Front panel

IRIG Time Synchronization Input

Standard ........................................... 200-98, Format B002, and 200-04, Format B006
Input Signal ...................................... Demodulated (dc level-shifted signal)
Logic High Level ............................... 3.5 Vdc, minimum
Logic Low Level ............................... 0.5 Vdc, maximum
Input Voltage Range ........................ –10 to +10 Vdc
Input Resistance .............................. Nonlinear, approximately 4 kΩ at 3.5 Vdc,
3 kΩ at 20 Vdc
Response Time ................................ <1 cycle
Terminals.......................................... IRIG+, IRIG–

Contact Outputs
Make and Break Ratings (Resistive)
24 Vdc........................................ 7.0 Adc
48 Vdc........................................ 0.7 Adc
125 Vdc...................................... 0.2 Adc
120/240 Vac............................... 7.0 Aac
Carry Ratings (Resistive)
24/48/125 Vdc............................ 7.0 Adc
120/240 Vac............................... 7.0 Aac
Terminal Assignments
Watchdog................................... WTCHD1, WTCHD, WTCHD2
Relay Output 1 ........................... RLY 1, RLY 1
Relay Output 2 ........................... RLY 2, RLY 2
Relay Output 3 ........................... RLY 3, RLY 3
Relay Output 4 ........................... RLY 4, RLY 4
Relay Output 5 ........................... RLY 5, RLY 5
Relay Output 6 ........................... RLY 6, RLY 6
Relay Output 7 ........................... RLY 7, RLY 7
Relay Output 8 ........................... RLY 8, RLY 8
Relay Output 9 ........................... RLY 9, RLY 9
Relay Output 10 ......................... RLY 10, RLY 10
Relay Output 11 ......................... RLY 11, RLY 11

Specifications DECS-450
9597100990 29-5

Regulation
FCR Operating Mode
Setpoint Range ................................ 0 to 120% of rated continuous field current, in 0.01 ampere
increments
Regulation Accuracy ........................ ±1.0% for a 10% change in ac input power or for a 20% change in
field resistance. For greater changes, regulation may be up to
±5.0%.

FVR Operating Mode

Setpoint Range ................................ 0 to 150% of nominal field voltage, in increments of 0.1%
Regulation Accuracy ........................ ±1.0% of nominal

AVR Operating Mode

Setpoint Range ................................ 70 to 120% of rated generator voltage, in increments of 0.1%
Regulation Accuracy ........................ ±0.2% over load range at rated PF with constant generator
frequency and ambient temperature
Steady-State Stability ....................... ±0.1% at rated PF with constant generator frequency and ambient
temperature
Temperature Drift ............................. ±0.5% between 0 and 50°C ambient temperature at constant load
and generator frequency

Var Operating Mode

Setpoint Range ................................ 100% rated generator vars absorbing to 100% rated generator vars
exporting, based on rated generator kVA and power factor.
Regulation Range ............................ 0 to 100% of real power over the rated generator kW range
Regulation Accuracy ........................ ±2.0% of rated generator kVA

Power Factor Operating Mode

Setpoint Range ................................ 0.5 per unit leading to 0.5 per unit lagging, in 0.001 per unit
increments
Regulation Range ............................ 0 to 100% power factor importing and 0 to 100% power factor
exporting
Regulation Accuracy ........................ ±0.02 per unit of the PF setpoint across the setpoint range for rated
generator kW from less than 10% to 100%.

Parallel Compensation
Modes............................................... Reactive Droop, Line Drop, and Cross-Current with CT network or
Ethernet communication
Cross-Current Input Burden ............. May exceed 1 VA if external balance resistors are added to the
cross-current compensation circuit
Cross-Current Input Terminals ......... CCCT (terminals 81 and 82)

Compensation Range
Reactive Droop ................................ 0 to +30% of Rated Voltage
Line Drop .......................................... 0 to +30% of Rated Voltage
Cross-Current ................................... –30 to +30% of Primary CT Current

DECS-450 Specifications
29-6 9597100990

Generator Protection Functions

Overexcitation (24)
Inverse Time
Curve Exponent ............................... 0.5, 1, or 2
Pickup Range ................................... 0 or 0.5 to 6 V/Hz
Time Dial Range .............................. 0.0 to 9.9
Reset Dial Range ............................. 0.0 to 9.9

Definite Time 1 and 2

Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 or 0.5 to 6
Increment ......................................... 0.01
Time Delay
Range ............................................... 0.05 to 600
Increment ......................................... 0.001

Overvoltage (59) and Undervoltage (27)

Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 600,000 Vac
Increment ......................................... 1 Vac
Hysteresis......................................... 2%

Time Delay
Range ............................................... 0.1 to 60 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Loss of Sensing
Time Delay
Range ............................................... 0.1 to 30 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Voltage Balanced Level

Range ............................................... 0 to 100% of Positive Sequence Voltage
Increment ......................................... 0.1%

Voltage Unbalanced Level

Range ............................................... 0 to 100% of Positive Sequence Voltage
Increment ......................................... 0.1%

Overfrequency (81O) and Underfrequency (81U)

Pickup
Range ............................................... 15 to 70 Hz
Increment ......................................... 0.01 Hz

Time Delay
Time Delay Range ........................... 0.1 to 300 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Voltage Inhibit
Range ............................................... 5 to 100% of rated voltage
Increment ......................................... 1%

Specifications DECS-450
9597100990 29-7

Reverse Power (32R)

Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 1.5 pu of rated kVA
Increment ......................................... 0.01 pu

Time Delay
Range ............................................... 0 to 300 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Loss of Excitation (40Q)

Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 1.5 pu of rated kVA
Increment ......................................... 1%

Time Delay
Range ............................................... 0 to 300 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Field Protection Functions

Field Overvoltage
Pickup
Range ............................................... 1.0 to 2.4 pu of rated field voltage
Increment ......................................... 0.1 pu

Time Delay
Range ............................................... 0.2 to 30 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Field Overcurrent
Pickup
Range ............................................... 0.1 to 2.0 pu of maximum rated field current
Increment ......................................... 0.1 Adc

Inverse Time
Time Dial Range .............................. 0.1 to 20
Increment ......................................... 0.1

Definite Time Delay

Range ............................................... 0.2 to 30 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Field Overtemperature
Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 572°F (-18 to 300°C)
Increment ......................................... 1°

Time Delay
Range ............................................... 0.1 to 60 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

DECS-450 Specifications
29-8 9597100990

Loss of Field Isolation Transducer

Time Delay
Range ............................................... 0.0 to 9.9 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM)

Pole Ratio
Range ............................................... 0 to 10
Increment ......................................... 0.01

Pickup Level
Open and Shorted Diode ................. 0 to 100% of EDM ripple current
Increment ......................................... 0.1%

Delay
Open Diode Protection ..................... 10 to 60 s
Shorted Diode Protection ................. 5 to 30 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Synchronism Check (25) Protection

Voltage Difference
Range ............................................... 0.1 to 50%
Increment ......................................... 0.1%

Slip Angle
Range ............................................... 1 to 99°
Increment ......................................... 0.1°

Angle Compensation
Range ............................................... 0 to 359.9°
Increment ......................................... 0.1°

Slip Frequency
Range ............................................... 0.01 to 0.5 Hz
Increment ......................................... 0.01 Hz

Startup
Soft Start Level
Range ............................................... 0 to 90% of Rated Gen Voltage
Increment ......................................... 1%

Soft Start Time

Range ............................................... 1 to 7,200 s
Increment ......................................... 1 s

Field Flash Dropout Level

Range ............................................... 0 to 100% of Rated Gen Voltage
Increment ......................................... 1%

Specifications DECS-450
9597100990 29-9

Maximum Field Flash Time

Range ............................................... 1 to 50 s
Increment ......................................... 1 s

Automatic Synchronizer
Synchronizer Types ......................... Phase-Locked Loop, Anticipatory
Contact Output Types ...................... Continuous, Proportional

Voltage Window
Range ............................................... 2 to 15%
Increment ......................................... 0.5%

Slip Frequency
Range ............................................... 0.1 to 0.5 Hz
Increment ......................................... 0.05 Hz

Breaker Closing Angle

Range ............................................... 3 to 20°
Increment ......................................... 0.5°

Sync Activation Delay

Range ............................................... 0.1 to 0.8 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Sync Fail Activation Delay

Range ............................................... 0.1 to 600.0 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

Angle Compensation
Range ............................................... 0.0 to 359.9°
Increment ......................................... 0.1°

Generator to Bus PT Matching Level

Range ............................................... 0 to 700%
Increment ......................................... 0.001%

Voltage Matching
Accuracy........................................... Generator rms voltage is matched with the bus rms voltage to within
±0.5% of the generator voltage.

Power System Stabilizer (Style 1XXXXXX)

Model................................................ IEEE Std 421.5 type PSS2A/2B/2C
Operating Mode ............................... Generator or Motor, ABC or ACB phase sequence
Sensing Configuration ...................... Power and Speed or Speed only
Power Measurement ........................ Three Wattmeter method

DECS-450 Specifications
29-10 9597100990

On-Line Overexcitation Limiting

High Current Level
Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 12,000 Adc
Increment ......................................... 0.01 Adc

Time
Range ............................................... 0 to 240 s
Increment ......................................... 1 s

Middle Current Level

Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 12,000 Adc
Increment ......................................... 0.01 Adc

Time
Range ............................................... 0 to 240 s
Increment ......................................... 1 s

Low Current Level

Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 12,000 Adc
Increment ......................................... 0.01 Adc

Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting

High Current Level
Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 12,000 Adc
Increment ......................................... 0.01 Adc

Time
Range ............................................... 0 to 240 s
Increment ......................................... 1 s

Low Current Level

Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 12,000 Adc
Increment ......................................... 0.01 Adc

Underexcitation Limiting (UEL)

UEL is implemented through an internally-generated UEL curve or a user-defined five-point UEL curve.
The internally-generated curve is based on the desired reactive power limit at zero real power with
respect to the generator voltage and current rating.

Reactive Power
Range ............................................... 0 to 62
Increment ......................................... 0.001

Specifications DECS-450
9597100990 29-11

Real Power
Range ............................................... 0 to 62
Increment ......................................... 0.001

Stator Current Limiting (SCL)

High SCL Level
Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 66,000 Adc
Increment ......................................... 0.1 Adc

Time
Range: .............................................. 0 to 240 s
Increment: ........................................ 0.1 s

Low SCL Level

Pickup
Range ............................................... 0 to 66,000 Adc
Increment ......................................... 0.1 Adc

Underfrequency Limiting
Underfrequency
Corner Frequency
Range ............................................... 15 to 90 Hz
Increment ......................................... 0.1 Hz

Slope
Range ............................................... 0 to 3
Increment ......................................... 0.01

Volts per Hertz

V/Hz High
Range ............................................... 1 to 3
Increment ......................................... 0.01

V/Hz Low
Range ............................................... 0 to 3
Increment ......................................... 0.01

V/Hz Time
Range ............................................... 0 to 10 s
Increment ......................................... 0.2 s

Var Limiting
Setpoint
Range ............................................... 0 to 200%
Increment ......................................... 0.1%

Delay
Range ............................................... 0 to 300 s
Increment ......................................... 0.1 s

DECS-450 Specifications
29-12 9597100990

Sequence of Events Recording (SER)

The SER scans more than 400 parameters in four-millisecond intervals and records any changes of state
(events) into a record of up to 2,047 events.

Data Logging
Records consist of up to six user-selectable parameters with up to 1,200 data points per parameter and
are saved in the IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE).

Environment
Temperature
Operating Range .............................. –40 to +60°C (–40 to +140°F)
Storage Range ................................. –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F)

Humidity
IEC 60068-2-78

Salt Fog
IEC 61000-2-11

Type Tests
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

Vibration
IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

Impulse
IEC 60255-5

Transients
IEC 61000-4-4
IEEE C37.90.1

Static Discharge
IEC 61000-4-2

Radio Interference
Type tested using a 5 W, hand-held transceiver operating at random frequencies centered around 144
MHz and 440 MHz with the antenna located within 150 mm (6 inches) of the device in both vertical and
horizontal planes.

HALT (Highly Accelerated Life Testing)

HALT is used by Basler Electric to prove that our products will provide the user with many years of
reliable service. HALT subjects the device to extremes in temperature, shock, and vibration to simulate
years of operation, but in a much shorter period. HALT allows Basler Electric to evaluate all possible

Specifications DECS-450
9597100990 29-13

design elements that will add to the life of this device. As an example of some of the extreme testing
conditions, the DECS-450 was subjected to temperature tests (tested over a temperature range of –100
to +120°C (–148 to +248°F)), vibration tests (of 5 to 50 G at +20°C (68°F)), and temperature/vibration
tests (tested at 50 G over a temperature range of –95 to +115°C (–139 to +239°F)). Combined
temperature and vibration testing at these extremes proves that the DECS-450 is expected to provide
long-term operation in a rugged environment. Note that the vibration and temperature extremes listed in
this paragraph are specific to HALT and do not reflect recommended operation levels.

Physical
Dimensions ...................................... Refer to the Mounting section.
Weight .............................................. 4.4 kg (9.6 lb)

Regulatory Certifications and Standards

UL Certification
This product is a Recognized Component (cURus) covering the US and Canada.
UL File (E97035-FPTM2/FPTM8)
Standards used for evaluation:
• ANSI/CAN/UL/ULC 6200:2019 - Standard for Controllers for Use in Power Production, First Edition,
May 31, 2019

CE Compliance
This product has been evaluated and complies with the relevant essential requirements set forth by the
EU legislation.
EC Directives:
• LVD 2014/35/EU
• EMC 2014/30/EU
• ROHS 2 2011/65/EU
Harmonized standards used for evaluation:
• IEC 62477-1 Safety requirements for power electronic converter systems and equipment –Part 1:
General
• EN 50581 – Technical Documentation for the Assessment of Electrical and Electronic Products with
Respect to the Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
• EN 61000-6-4 – Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards, Emission Standard for
Industrial Environments
• EN 61000-6-2 – Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards, Immunity for Industrial
Environments
The Typical Connections section in this manual contains specific installation instructions for meeting EMC
requirements.

DECS-450 Specifications
29-14 9597100990

Specifications DECS-450
9597100990 30-1

30 • Analog Expansion Module

General Information
The optional AEM-2020 is a remote auxiliary device that provides additional DECS-450 analog inputs and
outputs.

Features
The AEM-2020 has the following features:
• Eight Analog Inputs
• Eight RTD Inputs
• Two Thermocouple Inputs
• Four Analog Outputs
• Functionality of Inputs and Outputs assigned by BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic
• Communications via CAN Bus

Specifications
Operating Power
Nominal ...................................... 12 or 24 Vdc
Range ......................................... 8 to 32 Vdc (Withstands ride-through down to 6 Vdc for 500 ms.)
Maximum Consumption ............. 5.1 W

Analog Inputs
The AEM-2020 contains eight programmable analog inputs.
Rating ......................................... 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 Vdc (user-selectable)
Burden
4 to 20 mA ........................... 470 Ω maximum
0 to 10 Vdc........................... 9.65k Ω minimum

RTD Inputs
The AEM-2020 contains eight programmable RTD inputs.
Rating ......................................... 100 Ω Platinum or 10 Ω Copper (user-selectable)
Setting Range ............................ –50 to +250°C or –58 to +482°F
Accuracy (10 Ω Copper) ............. ±0.044 Ω @ 25°C, ±0.005 Ω/°C drift over ambient temperature
Accuracy (100 Ω Platinum)......... ±0.39 Ω @ 25°C, ±0.047Ω/°C drift over ambient temperature

Thermocouple Inputs
The AEM-2020 contains two thermocouple inputs.
Rating ......................................... 2 K Type Thermocouples
Setting Range ............................ 0 to 1,375°C or 0 to 2,507°F
Display Range ............................ Ambient to 1,375°C or Ambient to 2,507°F
Accuracy..................................... ±40uV @ 25°C, ±5 uV/°C drift over ambient temperature

Analog Outputs
The AEM-2020 contains four programmable analog outputs.
Rating ......................................... 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 Vdc (user-selectable)

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-2 9597100990

Communication Interface
The AEM-2020 communicates with the DECS-450 through CAN1.

CAN Bus
Differential Bus Voltage.............. 1.5 to 3 Vdc
Maximum Voltage ...................... –32 to +32 Vdc with respect to negative battery terminal
Communication Rate.................. 125 or 250 kb/s
Type Tests
Shock
Withstands 15 G in 3 perpendicular planes.

Vibration
Swept over the following ranges for 12 sweeps in each of three mutually perpendicular planes with each
15-minute sweep consisting of the following:
5 to 29 to 5 Hz ............................ 1.5 G peak for 5 min.
29 to 52 to 29 Hz ........................ 0.036” Double Amplitude for 2.5 min.
52 to 500 to 52 Hz ...................... 5 G peak for 7.5 min.

HALT (Highly Accelerated Life Testing)

HALT is used by Basler Electric to prove that our products will provide the user with many years of
reliable service. HALT subjects the device to extremes in temperature, shock, and vibration to simulate
years of operation, but in a much shorter period span. HALT allows Basler Electric to evaluate all possible
design elements that will add to the life of this device. As an example of some of the extreme testing
conditions, the AEM-2020 was subjected to temperature tests (tested over a temperature range of –80°C
to +130°C), vibration tests (of 5 to 50 G at +25°C), and temperature/vibration tests (tested at 10 to 20 G
over a temperature range of –60°C to +100°C). Combined temperature and vibration testing at these
extremes proves that the AEM-2020 is expected to provide long-term operation in a rugged environment.
Note that the vibration and temperature extremes listed in this paragraph are specific to HALT and do not
reflect recommended operation levels. These operational ratings are included in the Specifications
section of this manual.
Environment
Temperature
Operating ............................. –40 to +70°C (–40 to +158°F)
Storage ................................ –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F)
Humidity ..................................... IEC 68-2-38

Agency, Standards, and Directives

UL Approval
The AEM-2020 is a Recognized Component for the US and Canada under UL file E97035
(CCN-FTPM2/FTPM8) covered under the Standards below:
• UL 6200
• CSA C22.2 No.14-13
The AEM-2020 is a Recognized Component for the US and Canada under UL file E470837
(CCN-FTWD2/FTWD8) for use in Hazardous Locations:
• Class I Division 2
• Groups A, B, C & D
CSA Approval
The AEM-2020 is covered under CSA file 1042505 (LR23131-138S).
• CSA C22.2 No. 14-13
Analog Expansion Module DECS-450
9597100990 30-3

CE Compliance
This product complies with the requirements of the following EC Directives:
• Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2014/35/EU
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 2014/30/EU
• Hazardous Substances (RoHS 2) 2011/65/EU
This product conforms to the following Harmonized Standards:
• EN 50178:1997 - Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations
• EN 61000-6-4:2007; with AMD 1:2011 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards,
Emission Standard for Industrial Environments
• EN 61000-6-2:2005 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards, Immunity for
Industrial Environments
• EN 50581:2012, Ed. 12 - Technical Documentation for the Assessment of Electrical and Electronic
Products with respect to the Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
• IEC 63000:2016 Ed. 1.0 – Technical Documentation for Assessment of Electrical and Electronic
Products with Respect to Restriction of Hazardous Substances
• IEC 62474:2018 Ed. 2.0 – Material Declaration for Products of and for the Electrotechnical Industry
EAC Mark (Eurasian Conformity)
• TP TC 004/2011
• TP TC 020/2011

Physical
Weight ........................................ 1.80 lb (816 g)
Dimensions ................................ See Installation below.

Installation
Analog Expansion Modules are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage. Upon receipt of a
module, check the part number against the requisition and packing list for agreement. Inspect for
damage, and if there is evidence of such, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler
Electric regional sales office, your sales representative, or a sales representative at Basler Electric,
Highland, Illinois USA.
If the device is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and dust-
free environment.

Mounting
Analog Expansion Modules are contained in a potted plastic case and may be mounted in any convenient
position. The construction of an Analog Expansion Module is durable enough to mount directly on a
genset using ¼-inch hardware. Hardware selection should be based on any expected
shipping/transportation and operating conditions. The torque applied to the mounting hardware should not
exceed 65 in-lb (7.34 N•m).
See Figure 30-1 for AEM-2020 overall dimensions. All dimensions are shown in inches with millimeters in
parenthesis.

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-4 9597100990

Figure 30-1. AEM-2020 Overall Dimensions

Connections
Analog Expansion Module connections are dependent on the application. Incorrect wiring may result in
damage to the module.

Note
Operating power from the battery must be of the correct polarity.
Although reverse polarity will not cause damage, the AEM-2020 will
not operate.
Be sure that the AEM-2020 is hard-wired to earth ground with no
smaller than 12 AWG copper wire attached to the chassis ground
terminal on the module.

Terminations
The terminal interface consists of both plug-in connectors and a permanently mounted connector with
screw-down compression terminals.
AEM-2020 connections are made with one 5-position connector, two 12-position connectors, two 16-
position connectors, and two 2-position thermocouple connectors. The 16, 5, and 2-position connectors
plug into headers on the AEM-2020. The connectors and headers have dovetailed edges that ensure
proper connector orientation. Also, the connectors and headers are uniquely keyed to ensure that the
connectors mate only with the correct headers. The 12-position connector is not a plug-in connector and
is mounted permanently to the board.

Analog Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 30-5

Connectors and headers may contain tin- or gold-plated conductors. Tin-plated conductors are housed in
a black plastic casing and gold-plated conductors are housed in an orange plastic casing. Mate
connectors to headers of the same color only.

Caution
By mating conductors of dissimilar metals, galvanic corrosion could
occur which deteriorates connections and leads to signal loss.

Connector screw terminals accept a maximum wire size of 12 AWG. Thermocouple connectors accept a
maximum thermocouple wire diameter of 0.177 inches (4.5 mm). Maximum screw torque is 5 in-lb
(0.56 N•m).

Operating Power
The Analog Expansion Module operating power input accepts either 12 Vdc or 24 Vdc and tolerates
voltage over the range of 6 to 32 Vdc. Operating power must be of the correct polarity. Although reverse
polarity will not cause damage, the AEM-2020 will not operate. Operating power terminals are listed in
Table 30-1.
It is recommended that a fuse be added for additional protection for the wiring to the battery input of the
Analog Expansion Module. A Bussmann ABC-7 fuse or equivalent is recommended.
Table 30-1. Operating Power Terminals
Terminal Description
P1- (SHIELD) Chassis ground connection
P1- – (BATT–) Negative side of operating power input
P1- + (BATT+) Positive side of operating power input

AEM-2020 Inputs and Outputs

Input and output terminals are shown in Figure 30-2 and listed in Table 30-2.

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-6 9597100990

Figure 30-2. Input and Output Terminals

Table 30-2. Input and Output Terminals

Connector Description
P1
Operating Power and CAN bus

P2 RTD Inputs 1 - 4
P3 Analog Inputs 1 - 8 and Analog Outputs 1 - 4
P4 Thermocouple 1 Input
P5 Thermocouple 2 Input
P6 RTD Inputs 5 - 8

External Analog Input Connections

Voltage input connections are shown in Figure 30-3 and current input connections are shown in Figures
34 through 36. When using the current input, AIN V+ and AIN I+ must be tied together.

Analog Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 30-7

AEM-2020

AIN I+
0 – 10 Vdc AIN –

P0059-78
Voltage
Transducer AIN V+

Figure 30-3. Analog Inputs - Voltage Input Connections

Figure 30-4. Analog Inputs - Current Input Connections, Type II 2-Wire Circuit

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-8 9597100990

Figure 30-5. Analog Inputs - Current Input Connections, Type III 2-Wire Circuit

Figure 30-6. Analog Inputs - Current Input Connections, Type IV 2-Wire Circuit

External RTD Input Connections

External 2-wire RTD input connections are shown in Figure 30-7. Figure 30-8 shows external 3-wire RTD
input connections.

Analog Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 30-9

RED

AEM-2020

RTD1+
BLACK
RTD1–

P0053-64
Jumper
RTD1C

Figure 30-7. External Two-Wire RTD Input Connections

RED

AEM-2020

RTD1+
BLACK
RTD1–

P0053-65
BLACK
RTD1C

Figure 30-8. External Three-Wire RTD Input Connections

CAN Bus Interface

These terminals provide communication using the SAE J1939 protocol and provide high-speed
communication between the Analog Expansion Module and the DECS-450. Connections between the
AEM-2020 and DECS-450 should be made with twisted-pair, shielded cable. CAN Bus interface terminals
are listed in Table 30-3. Refer to Figure 30-9 and Figure 30-10.

Table 30-3. CAN bus Interface Terminals

Terminal Description
P1- HI (CAN H) CAN high connection (yellow wire)
P1- LO (CAN L) CAN low connection (green wire)
P1- (SHIELD) CAN drain connection

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-10 9597100990

Notes
1. If the AEM-2020 is providing one end of the J1939 bus, a 120 Ω,
½ watt terminating resistor should be installed across terminals
P1- LO (CANL) and P1- HI (CANH).
2. If the AEM-2020 is not part of the J1939 bus, the stub connecting
the AEM-2020 to the bus should not exceed 914 mm (3 ft) in
length.
3. The maximum bus length, not including stubs, is 40 m (131 ft).
4. The J1939 drain (shield) should be grounded at one point only. If
grounded elsewhere, do not connect the drain to the AEM-2020.

Figure 30-9. CAN Bus Interface with AEM-2020 providing One End of the Bus

Figure 30-10. CAN Bus Interface with DECS-450 providing One End of the Bus

Analog Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 30-11

Communications
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, CAN bus, Remote Module Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communication, CAN bus, Remote Module Setup, Analog Expansion
Module
The analog expansion module must be enabled with the correct J1939 address. A Control Area Network
(CAN) is a standard interface that enables communication between the AEM-2020 and the DECS-450.
The Remote Module Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 30-11.

Figure 30-11. Remote Module Setup

Functional Description
Analog Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Inputs, Remote Analog Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Inputs, Remote Analog Input
The AEM-2020 provides eight analog inputs that can annunciate a latching or non-latching alarm. The
analog inputs are always monitored and their status is displayed on the appropriate metering screens. To
make identifying the analog inputs easier, a user-assigned name can be given to each input.
Select the input type. Select the amount of hysteresis needed to prevent rapid switching of the alarm. A
user-adjustable arming delay allows configuration of the analog input threshold monitoring in one of two
ways. (1) When the arming delay is set to zero, threshold monitoring is performed all the time, whether or
not excitation is enabled. (2) When the arming delay is set to a non-zero value, threshold monitoring
begins when the arming delay time has expired after system startup is complete. An out-of-range alarm,
configured on the Alarm Configuration, Alarms screen in BESTCOMSPlus, alerts the user of an open or
damaged analog input wire. When enabled, Stop Mode Inhibit turns off analog input protection when
excitation is stopped.
Ranges must be set for the selected input type. Param Min correlates to Min Input Current or Min Input
Voltage and Param Max correlates to Max Input Current or Max Input Voltage.
Each analog input can be independently configured for over or under mode to annunciate an alarm when
the analog input signal falls beyond the threshold. Alarms are configured on the Alarm Configuration,
Alarms screen in BESTCOMSPlus. A user-adjustable activation delay setting delays alarm annunciation
after the threshold has been exceeded.
The remote analog inputs are incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by
selecting them from the I/O group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus section.
BESTCOMSPlus settings for remote analog inputs are illustrated in Figure 30-12. Remote Analog Input
#1 is shown.

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-12 9597100990

Figure 30-12. Remote Analog Input Settings

RTD Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs
The AEM-2020 provides eight user-configurable RTD inputs that can annunciate a latching or non-
latching alarm. The RTD inputs are always monitored and their status is displayed on the appropriate
metering screens. To make identifying the RTD inputs easier, a user-assigned name can be given to
each input.
Select the amount of hysteresis needed to prevent rapid switching of the alarm. Select the RTD type. A
user-adjustable arming delay allows configuration of the RTD input threshold monitoring in one of two
ways. (1) When the arming delay is set to zero, threshold monitoring is performed all the time, whether or
not excitation is enabled. (2) When the arming delay is set to a non-zero value, threshold monitoring
begins when the arming delay time has expired after system startup is complete. An out-of-range alarm,
configured on the Alarm Configuration, Alarms screen in BESTCOMSPlus, alerts the user of an open or
damaged RTD input wire. When enabled, Stop Mode Inhibit turns off RTD input protection when
excitation is stopped.
Each RTD input can be independently configured for over or under mode to annunciate an alarm when
the RTD input signal falls beyond the threshold. Alarms are configured on the Alarm Configuration,
Alarms screen in BESTCOMSPlus. A user-adjustable activation delay setting delays alarm annunciation
after the threshold has been exceeded.
The remote RTD inputs are incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by selecting
them from the I/O group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus section.
BESTCOMSPlus® settings for remote RTD inputs are illustrated in Figure 30-13. Remote RTD Input #1 is
shown.

Analog Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 30-13

Figure 30-13. Remote RTD Input Settings

Thermocouple Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Inputs, Remote Thermocouple Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Inputs, Remote Thermo Input
The AEM-2020 provides two thermocouple inputs. The thermocouple inputs are always monitored and
their status is displayed on the appropriate metering screens. To make identifying the thermocouple
inputs easier, a user-assigned name can be given to each input.
Select the amount of hysteresis needed to prevent rapid switching of the alarm. A user-adjustable arming
delay allows configuration of the thermocouple input threshold monitoring in one of two ways. (1) When
the arming delay is set to zero, threshold monitoring is performed all the time, whether or not excitation is
enabled. (2) When the arming delay is set to a non-zero value, threshold monitoring begins when the
arming delay time has expired after system startup is complete. An out-of-range alarm, configured on the
Alarm Configuration, Alarms screen in BESTCOMSPlus, alerts the user of an open or damaged
thermocouple input wire. When enabled, Stop Mode Inhibit turns off thermocouple input protection when
excitation is stopped.
Each thermocouple input can be independently configured for over or under mode to annunciate an alarm
when the thermocouple input signal falls beyond the threshold. Alarms are configured on the Alarm
Configuration, Alarms screen in BESTCOMSPlus. A user-adjustable activation delay setting delays alarm
annunciation after the threshold has been exceeded.
The remote thermocouple inputs are incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by
selecting them from the I/O group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus section.
BESTCOMSPlus® settings for remote thermocouple inputs are illustrated in Figure 30-14. Remote
Thermocouple Input #1 is shown.

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-14 9597100990

Figure 30-14. Remote Thermocouple Input Settings

Analog Outputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Outputs, Remote Analog Outputs
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Outputs, Remote Analog Output
The AEM-2020 provides four analog outputs.
Make a parameter selection and select the output type. An out-of-range alarm configured on the Alarm
Configuration, Alarms screen in BESTCOMSPlus, alerts the user of an open or damaged analog output
wire. An out-of-range activation delay setting delays alarm annunciation.
Ranges must be set for the selected output type. Param Min correlates to Min Output Current or Min
Output Voltage and Param Max correlates to Max Output Current or Max Output Voltage.
The remote analog outputs are incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by
selecting them from the I/O group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus section.
BESTCOMSPlus settings for remote analog outputs are illustrated in Figure 30-15. Remote Analog
Output #1 is shown.

Figure 30-15. Remote Analog Output Settings

Status LED
This red LED flashes to indicate that the AEM-2020 is powered up and functioning properly. The LED
lights solid during power up. When the power-up sequence is complete, this LED flashes. If the LED does
not flash after power up, contact Basler Electric.

Analog Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 30-15

Metering
Analog Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Analog Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Analog Input Values
The value and status of the remote analog inputs are shown on this screen. The status is TRUE when the
corresponding LED is green. Refer to Figure 30-16. Remote Analog Input #1 is shown.

Figure 30-16. Remote Analog Inputs Metering

RTD Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Analog Input Values
The value and status of the remote RTD inputs are shown on this screen. The status is TRUE when the
corresponding LED is green. Refer to Figure 30-17. Remote RTD Input #1 is shown.

Figure 30-17. Remote RTD Inputs Metering

Thermocouple Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Thermocouple Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Analog Input Values
The value and status of the remote thermocouple inputs are shown on this screen. The status is TRUE
when the corresponding LED is green. Refer to Figure 30-18. Remote Thermocouple Input #1 is shown.

Figure 30-18. Remote Thermocouple Inputs Metering

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-16 9597100990

Analog Input Values

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Analog Input Values
HMI Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Analog Input Values
The values of the scaled analog inputs, raw analog inputs, RTD input temperatures, raw RTD inputs,
thermocouple input temperatures, and raw thermocouple inputs are shown on this screen.
For each analog input, the raw metered input value is displayed, and the scaled metered input value. This
is useful to check if the AEM-2020 is seeing a valid raw input value (i.e. the raw 0 to 10 volt voltage input
or 4 to 20 mA current input). The scaled value is the raw input scaled up to the range specified by the
Parameter Minimum and Parameter Maximum value parameters in the Remote Analog Input settings.
Refer to Figure 30-19.

Figure 30-19. Remote Analog Input Values Metering

When connected to an AEM-2020, the Calibrate button shown on the Remote Analog Input Values
screen opens the Analog Input Temperature Calibration screen shown in Figure 30-20. This screen is
used to calibrate RTD inputs 1 through 8 and thermocouple inputs 1 and 2.

Analog Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 30-17

Figure 30-20. Remote Analog Input Temperature Calibration

Analog Outputs
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Outputs, Remote Analog Outputs
HMI Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Outputs, Remote Analog Outputs
The status of the remote analog outputs, scaled analog output values, and raw analog output values are
shown on this screen. Parameter selections are made on the Remote Analog Outputs screen under
settings in BESTCOMSPlus. The status is TRUE when the corresponding LED is green. Refer to Figure
30-21.

Figure 30-21. Remote Analog Outputs Metering

Maintenance
Preventive maintenance consists of periodically checking that the connections between the AEM-2020
and the system are clean and tight. Analog Expansion Modules are manufactured using state-of-the-art
surface-mount technology. As such, Basler Electric recommends that no repair procedures be attempted
by anyone other than Basler Electric personnel.

Firmware Updates
Refer to the BESTCOMSPlus® section for instructions on updating firmware in the AEM-2020.

DECS-450 Analog Expansion Module

30-18 9597100990

Analog Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 31-1

31 • Contact Expansion Module

General Information
The optional CEM-2020 is a remote auxiliary device that provides additional DECS-450 contact inputs
and outputs.

Features
CEM-2020s have the following features:
• Contact sensing inputs: 10
• Output contacts: 24
• Functionality of inputs and outputs assigned by BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic
• Communications via CAN Bus

Specifications
Operating Power
Nominal ...................................... 12 or 24 Vdc
Range ......................................... 8 to 32 Vdc (Withstands ride-through down to 6 Vdc for 500 ms.)
Burden ........................................ 14 W

Contact Inputs
The 14 standard programmable inputs, located on the DECS-450, are numbered 1 through 14 and the 10
programmable inputs, located on the CEM-2020, are numbered 15 through 24.
The CEM-2020 contains 10 programmable inputs that accept normally open and normally closed, dry
contacts.

Contact Outputs
The 11 standard programmable outputs, located on the DECS-450, are numbered 1 through 11 and the
24 programmable outputs, located on the CEM-2020, are numbered 12 through 35.
Outputs 12 through 23 ............... 1 Adc at 30 Vdc, Form C, gold contacts∗
Outputs 24 through 35 ............... 4 Adc at 30 Vdc, Form C, 1.2 A pilot duty†
∗ Gold contacts intended for low voltage signaling to dry circuits. Not rated for inductive loads or pilot
duty.
† For pilot duty, the load must be in parallel with a diode rated at least 3 times the coil current and 3 times
the coil voltage.

Communication Interface
The CEM-2020 communicates with the DECS-450 through CAN1.

CAN Bus
Differential Bus Voltage.............. 1.5 to 3 Vdc
Maximum Voltage ...................... –32 to +32 Vdc with respect to negative battery terminal
Communication Rate.................. 125 or 250 kb/s

Type Tests
Shock
Withstands 15 G in 3 perpendicular planes.

DECS-450 Contact Expansion Module

31-2 9597100990

Vibration
Swept over the following ranges for 12 sweeps in each of three mutually perpendicular planes with each
15-minute sweep consisting of the following:
5 to 29 to 5 Hz ............................ 1.5 G peak for 5 min.
29 to 52 to 29 Hz ........................ 0.036” Double Amplitude for 2.5 min.
52 to 500 to 52 Hz ...................... 5 G peak for 7.5 min.

HALT (Highly Accelerated Life Testing)

HALT is used by Basler Electric to prove that our products will provide the user with many years of
reliable service. HALT subjects the device to extremes in temperature, shock, and vibration to simulate
years of operation, but in a much shorter period span. HALT allows Basler Electric to evaluate all possible
design elements that will add to the life of this device. As an example of some of the extreme testing
conditions, the CEM-2020 was subjected to temperature tests (tested over a temperature range of –80°C
to +130°C), vibration tests (of 5 to 50 G at +25°C), and temperature/vibration tests (tested at 10 to 20 G
over a temperature range of –60°C to +100°C). Combined temperature and vibration testing at these
extremes proves that the CEM-2020 is expected to provide long-term operation in a rugged environment.
Note that the vibration and temperature extremes listed in this paragraph are specific to HALT and do not
reflect recommended operation levels. These operational ratings are included in the Specifications
section of this manual.

Environment
Temperature
Operating ............................. –40 to +70°C (–40 to +158°F)
Storage ................................ –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F)
Humidity ..................................... IEC 68-2-38

Agency, Standards, and Directives

UL Approval
The CEM-2020 is a Recognized Component for the US and Canada under UL file E97035
(CCN-FTPM2/FTPM8) covered under the Standards below:
• UL 6200
• CSA C22.2 No.14-13
The CEM-2020 is a Recognized Component for the US and Canada under UL file E470837
(CCN-FTWD2/FTWD8) for use in Hazardous Locations:
• Class I Division 2
• Groups A, B, C & D
CSA Approval
The CEM-2020 is covered under CSA file 1042505 (LR23131-138S).
• CSA C22.2 No. 14-13
CE Compliance
This product complies with the requirements of the following EC Directives:
• Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2014/35/EU
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 2014/30/EU
• Hazardous Substances (RoHS 2) - 2011/65/EU as amended by (EU) 2015/863
This product conforms to the following Harmonized Standards:
• EN 50178:1997 - Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations
• EN 61000-6-4:2007; with AMD 1:2011 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards,
Emission Standard for Industrial Environments
• EN 61000-6-2:2005 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards, Immunity for
Industrial Environments
Contact Expansion Module DECS-450
9597100990 31-3

• EN 50581:2012, Ed. 12 - Technical Documentation for the Assessment of Electrical and Electronic
Products with respect to the Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
• IEC 63000:2016 Ed. 1.0 - Technical Documentation for the Assessment of Electrical and Electronic
Products with respect to the Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
• IEC 62474:2018 Ed. 2.0 – Material Declaration for Products of and for the Electrotechnical Industry
EAC Mark (Eurasian Conformity)
• TP TC 004/2011
• TP TC 020/2011
Physical
Weight ...................................... 2.25 lb (1.02 kg)
Dimensions ................................ See Installation below.

Installation
Contact Expansion Modules are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage. Upon receipt of
a module, check the part number against the requisition and packing list for agreement. Inspect for
damage, and if there is evidence of such, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler
Electric regional sales office, your sales representative, or a sales representative at Basler Electric,
Highland, Illinois USA.
If the device is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and dust-
free environment.
Mounting
Contact Expansion Modules are contained in a potted plastic case and may be mounted in any
convenient position. The construction of a Contact Expansion Module is durable enough to mount directly
on a genset using ¼-inch hardware. Hardware selection should be based on any expected
shipping/transportation and operating conditions. The torque applied to the mounting hardware should not
exceed 65 in-lb (7.34 N•m).
See Figure 31-1 for CEM-2020 overall dimensions. All dimensions are shown in inches with millimeters in
parenthesis.

Figure 31-1. CEM-2020 Overall Dimensions

DECS-450 Contact Expansion Module

31-4 9597100990

Connections
Contact Expansion Module connections are dependent on the application. Incorrect wiring may result in
damage to the module.

Notes
Operating power from the battery must be of the correct polarity.
Although reverse polarity will not cause damage, the CEM-2020 will
not operate.
Be sure that the CEM-2020 is hard-wired to earth ground with no
smaller than 12 AWG copper wire attached to the chassis ground
terminal on the module.

Terminations
The terminal interface consists of plug-in connectors with screw-down compression terminals.
CEM-2020 connections are made with one 5-position connector, two 18-position connectors, and two 24-
position connectors with screw-down compression terminals. These connectors plug into headers on the
CEM-2020. The connectors and headers have dovetailed edges that ensure proper connector orientation.
Also, the connectors and headers are uniquely keyed to ensure that the connectors mate only with the
correct headers.
Connectors and headers may contain tin- or gold-plated conductors. Tin-plated conductors are housed in
a black plastic casing and gold-plated conductors are housed in an orange plastic casing. Mate
connectors to headers of the same color only.

Caution
By mating conductors of dissimilar metals, galvanic corrosion could
occur which deteriorates connections and leads to signal loss.

Connector screw terminals accept a maximum wire size of 12 AWG. Maximum screw torque is 5 in-lb
(0.56 N•m).

Operating Power
The Contact Expansion Module operating power input accepts either 12 Vdc or 24 Vdc and tolerates
voltage over the range of 6 to 32 Vdc. Operating power must be of the correct polarity. Although reverse
polarity will not cause damage, the CEM-2020 will not operate. Operating power terminals are listed in
Table 31-1.
It is recommended that a fuse be added for additional protection for the wiring to the battery input of the
Contact Expansion Module. A Bussmann ABC-7 fuse or equivalent is recommended.
Table 31-1. Operating Power Terminals
Terminal Description
P1- (SHIELD) Chassis ground connection
P1- – (BATT–) Negative side of operating power input
P1- + (BATT+) Positive side of operating power input

Contact Inputs and Contact Outputs

The CEM-2020 (Figure 31-2) has 10 contact inputs and 24 contact outputs.

Contact Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 31-5

Figure 31-2. CEM-2020 Input Contact and Output Contact Terminals

CAN Bus Interface

These terminals provide communication using the SAE J1939 protocol and provide high-speed
communication between the Contact Expansion Module and the DECS-450. Connections between the
CEM-2020 and DECS-450 should be made with twisted-pair, shielded cable. CAN Bus interface terminals
are listed in Table 31-2. Refer to Figure 31-3 and Figure 31-4.
Table 31-2. CAN Bus Interface Terminals
Terminal Description
P1- HI (CAN H) CAN high connection (yellow wire)
P1- LO (CAN L) CAN low connection (green wire)
P1- (SHIELD) CAN drain connection

DECS-450 Contact Expansion Module

31-6 9597100990

Note
1. If the CEM-2020 is providing one end of the J1939 bus, a 120 Ω,
½ watt terminating resistor should be installed across terminals
P1- LO (CANL) and P1- HI (CANH).
2. If the CEM-2020 is not part of the J1939 bus, the stub connecting
the CEM-2020 to the bus should not exceed 914 mm (3 ft) in
length.
3. The maximum bus length, not including stubs, is 40 m (131 ft).
4. The J1939 drain (shield) should be grounded at one point only. If
grounded elsewhere, do not connect the drain to the CEM-2020.

Figure 31-3. CAN Bus Interface with CEM-2020 providing One End of the Bus

Figure 31-4. CAN Bus Interface with DECS-450 providing One End of the Bus

Contact Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 31-7

Communications
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings, Communications, CAN bus, Remote Module Setup
HMI Navigation Path: Settings, Communication, CAN bus, Remote Module Setup, Contact Expansion
Module
The contact expansion module must be enabled with the correct J1939 address. A Control Area Network
(CAN) is a standard interface that enables communication between the CEM-2020 and the DECS-450.
The Remote Module Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 31-5.

Figure 31-5. Remote Module Setup

Functional Description
Contact Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Inputs, Remote Contact Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Not available through HMI.
The CEM-2020 provides 10 programmable contact inputs with the same functionality as the contact
inputs on the DECS-450. The label text of each contact input is customizable and accepts an
alphanumeric character string with a maximum of 64 characters.
The remote contact inputs are incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by
selecting them from the I/O group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus section.
BESTCOMSPlus settings for remote contact inputs are illustrated in Figure 31-6.

Figure 31-6. Remote Contact Inputs Settings

DECS-450 Contact Expansion Module

31-8 9597100990

Contact Outputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings, Programmable Outputs, Remote Contact Outputs
HMI Navigation Path: Not available through HMI.
The CEM-2020 provides 24 programmable contact outputs with the same functionality as the contact
outputs on the DECS-450. Outputs 12 through 23 can carry 1 A. Outputs 24 through 35 can carry 4 A.
The label text of each contact output is customizable and accepts an alphanumeric character string with a
maximum of 64 characters.
The remote analog outputs are incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by
selecting them from the I/O group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus section.
BESTCOMSPlus settings for remote contact outputs are illustrated in Figure 31-7.

Figure 31-7. Remote Contact Outputs Settings

Status LED
This red LED flashes to indicate that the CEM-2020 is powered up and functioning properly. The LED
remains lit during power up. When the power-up sequence is complete, this LED flashes. If the LED does
not flash after power up, contact Basler Electric.

Metering
Contact Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Contact Inputs
HMI Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Inputs, Remote Contact Inputs
The status of the remote contact inputs are shown on this screen. The status is TRUE when the
corresponding indicator is green. Refer to Figure 31-8.

Figure 31-8. Remote Contact Inputs Metering

Contact Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 31-9

Contact Outputs
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Metering, Programmable Outputs, Remote Contact Outputs
HMI Navigation Path: Metering, Status, Outputs, Remote Contact Outputs
The status of the remote contact outputs are shown on this screen. The status is TRUE when the
corresponding indicator is green. Refer to Figure 31-9.

Figure 31-9. Remote Contact Outputs Metering

Maintenance
Preventive maintenance consists of periodically checking that the connections between the
CEM-2020 and the system are clean and tight. Contact Expansion Modules are manufactured using
state-of-the-art surface-mount technology. As such, Basler Electric recommends that no repair
procedures be attempted by anyone other than Basler Electric personnel.

Firmware Updates
Refer to the BESTCOMSPlus® section for instructions on updating firmware in the CEM-2020.

DECS-450 Contact Expansion Module

31-10 9597100990

Contact Expansion Module DECS-450

9597100990 32-1

32 • BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader

Tool
Introduction
The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is a software application, which allows the user to instantly
upload settings to Basler BESTCOMSPlus-compatible products by scanning a pre-registered bar code,
which promotes consistency, reduces potential errors, and saves time.

Setup
The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool software and a bar code reader (acquired separately) must be
installed on the same PC.

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool Installation

System Recommendations
The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is bundled with BESTCOMSPlus software. BESTCOMSPlus
software is built on the Microsoft® .NET Framework. The setup utility that installs BESTCOMSPlus on
your PC also installs the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool and the required version of .NET
Framework (if not already installed). BESTCOMSPlus operates with systems using Windows® 7 SP1,
Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 version 1607 (Anniversary Update) or later. Microsoft Internet Explorer
5.01 or later must be installed on your PC before installing BESTCOMSPlus. System recommendations
for the .NET Framework and BESTCOMSPlus are listed in Table 32-1.
Table 32-1. System Recommendations for BESTCOMSPlus and the .NET Framework
System Type Component Recommendation
32/64 bit Processor 2.0 GHz
32/64 bit RAM 1 GB (minimum), 2 GB (recommended)
32 bit Hard Drive 200 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC)
4.5 GB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC)
64 bit Hard Drive 200 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC)
4.5 GB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC)
To install and run BESTCOMSPlus, a Windows user must have Administrator rights.

Installation

Note
Do not connect a USB cable until setup completes successfully.
Connecting a USB cable before setup is complete may result in errors.

1. Insert the BESTCOMSPlus CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.

2. When the BESTCOMSPlus Setup and Documentation CD menu appears, click the Install button for
the BESTCOMSPlus application. The setup utility installs BESTCOMSPlus, the .NET Framework (if
not already installed), the USB driver, and the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool on your PC.
When BESTCOMSPlus installation is complete, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows
programs menu. This folder is accessed by clicking the Windows Start button and then accessing the
Basler Electric folder in the Programs menu. The Basler Electric folder contains an icon that starts the
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool

32-2 9597100990

Bar Code Reader and Bar Codes

The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is compatible with bar code readers, which conform to
UnifiedPOS specifications. Bar code readers and bar code labels are not provided and must be acquired
separately. Refer to the bar code reader’s documentation for installation instructions.
Any bar code compatible with your bar code reader may be used.

BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool settings are found on two main screens, the Loader Grid and
Configuration screen. The Loader Grid contains management options for the product settings files and
their associated bar codes. The Configuration screen contains product-specific options for the default
behavior of the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool. These settings are described in the following
paragraphs.

Loader Grid
One entry, or row, in the Loader Grid contains all of the necessary data to associate a product settings file
with a bar code. New entries can be added. Existing entries can be edited, deleted, and uploaded to a
Basler product.

Figure 32-1. Loader Grid

Scanning Bar Codes

Place the cursor in the text field, found at the top of the Loader Grid screen, and scan a bar code. If
successful, the digits which comprise the bar code appear in the text field. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings
Loader Tool automatically searches for this bar code among the entries in the Loader Grid and displays
the matching entry. Click Clear to remove the digits from the text field.

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool DECS-450

9597100990 32-3

Adding an Entry
Click Add to create an entry. The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool: Add Device dialog box appears
(Figure 32-2).

Figure 32-2. Add Device Screen

Enter the name of the entry in the Name field. This appears in the first column of the Loader Grid.
Select the product type from the Type drop-down menu. This appears in the second column of the Loader
Grid.
Enter the bar code of the entry in the UPC Barcode field by placing the cursor in the UPC Barcode field
and scanning the bar code.
To select the product settings file for the entry, click the browse (…) button in the Location field. Use
standard Windows methods to navigate to the desired product settings file and click Open. Ensure that
the selected product type in the Type field matches that of the product settings file specified in the
Location field.
Click OK when finished.

Editing an Entry
To Edit an existing entry, select the entry in the Loader Grid and click Edit. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings
Loader Tool: Edit Device dialog box appears. The options are identical to those of the Add Device dialog.
When the desired changes have been made, click OK.

Deleting an Entry
To delete an entry from the Loader Grid, select the entry and click the Delete button. A prompt appears
providing the option to confirm or cancel the deletion.

Uploading an Entry
Select an entry and click Upload. A dialog appears which provides connection options for the appropriate
type of device. Refer to the Basler product instruction manual for detailed connection information. Once a
connection is established, the product settings associated with the entry are uploaded.

Configuration Settings
For configuration settings, click the Configure button in the bottom left of the Loader Grid. The product
tabs on the left represent the compatible Basler products. Each product tab contains tabs for Settings
Files and Connection Options. The options on these tabs are described below.

Setting Files Options

Use Saved Path: When enabled, the path specified in the Loader Grid entry is used when uploading the
settings file.

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool

32-4 9597100990

Single Folder: When enabled, this specifies a single folder, which contains all settings files for the
product. The Windows filename specified in the Location field of the Loader Grid entry is searched for in
the Single Folder location. For example, all settings files for a product are located in “C:\files”. The
Location field in the Loader Grid entry for a device contains “C:\documents\settings\DECS-250
Settings.bstx”. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool searches in “C:\files” for the file named
“DECS-250 Settings.bstx”.
Append Bar-Code to Location: When enabled, the bar code is appended to the specified location when
uploading the settings file. For example, an entry with the bar code “0002” is located in C:\files\0002 and
an entry with the bar code “0003” is located in C:\files\0003.
Logon: If User Name and Password are specified, you will not be prompted for credentials when
required.
Save After Upload: After uploading a settings file, the settings are downloaded from the connected
device and saved to the specified location, when enabled.
Upload Security: When enabled, the security settings stored in the settings file are uploaded to the
device. Credentials will be requested if not already specified.
Figure 32-3 illustrates the Setting Files tab.

Figure 32-3. Configuration, Settings Files Tab

Connection Options
Connection options consist of the three selections described below. Refer to the Basler product
instruction manual for detailed connection information.

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool DECS-450

9597100990 32-5

Always Prompt for Connection: When enabled, a dialog appears which provides connection options for
the appropriate type of device each time a connection attempt is made.
Ethernet Connection: When enabled, the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool automatically attempts
to connect to the specified IP address before uploading settings.
USB Connection: When enabled, the BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool automatically attempts to
connect to the device via USB port before uploading settings.
Figure 32-4 illustrates the Connection Options tab.

Figure 32-4. Configuration, Connection Options Tab

General Operation
The steps listed below are provided as a general guideline for how to operate the BESTCOMSPlus
Settings Loader Tool when the initial setup is complete and the settings files are associated with bar
codes.
1. Power on the device that will receive the new settings. Ensure proper communication connections
have been made between the device and the PC running BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.
2. Run BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.
3. Place cursor in search bar.
4. Scan bar code.
5. Settings file is automatically highlighted and isolated in the grid.

DECS-450 BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool

32-6 9597100990

6. Click Upload.
7. BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool automatically connects to device and uploads settings. Device
connection is automatic unless “Always prompt for connection” is enabled.

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool DECS-450

12570 State Route 143 No. 59 Heshun Road Loufeng District (N) 111 North Bridge Road
Highland IL 62249-1074 USA Suzhou Industrial Park 15-06 Peninsula Plaza
Tel: +1 618.654.2341 215122 Suzhou Singapore 179098
Fax: +1 618.654.2351 P.R. CHINA Tel: +65 68.44.6445
email: [email protected] Tel: +86 512.8227.2888 Fax: +65 68.44.8902
Fax: +86 512.8227.2887 email: [email protected]
email: [email protected]